CribMaster 9 End-User Training

CribMaster 9 User Guide

CRIBMASTER 9 USER GUIDE

CribMaster 9 End-User Training

Copyright WinWare, Inc. 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011 All rights reserved. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation WinWare, Inc. 1955 West Oak Circle Marietta, GA 30062 Phone (888) 419-1399 (770) 419-1399 Fax (770) 419-1968 http://www.wwga.com

Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1: USING CRIBMASTER 9.................................................................................................... 7 THE MAIN SCREEN....................................................................................................................................... 7 UNDERSTANDING THE FUNCTION TABS ....................................................................................................... 8 USING THE QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR ........................................................................................................ 15 UNDERSTANDING THE CM EXPLORER ....................................................................................................... 16 CHANGING THE SCREEN'S APPEARANCE .................................................................................................... 17 LOGGING IN TO CRIBMASTER .................................................................................................................... 18 LOGGING OUT OF CRIBMASTER ................................................................................................................. 18 SIGNING ON A NEW USER .......................................................................................................................... 19 CHANGING USERS ...................................................................................................................................... 20 CHANGING YOUR PASSWORD .................................................................................................................... 20 ENTERING AND EDITING DATA .................................................................................................................. 22 SAVING DATA AND APPLYING CHANGES ................................................................................................... 24 NAVIGATING PROPERTY PAGES ................................................................................................................. 25 SEARCHING AND SORTING RECORDS ......................................................................................................... 27 CUSTOMIZING THE START PAGE ................................................................................................................ 39 UNDERSTANDING THE CRIBMASTER LOGIN STATUS DIALOG BOX ............................................................ 45 CHAPTER 2: WORKING WITH ITEMS............................................................................................... 47 UNDERSTANDING ITEM TYPES ................................................................................................................... 47 UNDERSTANDING ITEM PROPERTIES .......................................................................................................... 48 CONTROLLING ACCESS TO INVENTORY...................................................................................................... 55 INTERACTION WITH THE ISSUE SCREEN ...................................................................................................... 55 RESTRICTED INVENTORY ITEMS ................................................................................................................. 56 UNDERSTANDING ITEM COST AND ISSUE PRICE ......................................................................................... 58 UNDERSTANDING USAGE TRACKING ......................................................................................................... 59 WORKING WITH LOT NUMBERS ................................................................................................................. 59 UNDERSTANDING THE CHECK OUT TIME LIMIT ......................................................................................... 68 UNDERSTANDING FOREIGN OBJECT DEBRIS (FOD) CONTROL................................................................... 68 USING THE LINKS TAB ............................................................................................................................... 69 USING THE SUPPLIERS TAB ........................................................................................................................ 72 USING THE HISTORY TAB ........................................................................................................................... 76 USING THE TRANSACTIONS TAB ................................................................................................................ 79 UNDERSTANDING TABLE AND FIELD LEVEL AUDIT ................................................................................... 82 WORKING WITH XREF ITEMS .................................................................................................................... 82 WORKING WITH GAUGES ........................................................................................................................... 85 UNDERSTANDING REWORKABLE ITEMS ..................................................................................................... 86 USING THE GAUGE TAB ............................................................................................................................. 93 CALIBRATION STANDARDS AND MEASUREMENTS ..................................................................................... 97 USING THE INVENTORY RECORDS SCREEN ................................................................................................ 98 CHAPTER 3: WORKING WITH CRIBS ............................................................................................. 101 USING THE CRIB/BIN RECORDS SCREEN .................................................................................................. 101 USING THE CRIB INFORMATION TAB ........................................................................................................ 101 USING THE ADVANCED TAB..................................................................................................................... 104 UNDERSTANDING ITEM-CENTRIC ORDERING ........................................................................................... 108 USING THE TRANSACTIONS TAB .............................................................................................................. 109 USING THE CYCLE COUNTING TAB .......................................................................................................... 111 CHAPTER 4: WORKING WITH BINS ................................................................................................ 115

Page 3 of 525

USING THE BIN INFORMATION TAB .......................................................................................................... 115 STOCKING SATELLITE BINS ...................................................................................................................... 119 UNDERSTANDING THE SCHEDULE PRICE CHANGE DIALOG BOX .............................................................. 122 USING THE ORDER INFORMATION TAB .................................................................................................... 124 DETERMINING HOW MUCH TO ORDER ..................................................................................................... 129 USING THE SAFETY STOCK TAB ............................................................................................................... 130 UNDERSTANDING ALERTS FOR CRITICAL QUANTITY LEVEL.................................................................... 131 USING THE USAGE INFORMATION TAB..................................................................................................... 132 USING THE TRANSACTIONS TAB .............................................................................................................. 134 USING THE LINKS TAB ............................................................................................................................. 137 USING THE AUDIT TAB............................................................................................................................. 139 USING THE PO HISTORY TAB ................................................................................................................... 140 USING THE CRIB/BIN RECORDS SCREEN .................................................................................................. 141 CHAPTER 5: WORKING WITH SERIAL ITEMS............................................................................. 147 CREATING A NEW SERIAL ID ................................................................................................................... 147 EDITING A SERIAL ID............................................................................................................................... 148 DELETING A SERIAL ID ............................................................................................................................ 148 USING THE SERIAL INFORMATION TAB .................................................................................................... 148 UNDERSTANDING THE TRANSACTIONS TAB ............................................................................................. 151 USING THE STATUS HISTORY TAB ........................................................................................................... 154 UNDERSTANDING THE LINKS TAB ............................................................................................................ 157 USING THE ADVANCED TAB..................................................................................................................... 158 USING THE GAUGE/INSP TOOL TAB ........................................................................................................ 162 USING THE CERTIFICATION TAB .............................................................................................................. 165 USING THE SERIAL ID RECORDS SCREEN ................................................................................................. 166 CHAPTER 6: WORKING WITH USER DEFINED FIELDS............................................................. 171 CREATING USER DEFINED FIELDS ............................................................................................................ 172 EDITING A USER DEFINED FIELD.............................................................................................................. 172 WORKING WITH THE USER DEFINED FIELDS SCREEN ............................................................................... 173 CHAPTER 7: WORKING WITH EMPLOYEE RECORDS .............................................................. 181 USING THE NAME AND ID TAB ................................................................................................................ 181 USING THE DEFAULTS TAB ...................................................................................................................... 184 USING THE HISTORY TAB ......................................................................................................................... 185 USING THE ACCESS TAB .......................................................................................................................... 186 USING THE LOGIN HISTORY TAB.............................................................................................................. 190 USING THE SECURITY HISTORY TAB ........................................................................................................ 192 USING THE CRAFT CODES TAB ................................................................................................................ 193 USING THE EMPLOYEE RECORDS SCREEN ................................................................................................ 194 CHAPTER 8: WORKING WITH SUPPLIERS.................................................................................... 197 CREATING A NEW SUPPLIER RECORD ...................................................................................................... 197 EDITING A SUPPLIER RECORD .................................................................................................................. 197 DELETING A SUPPLIER RECORD ............................................................................................................... 197 USING THE ADDRESS INFORMATION TAB ................................................................................................. 198 USING THE PURCHASING INFO TAB .......................................................................................................... 200 USING THE BLANKET PO TAB .................................................................................................................. 202 USING THE SUPPLIER RECORDS SCREEN .................................................................................................. 205 CHAPTER 9: WORKING WITH KITS................................................................................................ 207 UNDERSTANDING KITS ............................................................................................................................ 207 MERGING KIT COMPONENTS .................................................................................................................... 208 UNDERSTANDING THE MERGE KIT COMPONENTS DIALOG BOX .............................................................. 208 USING THE KIT TAB ................................................................................................................................. 210

Page 4 of 525

CREATING AN UNASSEMBLED KIT ........................................................................................................... 211 CREATING AN ASSEMBLED KIT ................................................................................................................ 212 ADDING ITEMS TO A KIT .......................................................................................................................... 213 REMOVING ITEMS FROM A KIT ................................................................................................................. 213 USING THE INSPECT KIT DIALOG BOX ..................................................................................................... 214 DISASSEMBLING A KIT FROM THE CRIB/BIN OR INVENTORY RECORDS SCREEN ...................................... 216 CHAPTER 10: MANAGING TRANSACTIONS.................................................................................. 217 ISSUING ITEMS ......................................................................................................................................... 217 ISSUING A KIT .......................................................................................................................................... 218 USING THE ISSUE ITEM SCREEN ............................................................................................................... 220 RETURNING AN ITEM................................................................................................................................ 226 USING THE INSPECT KIT DIALOG BOX ..................................................................................................... 228 USING THE RETURN ITEM SCREEN ........................................................................................................... 230 USING THE SHOW ITEM LOCATION DIALOG BOX ..................................................................................... 233 CHAPTER 11: WORKING WITH RESERVATIONS ........................................................................ 235 CREATING A RESERVATION ...................................................................................................................... 235 ISSUING AGAINST A RESERVATION .......................................................................................................... 236 UNDERSTANDING THE RESERVATIONS SCREEN ....................................................................................... 236 USING THE RESERVATION PROPERTIES TAB ............................................................................................ 239 USING THE MORE TAB ............................................................................................................................. 241 CHAPTER 12: USING CYCLE COUNTING....................................................................................... 243 USING THE CYCLE COUNTING SCREEN .................................................................................................... 244 ENTERING AN ACTUAL COUNT ................................................................................................................ 248 ADJUSTING THE BIN COUNT FROM THE CYCLE COUNTING SCREEN ......................................................... 249 SCHEDULING ADDITIONAL BINS .............................................................................................................. 249 COUNTING SERIALIZED ITEMS IN CRIBMASTER CLIENT .......................................................................... 250 CHAPTER 13: UNDERSTANDING TRANSFERS ............................................................................. 251 TRANSFERRING ITEMS.............................................................................................................................. 252 TRANSFERRING TO DIFFERENT ITEMS ...................................................................................................... 256 UNDERSTANDING THE SATELLITE STOCKING DIALOG BOX ..................................................................... 259 COMPLETING TRANSFERS ........................................................................................................................ 260 CHAPTER 14: UNDERSTANDING PURCHASING .......................................................................... 265 UNDERSTANDING AVERAGE LEAD TIME.................................................................................................. 266 UNDERSTANDING ORDER POINT .............................................................................................................. 267 UNDERSTANDING SAFETY STOCK ............................................................................................................ 268 UNDERSTANDING ITEM ORDERING .......................................................................................................... 269 DETERMINING HOW MUCH TO ORDER ..................................................................................................... 269 AUTHORIZING PURCHASE ORDERS .......................................................................................................... 271 UNDERSTANDING THE ITEMS TO ORDER / REQUEST ITEMS BE PURCHASED DIALOG BOX ....................... 271 UNDERSTANDING ONE-TIME PURCHASES ................................................................................................ 277 WORKING WITH PURCHASE ORDERS ........................................................................................................ 278 USING THE PURCHASE ORDER DETAIL TAB ............................................................................................. 286 RECEIVING ORDERS AND REWORKS......................................................................................................... 289 UNDERSTANDING THE SELECT ITEMS BEING RECEIVED SCREEN ............................................................. 289 INSPECTING RECEIPTS .............................................................................................................................. 292 UNDERSTANDING THE ITEMS IN INSPECTION SCREEN .............................................................................. 294 RETURNING PURCHASED ITEMS ............................................................................................................... 297 UNDERSTANDING THE PURCHASED ITEMS TO RETURN TO SUPPLIER SCREEN ......................................... 298 CHAPTER 15: MANAGING REPORTS .............................................................................................. 303 PRINT SEQUENCING AND RECORD SELECTION ......................................................................................... 303

Page 5 of 525

SENDING REPORTS TO OTHER DESTINATIONS .......................................................................................... 304 UNDERSTANDING REPORT CUSTOMIZATIONS .......................................................................................... 306 USING CRYSTAL FREE FORM SELECTION CRITERIA ................................................................................. 308 WORKING WITH SCHEDULED REPORTS .................................................................................................... 310 CHAPTER 16: USING ADMINISTRATION FUNCTIONS ............................................................... 315 USING THE CONFIGURATION TAB ............................................................................................................ 315 USING THE INVENTORY GROUPS TAB ...................................................................................................... 340 USING THE CYCLE COUNTING TAB .......................................................................................................... 341 USING THE ORDERING TAB ...................................................................................................................... 346 USING THE SAFETY STOCK TAB ............................................................................................................... 356 USING THE USER DEFINED FIELDS TAB ................................................................................................... 357 USING THE PERFORMANCE TAB ............................................................................................................... 358 CONFIGURING THE DATA SOURCE ........................................................................................................... 363 USING DATABASE UTILITIES .................................................................................................................... 365 INTERPRETING CRIBMASTER STATUS ...................................................................................................... 373 UNDERSTANDING CRIBMASTER SECURITY .............................................................................................. 374 WORKING WITH SECURITY ACCESS CODES .............................................................................................. 374 WORKING WITH REASON AND STATUS CODES ......................................................................................... 384 WORKING WITH REASON AND STATUS CODES ......................................................................................... 384 USING THE EVENT LOG ............................................................................................................................ 399 USING THE EXCEPTION LIST..................................................................................................................... 400 USING THE CRIBMASTER SERVER LOG .................................................................................................... 401 CHAPTER 17: USING CMRADIO AND CMSCAN............................................................................ 403 INSTALLING CMRADIO ............................................................................................................................. 403 STARTING CMRADIO ................................................................................................................................ 404 USING THE CMRADIO SCREEN ................................................................................................................. 404 USING CUSTOM EMPLOYEE ID BAR-CODES ............................................................................................. 405 UNDERSTANDING CMRADIO OPTIONS ..................................................................................................... 406 CMSCAN OVERVIEW ................................................................................................................................ 412 CHAPTER 18: USING ATR ................................................................................................................... 483 ADDING SECONDARY CRIBS IN ATR 9..................................................................................................... 489 ADJUSTING ITEM COUNTS IN ATR........................................................................................................... 490 SETTING UP THE WEB CATALOG ............................................................................................................. 491 LINKING FILES FOR ATR IN CM CLIENT .................................................................................................. 493 USING THE COST CENTERS SCREEN IN ATR ............................................................................................ 497 USING THE FIND ITEM BUTTON IN ATR................................................................................................... 499 USING ATR DIAGNOSTICS ....................................................................................................................... 501 ATR OPTIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 505 UNDERSTANDING THE DEFAULT OPTIONS SCREEN .................................................................................. 505 OPTIONS FOR RFID DEVICES ................................................................................................................... 514 CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 515 OPTIONS FOR SPECIFIC MACHINES ........................................................................................................... 518 WEIGH STATION OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................ 525

Page 6 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Chapter 1: Using CribMaster 9

CribMaster 9 contains features designed to help users quickly search for and access data. Icons, menus and records screens can be accessed from nearly everywhere within the application.

The Main Screen

This is the CribMaster main screen:

Page 7 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Understanding the Function Tabs

These are the function tabs:

Click any of these tabs to access a batch of functions specific to that tab. NOTE: If you have used CribMaster before, you may notice that the names of the tabs are the same as the names of the menus in previous versions of CribMaster. Home - These functions are used to manage CribMaster data. Inventory Items... - Click this icon to access the Item Records screen. Bin... - Click this icon to access the Bin Records screen. Serial ID... - Click this icon to access the Serial ID Records screen. User Defined Fields These are record screens for any userdefined fields you have set up. Employee... - Click this icon to access the Employee Records screen. Supplier... - Click this icon to access the Supplier Records screen. Edit Purchase Orders... - Click this icon to edit existing purchase orders. Transactions... - Click this icon to access the Transactions screen. Issue Item... - Click this icon to access the Item Issue screen. Return Item... - Click this icon to access the Item Return screen. Bin to Pending Rework... - Click this icon to send a gauge from a bin to Pending Rework status. Find Item... - Click this icon to locate an item in the system. Transfer Items... - Click this icon to transfer items to other cribs, bins or into other items. Assets... - Click this icon to access the Asset Records screen.* Tasks... - Click this icon to edit existing tasks.*

Page 8 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 WO Templates... - Click this icon to edit existing Work Order Templates.* Schedules... - Click this icon to access the Work Order Schedules screen.* Scheduled Work Orders... - Click this icon to create a work order from an existing schedule.* Work Orders... - Click this icon to edit existing work orders.* * - These functions are only available with a Preventive Maintenance license. System - These functions are used to configure CribMaster. Change Users - Click this icon to change the active user. Sign On... - Click this icon to log in to CribMaster. Sign Off - Click this icon to log out of CribMaster. Change Passwd... - Click this icon to change your CribMaster password. Data Source... - Click this icon to configure the CribMaster data source. Db Utilities - Click this icon to access a set of database tools. System Options - Click this icon to configure CribMaster options. Local Options - Click this icon to configure local CribMaster options. Send EMail - Click this icon to send an e-mail to support. Logs & Status - Click this icon to view system logs. Security Access Codes... - Click this icon to access the Security Access Codes screen. Item Access Codes... - Click this icon to access the Item Access Codes screen. XREF Type Codes... - Click this icon to access the Relationship Type Codes screen. Transaction Reason Codes - Click this icon to access the Security Transaction Reason Codes screen. Status Reason Codes - Click this icon to access the Status Reason Codes screen. Custom Field Codes - Click this icon to access the Custom Field Codes screen. Other Codes - Click this icon to access the PO Detail Reason Codes or Item Status Codes screens. Broadcast Message - Click this icon to enter a message for all CribMaster users on your network to see.

Page 9 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 Preferences - Click this drop-down to select one of the following options: Reset Column Headings - Select this option to restore previous settings to all column headings in the system. Show Inactive Entries - Select this option to view disabled entries in the various records screens. NOTE: With this option selected, inactive entries are listed in gray. Enable Virtual Grid Mode - Select this option to prevent CribMaster from attempting to download all records from a table at once and/or forcing a user to create a query. Show Start Page - Select this option to toggle the start page on and off. Appearance Options - Click one of these icons to set the color scheme of your CribMaster installation. Exit - Click this icon to leave CribMaster. Actions - These functions are used to perform certain actions in CribMaster. Issue Item... - Click this icon to access the Item Issue screen. Return Item... - Click this icon to access the Item Return screen. Find Item... - Click this icon to locate an item in the system. Reservations... - Click this icon to access the Reservations screen. Inventory Items... - Click this icon to access the Item Records screen. Bin... - Click this icon to access the Bin Records screen. Pending Rework to Supplier... - Click this icon to send a gauge from Pending Rework status to its supplier. Bin to Pending Rework... - Click this icon to send a gauge from a bin to Pending Rework status. Pending Rework Back to Bin... - Click this icon to send a gauge from Pending Rework status back to its bin. Cycle Counting... - Click this icon to perform a cycle count. Recalculate All Bins... - Click this icon to recalculate all bins in the system. This is a useful way to ensure all bin activity is settled and refreshed. Page 10 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

NOTE: In order to use this function, Cm Agent must be active. Cancel Bin Recalculation... - Click this icon to cancel the bin recalculation function. Send Gauges to Calibration... - Click this icon to send a gauge to calibration. Return Gauges from Calibration... - Click this icon to return a gauge from calibration. Recalculate All Gauge Dates... - Click this icon to recalculate the calibration dates for all gauge item types. This is a useful feature for keeping gauges up to date. Import Batch Transactions... - Click this icon to import batch transactions. Reconcile Batch Transactions... - Click this icon to reconcile batch transactions. Synchronize Intersite Transfers... - Click this icon to pick up activity at other sites so the local database will reflect the latest status and location of the Intersite transfers involving you. Pick Item - Click this icon to access the Pick Item screen. PM - These functions are used for Preventive Maintenance actions in CribMaster. NOTE: These functions are only available with a Preventive Maintenance license. New WO... - Click here to create a new work order. New Task... - Click here to create a new task. New WO Template... - Click here to create a new work order template. New WO Schedule... - Click here to create a new work order schedule. New Service Request... - Click here to create a new service request. Work Orders... - Click here to edit existing work orders. Schedules... - Click here to edit existing work order schedules. WO Templates... - Click here to edit existing work order templates. Tasks... - Click here to edit existing tasks. Assets... - Click this icon to access the Asset Records screen. Page 11 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 Scheduled Work Orders... - Click this icon to create a work order from an existing schedule. Assignments... - Click here to assign employees to a work order. Rebuild WO Reservations - Click here to have CribMaster generate an automatic reservation for the parts on a scheduled work order based on the Work Order schedule and the lead time for obtaining the parts. Craft Codes - Click this icon to access the Craft Codes screen. Action Codes - Click this icon to access the Action Codes screen. Reason Codes - Click this icon to access the Reason Codes screen. Location Codes - Click this icon to access the Location Codes screen. Work Orders... - Click this icon to access the Work Orders Reports screen. Tasks... - Click this icon to access the Tasks Reports screen. WO Templates - Click this icon to access the WO Template Reports screen. WO Schedules... - Click this icon to access the WO Schedule Reports screen. WO Transactions... - Click this icon to access the WO Transaction Reports screen. Labor... - Click this icon to access the Labor Reports screen. Assets... - Click this icon to access the Asset Reports screen. Purchasing - These functions are used for Purchasing. Authorize Purchasing... - Click here to authorize a purchase. Request a Purchase... - Click here to request a purchase. Return Purchased Items... - Click here to send back purchased items. Review... - Click here to set a purchase order as having to undergo a review before authorization. Receive Orders and Rework... - Click here to receive items. Inspect Receipts... - Click here to inspect newly received items. Edit Purchase Orders... - Click here to edit existing purchase orders. Purchase Order Details... - Click here to access the Purchase Order Details screen.

Page 12 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 Buyer Groups... - Click this icon to access the Buyer Groups screen. Site Profiles... - Click this icon to access the Site Profiles screen. Lot Numbers... - Click this icon to access the Lot Numbers screen. Item Pricing... Complete Transfers... - Click this icon to complete a transfer. Transfer Items... - Click this icon to transfer items to other cribs, bins or into other items. Stock Satellite Bins... - Click this icon to stock a secondary bin. Restock Transfers... - Click this icon to access the Restock Transfers screen. AutoSend - Click this icon to push your PO files to the P21 FTP site. AutoFetch - Click this icon to retrieve files from the P21 FTP site. View ASN and Receive Items... - Click this icon to access the Advanced Shipping Notice and PO Acknowledgement screen. Recovery Management... - Click this icon to access the Recovery Management screen. Reports - These functions are used for printing or sending reports. Bin... - Click this icon to access the Bin Reports screen. Items... - Click this icon to access the Inventory Reports screen. Employee... - Click this icon to access the Employee Reports screen. Kit... - Click this icon to access the Kit Reports screen. Serialized... - Click this icon to access the Serialized Item Reports screen. Supplier... - Click this icon to access the Supplier Reports screen. Transaction... - Click this icon to access the Transaction Reports screen. Checked Out... - Click this icon to access the Items Checked Out Reports screen. Items in Rework... - Click this icon to access the Items in Rework Reports screen. Receipt... - Click this icon to access the Receipt Reports screen. Page 13 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 Transfers... - Click this icon to print Transfer Reports. Reservation... - Click this icon to access the Reservation Reports screen. User-Defined - Click this icon to access the User-Defined Reports screen. Bin Label... - Click this icon to access the Bin Label Reports screen. Employee Card... - Click this icon to access the Employee Card Reports screen. SerialID Label... - Click this icon to access the Serial ID Label Reports screen. Cycle Counting... - Click this icon to access the Bin Inventory Reports screen. Expiration... - Click this icon to access the Expiring Contract Reports screen. Red Flag... - Click this icon to access the Red Flag Reports screen. Lot Number... - Click this icon to print Lot Reports. PO Detail Reports... - Click this icon to print Purchase Order Detail Reports. Purchase Orders... - Click this icon to print Purchase Orders. Pending Order Reports... - Click this icon to print Pending Order Reports. Analyzer... - Click this icon to access the Analyzer Reports screen. Event Log... - Click this icon to access the Event Log Reports screen. Additional Reports... - Click this icon to access the Additional Reports screen. Scheduled Reports... - Click this icon to access the Report Schedules screen. Help - These are functions related to Help and Licensing. CribMaster Help - Click this icon to access the help system. Using Help - Click this icon to access information on the help system. WinWare Home Page... - Click this icon to access the WinWare home page. Licensing... - Click this icon to access the Licensing dialog box. About CribMaster... - Click this icon to access the About dialog box.

Page 14 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Understanding the Function Ribbon

This is the Function Ribbon:

NOTE: The functions in the above ribbon may be different depending on the tab you have selected.

Minimizing the Ribbon

Minimizing the ribbon gives the screen a cleaner look and opens more space for the display of records. To minimize the ribbon, follow the steps below: 1. Right-click the lower bar. 2. Select Minimize the Ribbon. The ribbon is minimized. To restore the ribbon, follow the steps below: 1. Click one of the menu items. 2. Right-click the lower bar of the ribbon. 3. Select Minimize the Ribbon. The Ribbon is restored.

Using the Quick Access Toolbar

You can add the functions of a tab to the top menu bar to have them available regardless of the screen you are on. To add a set of functions to the Quick Access Toolbar, follow the steps below: 1. Right-click the icon you want to add to the Quick Access Toolbar. 2. Select Add to Quick Access Bar. An icon displays on the Quick Access Bar.

Page 15 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 3. Click the icon to access the functions:

To remove a set of functions to the Quick Access Toolbar, follow the steps below: 1. Right-click the star on the Quick Access Bar. 2. Select Remove from Quick Access Bar. The icon no longer displays.

Understanding the CM Explorer

The main screen features an explorer side bar which can be used as easy access to your data. TIP: You can unpin the CM Explorer by clicking the Push Pin icon . When you click the push pin, the CM Explorer window will hide until you click its icon. TIP: You can close the CM Explorer at any time . by clicking the

Page 16 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Changing the Screen's Appearance

You can alter the color scheme of CribMaster. To change the color scheme, follow the steps below: 1. Click System. 2. Under Appearance, click the down arrow :

3. Select a skin. The color scheme changes.

Page 17 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Logging In to CribMaster
To log in to CribMaster, follow the steps below: 1. Double-click the CribMaster icon on the desktop. The User Login dialog box displays:

2. Do one of the following: Enter your User ID. Click Employee Lookup User ID.

to search for and select your

3. Enter the Password (if required). 4. Select an Application Role. NOTE: The application role you select requires the appropriate license. 5. Click OK. You are logged in to CribMaster. TIP: You can select File > Sign On New User... to log on a new user without logging out first.

Logging Out of CribMaster

To log out of CribMaster click System > Sign Off... The user is logged out.

Page 18 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Signing On a New User

To change users during a session, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Sign On... The User Login dialog box displays:

2. Do one of the following: Enter your User ID. Click Employee Lookup User ID.

to search for and select your

3. Enter the Password (if required). 4. Select an Application Role. NOTE: The application role you select requires the appropriate license. 5. Click OK. You are logged in to CribMaster.

Page 19 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Changing Users
To change users during a session, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Change Users... 2. Select a user from the list. The main screen displays. TIP: You can also click the small arrow on the Change Users icon to view a list of users logged into CribMaster:

NOTE: When you switch from one user to another, the open windows of the original logged in user will close.

Changing Your Password

NOTE: An existing password is necessary for this process. To change your password, follow the steps below: 1. Access the Change Employee Password dialog box by doing one of the following: Enter your User ID and click Change Password... from the Sign On New User dialog box. The Change Employee Password dialog box displays. Click File > Change Password... The Change Employee Password dialog box displays:

Page 20 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

2. 3. 4. 5.

Enter your old password in the Old Password field. Enter your new password in the New Password field. Enter your new password once more in the Verify Password field. Click OK.

NOTE: If the old password is unknown, it must be changed in Employee Properties.

Page 21 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Entering and Editing Data

Understanding Grid Screens and Property Screens
In previous versions of CribMaster, a user could only enter or edit data in properties dialog box. In CribMaster, a user has the option of entering data on property pane or directly in the grid:

To access the properties pane, select a record in the grid and click Properties .

Page 22 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 Editing Grid Records By default, editing functions are disabled in records screens:

To open the grid for editing, click Edit Grid to be edited:

. The data is now able

Page 23 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Saving Data and Applying Changes

Saving Data in Grids
In CribMaster 9, many records are entered into a grid. Unlike previous versions, there is no need to apply or save newly entered records. Information is saved dynamically. The record is saved when the user:

Moves from one row to another Presses Apply (check mark) in the navigator above the property page. Closes the grid tab, switch to a an entirely different top level tab, or close the application.

Saving Data On Properties Pages

TIP: To access the properties pane, select a record in the grid and click Properties .

Unlike grids, fields on property pages are saved as a whole. The record is saved when the user: Clicks . Accesses another property page. Closes the properties pane by clicking Properties .

NOTE: Tabs or fields that enable as a result of data entered may not enable until you click . NOTE: Within a given property page, moving between the subtabs of the property page does not save the data.

Saving Data On Transactional Pages

Transactional screens, or screens with large Save or Process buttons, usually do not save unless the Save or Process button is pressed. The one exception is the Purchasing screens (Review Orders, Authorize Purchasing, Request a Purchase), which implement the normal in-grid editing model in the list of items shown at the bottom. Page 24 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Understanding Icons
CribMaster displays icons to help you determine the status of certain fields: This icon indicates that there is a problem with the data in the associated field. This icon indicates that there is a pending status in the associated field. This icon indicates that there could be a problem in the associated field. NOTE: Items that have the next to them are not saved to the database. Do one of the following: Fix the problem as directed. If the cursor, or focus, is still on the line with the problem, you can press Esc to undo changes. Click Delete.

Navigating Property Pages

On property pages, the top of the tabs features a series of buttons that allows the user to move from record to record.

Page 25 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 The following icons are available at the top of each property page: Click Click Click Click Click Click Click Click Click Click this this this this this this this this this this button button button button button button button button button button to to to to to to to to to to access the first record. page back ten records. move back to the previous record. move forward to the next record. page forward ten records. access the last record. add a record. delete the selected record. accept changes. undo all changes.

To save data on a property page, do one of the following: Click . Access another property page. Close the properties pane by clicking Properties .

NOTE: Tabs or fields that enable as a result of data entered may not enable until you click . NOTE: Users of previous versions of CribMaster may notice that CribMaster 9 does not contain as many "OK" buttons. On many of the screens, the OK button has been replaced by .

Page 26 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Searching and Sorting Records

In most records screens, CribMaster gives you the ability to search and sort the listed records. You can also change the way the records screen looks.

Resize any column by clicking and dragging the sides of the column headers. Change the order of the columns by clicking and dragging them. Right-click any of the column headers to display a list of options:

Sort Ascending - Select this option to sort the column in ascending order. Sort Descending - Select this option to sort the column in descending order. Clear Sorting - Select this option to reset the column sort. Save Current Sort - Select this option to retain the sort configuration for the next time you log in. Page 27 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

NOTE: The sort is stored individually for each user. Group By This Column - Select this option to create a group based on this column. Group By Box - Select this option to open the option to group by column. Remove This Column Select this option to hide the selected column. NOTE: The column can be brought back using the Column Chooser. Column Chooser - Select this option to select a group of columns to display. Best Fit - Select this option to have the column automatically widen or narrow to best display the data. Clear Filter - Select this option to clear the active filter. Filter Editor - Select this option to create or edit a filter. Best Fit (all columns) - Select this option to have all columns automatically widen or narrow to best display the data. Automatically Best Fit Select this option to have the system automatically widen or narrow the columns to best display the data every time that grid is loaded. NOTE: This option is automatically deselected if you manually change a columns width. Refresh - Click here to refresh the data from the database. Reset Columns - Click here to undo any sorting or grouping you may have in place. Enable auto-filter - Click here to open a blank between the header and the data for quickly locating records by typing in the first few letters. Print - Select this option to print the data from the grid. WARNING: This option will automatically print everything that applies to the current filter. For example, if you are viewing Inventory Records and you select this option without having an active filter, the entire list of inventory items will print.

Page 28 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 NOTE: Only the columns visible on the screen will be included on the printout. You can select which columns to include using the Column Chooser. Print Preview - Select this option to see what the data will look like before it is printed out. Enable auto-filter - Click here to open a field with which to filter the data. Save customized view... - Click here to save your view configuration. Show summary footer - Select this option to add a line at the bottom of the screen for the display of mins, maxes and counts. TIP: Right-click the summary footer for a list of values to display.

Grouping By Column
You can group the data on any records screen by column. To group by column, follow the steps below: 1. Ensure Group By Box is enabled by right-clicking the column header and selecting it from the menu. 2. Click and drag a column header into the upper area above the columns:

NOTE: When the data is grouped this way, you can click the plus signs to expand the view of records that match a certain value:

Page 29 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

In the above example, you can click the plus sign next to Supplier: 000001 to view all records where the Supplier is equal to 000001. 3. Undo the grouping by clicking and dragging the column header back to its place.

Page 30 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Using Filters
Using the Quick Filter CribMaster features a way to create a quick filter for each column. To create a quick filter, follow the steps below: 1. Hover your mouse pointer over a column header. The Quick Filter icon displays. 2. Click the icon. The Select menu displays:

3. Select an item from the list. TIP: You can create a custom filter by selecting (Custom) from this list:

Page 31 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 Using the Auto-Filter CribMaster features a way to create an auto filter for each column. To create an auto-filter, follow the steps below: 1. Right-click any of the column headers. 2. Select Enable auto-filter. A filter box displays under the column header:

TIP: You can also enable the auto-filter by pressing Ctrl + F. 3. Type your criteria into the blank. The list automatically filters to the criteria you type in. TIP: You can use the "%" as a wildcard in your searches. TIP: The question mark allows you to filter the list to those items that contain the text anywhere in the corresponding column. This is particularly useful for searching Inventory Description columns. In this case ?Drill would reduce the list to those inventory items which contain "Drill" anywhere within the description column. NOTE: When using a direct database connection, the results will only display after pressing Enter.

Page 32 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 Creating a Filter You can create a search filter for the data. To create a filter, follow the steps below: 1. Right-click any of the column headers. 2. Select Filter Editor. The Filter Builder dialog box displays:

3. Enter search criteria in the blank next to Search for. 4. Select any Extra Criteria. 5. Check or uncheck Fields to search. TIP: Click Choose All ( selecting fields to search. 3. Click OK. ) or Clear All ( ) to assist with

Page 33 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 Using the Advanced Filter You can create a more complex filter for the data. To create a filter, follow the steps below: 1. Right-click any of the column headers. 2. Select Filter Editor. The Filter Builder dialog box displays. 3. Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced tab displays:

4. Click any of the variables and operators to build your query:

Page 34 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Page 35 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 TIP: At any time, click Apply to view how the data is affected in the background. 4. Click the 5. Click the at the top to add additional conditions. next to a condition to remove it from the query.

TIP: To edit the current filter, click Edit Filter in the lower right corner of the record list. TIP: To clear the query and return your data to normal, click the in the lower, left corner of the record list. 6. Click OK to finish the query.

Page 36 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Using Views
You can create custom views that you can access each time you access CribMaster. To create a view, follow the steps below: 1. Arrange the columns, filters and groups the way you want. 2. Right-click any column header. 3. Select Save Customized View... The Save Customize View dialog box displays:

4. Enter a Descriptive title. 5. Click OK. The view is saved. TIP: You can access this view at any time by clicking on it from the CM Explorer:

Page 37 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Using the Column Chooser

You can remove columns from any record screen to help streamline the display. To use the Column Chooser, follow the steps below: 1. Right-click any column header. 2. Select Column Chooser. The Column Chooser box displays. 3. Click and drag the headers of columns you no longer want to use into the Column Chooser box:

4. To replace a removed column, click and drag it from the Column Chooser.

Page 38 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

Customizing the Start Page

The start page (or dashboard) may display after a user logs in. You can alter the information that displays on this opening page. TIP: To set the start page to display after a log in, click System > Preferences. Check Show Start Page.

Displaying a Report on the Start Page

To display a report on the Start Page, follow the steps below: 1. Click Report Management from the CM Explorer tree. The Report Management screen displays. 2. Select the report you want to add to the start page. 3. Click Properties . The Report Properties pane displays. 4. Under Section, select Start Page from the drop-down list:

5. Click

WARNING: Reports can only be in one section at a time. To have a report available in its original section as well as the Start Page, it must be cloned. 6. Click Start Page from the CM Explorer tree. The Start Page displays. NOTE: If the Start Page was already open, you must close and reopen it. 7. Right-click on any of the grey dividers on the Start Page. Page 39 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 8. Select Customize Layout from the context menu. The Customization menu displays:

NOTE: The Hidden Items tab displays elements that can be added to the Start Page but are not currently visible. The layout Tree View is a list of elements that are currently visible on the Start Page. NOTE: Reports with queries that return large amounts of data may slow the opening of the Start Page. 9. Scroll down the list of hidden items until you find the report you want to add. 10. Click and drag the report on to the Start Page. Section boxes display as you move the element around, showing where it will display. The report will now display:

Page 40 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 TIP: While displaying in the Start Page, you can view the report the same way you can in the Preview Window. 11. To remove an element from the Start Page, click and drag it into the Hidden Items pane.

Interpreting CribMaster Status

The CribMaster Status dialog box is a summary of CmServer, Cycle Counting, Transfers, Checked Out items, Gauges and more. To access CribMaster Status, click Start Page. The CribMaster Start Page displays. The Status box displays at the top of the screen:

Double-click a line to be taken directly to the appropriate screen for fixing the issue:

Page 41 of 525

Using CribMaster 9 TIP: This screen will display the local crib information or all crib information when the All Cribs button is selected. The following table describes the indicators and what they mean: Icon Function This icon represents an issue that must be addressed. This icon represents a reminder. This icon represents a warning.

Adding a Custom Status To add a custom status, follow the steps below: 1. Click Start Page. The CribMaster Start Page displays. 2. Right-click the status window. 3. Select Add Custom System Status from the context menu. The Customize System Status Objects screen displays:

4. Select a key from the Select From drop-down. 5. Click And to select an operator:

Page 42 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

6. Click Add ( ) to add a condition. 7. Click the field to select a field from the list:

8. Click green-lettered words to select a criteria.

Page 43 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

9. Click the value position to enter a value. TIP: Click the pencil icon to compare one value to another:

Click the note icon to return to data entry.

Page 44 of 525

Using CribMaster 9

TIP: Click the

to remove the condition.

10. Do one of the following: Click Test to determine if the query returns the needed data. Click Save to add the query to the status list. Click Cancel to leave the Custom System Status Objects without saving the query. Click Clear Custom System Status Objects reset the screen.

Understanding the CribMaster Login Status Dialog Box

The CribMaster Login Status dialog box displays after a successful login if the option Show prior login status notification > Always > Display login message text is selected and a message is entered. Click OK to continue.

Page 45 of 525

Page 46 of 525

Working with Items

Chapter 2: Working with Items

Understanding Item Types
Expendable - An item that is issued, and expensed immediately. There is no checkout record written, only an ISSUE transaction. This item type is also known as a consumable item. Reworkable - An item that comes into the system as new, is tracked through its use via a checkout record and is returned to the crib. Additionally Reworkable items are tracked during the rework/regrind process and then checked back into the system as a reworked item. CribMaster tracks both new and reworked items. It does this by requiring the new item to have an associated item ID that represents the reworked item. This reworked Item ID must be entered into the Rework Item field on the Rework tab of the inventory properties. When a rework Item ID is associated, it is assumed that when this item is sent to rework, it will automatically be returned under the reworked Item ID. This field can also be used for linking the two items for the purchasing system. If no Reworked Item ID is entered, it indicates that this item is a reworked item and cannot be purchased. In addition, when a reworked item is sent back to rework, it will be checked back in as the same reworked item. This gives you the ability to look at your stock and see both new and reworked quantities. Durable - An Item that is issued (ISSRT) and a checkout record is written, and is returned to the same item number and bin location, usually in a re-usable condition. Durable-Serialized - Same as Durable, but Serialized. This is done through the Serialized checkbox. Each item will have its own unique identifier, or Serial ID. Gauge - Same as Durable-Serialized, but with certification abilities (Once an item is classified as a Gauge it cannot ever be changed to a different Item Type) Kit - A logical or physical (assembly) grouping of the above item types.

Page 47 of 525

Working with Items

Understanding Item Properties

To access the Item Information tab, follow the directions below:

1. Click Home > Inventory Items . The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. The Inventory Properties dialog box displays the information in the right-most pane. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. NOTE: If the Item Properties pane is not visible, click Properties .

Page 48 of 525

Working with Items

Item Number - This is the number of the selected item. NOTE: This Number may include alpha and numeric characters and be up to 12 characters in length. Item Type - Select a type of item from this drop-down list. Expendable - This is a disposable item that is not expected back after it is issued. Reworkable - This is a consumable item that can be reground, recycled or reused. Durable - This is an item that can be used more than once and is expected back after it is used. Gauge - This is a tool that requires calibration after a certain length of time or number of uses.

Page 49 of 525

Working with Items Kit - This is a grouping of individual tools placed together as a single issue. Serialized Item - Check this box to designate the item as serialized. NOTE: Gauges are always serialized. NOTE: Expendables and Reworkables are never serialized. NOTE: Durable items and kits may be serialized or nonserialized. Description 1 - This is a description of the item. Description 2 - This is an additional space for writing more about the item. Manufacturer - This is the manufacturer of the item. Mfr # - If the item has a manufacturer number, it can be entered here. Item Group - This field is used to make searching for items easier. If you assigned a group to each item, it will be easier to create a query for them later on. Buyer Group - Select an appropriate buyer group here (if applicable). TIP: You can use Buyer Groups to help control and segment purchasing responsibility. UPC Code - Enter the UPC Code (if applicable). NOTE: This code is used for scanning during receiving. Access - Enter the Access code for the item (if applicable). Price - Enter the price that will be charged to the Employee, Job, Department, and Cell when this item is issued. NOTE: If this field is left blank, the system uses Item Cost. Default Issue Qty - Enter a quantity of items to be issued at any time. NOTE: This quantity can be overridden at issue time, if a different quantity is being issued.

Page 50 of 525

Working with Items NOTE: If this field is blank, or zero, the assumed default issue quantity is one. Special - This field can be used for various purposes. For instance, it is often used for an account number or billing code. It is automatically associated with the records for purchases of the item and prints on purchase orders and Purchase Order Detail reports. TIP: The Purchase Order Detail reports can be sorted and selected on this field. Price Type - This field is associated with the Issue Price above: Fixed - The price entered is the issue price. Cost Ratio - The cost is multiplied times the Issue Price number to compute the issue price used. For example: 1.25 means 1.25 percent of the cost and 0.1 means 10 percent of the cost. Surcharge - The issue price amount is added to the cost to compute the issue price used. TIP: This might be appropriate for vending machine bins. Average Cost - The issue price displays the current average price. NOTE: The price is automatically updated each time additional stock is received or adjusted. Unit of Measure (Issue) - Enter the conveyance of the item issue here. For example, Box, Carton, Bag, etc. Note - Enter any additional information here. Track Item Usage - Check this box to have usage on returnable items tracked. NOTE: When Items marked "Track Item Usage" are returned to the crib, the user is prompted to enter the usage of the item which is then stored in the RETN or SCRAP transaction. You can then get transaction usage reports for this data. NOTE: Serialized items are considered to have a repair cycle that is incremented each time the item is put into a status of

Page 51 of 525

Working with Items "In Repair" or "In Calibration". The repair cycle is recorded in transactions with the usage so your Transaction Usage reports can be sub-totaled by repair cycle. Status - Select an item status code here. Track Lot Numbers - Check this box to track the lot number of the item being issued. NOTE: Only expendable, durable and non-serialized items can have lot numbers. Restricted Item - Check this box to restrict the issue of this item. Remove from Active Item List - Check this box to remove this item from the list of items available for issue. NOTE: Depending on your system settings, the items may be visible but "ghosted" to reflect the inactive state. NOTE: Some operations on inactive items will be restricted. These restrictions include (but are not limited to): Purchasing and ordering operations - CribMaster will not generate ordering requirements for Inactive Items (they will be treated analogously to bins with the "Stop Ordering" option enabled). However, manual transfers of inactive items will also be permitted. Kitting restrictions - When a kit item is inactive, new instances of it can no longer be assembled and the definition cannot be changed. Primary Supplier (Blanket #) - Select the primary supplier for this item from this drop-down. Supplier Item # - This is the number the suppliers use to identify the item. Item Cost - This is the un-discounted cost for the item. TIP: Some suppliers offer price breaks at various purchase quantities. Primary Supplier (Blanket #) - Select the primary supplier for this item from this drop-down. Supplier Item # - This is the number the suppliers use to identify the item. Item Cost - This is the un-discounted cost for the item.

Page 52 of 525

Working with Items TIP: Some suppliers offer price breaks at various purchase quantities. Crib/Bin - This combo-box displays the current bin and all bins that contain the current item in numeric order. TIP: If you are adding a new item or no bins contain the item, you can enter a new bin ID in this field. Otherwise, you can select among the various bins to edit the bin attributes.

Page 53 of 525

Working with Items

Lower Window
The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click this button to add a Crib/Bin. Click this button to access the properties of the selected Crib/Bin. Click this button to remove the selected Crib/Bin. Click this button to create multiple serial ID's. Crib/Bin - Use this space to add a new bin. NOTE: Details on the other bins (if any) are saved when you add a new one. Qty - This is the amount of the items currently in the bin. On Order - Displays the number of items ordered for this bin which have not yet been received. NOTE: You cannot edit this field. Order Pt. - Enter an amount here to override the suggested order point for the bin. Order Qty - Enter an amount here to override the suggested order quantity for the bin. Max - Enter a number in this field to have CribMaster order enough to bring the quantity up to your entry. Force Order - Enter a number in this field to force CribMaster to order this quantity of this item. NOTE: The actual order does not occur until either Auto Purchase produces Purchase Orders or someone manually produces Purchase Orders with the Authorize Purchasing dialog. NOTE: When an order is placed, this field will be cleared and an On Order amount will display. If, at a later viewing, the quantity is still present in the Force Order field, you may change or remove the number and order calculations will return to normal.

Page 54 of 525

Working with Items

Controlling Access to Inventory

By default, CribMaster does not put any restrictions on what inventory can be issued to any particular employee. However, you can set those permissions using your own parameters which can be applied to any subset of the inventory that you need. Issues are not permitted unless all the tests you specify are passed.

Two Access Restriction Options

CribMaster provides two ways to restrict access to items being issued: Employee Access This refers to the employee checking out the items and not the crib attendant. This is used by assigning Access Codes to inventory items. Once an access code is assigned to an item, it is only available to employees that have been granted the corresponding access code. Each item may be assigned only one Access Code. Employees may be granted many Access Codes. You can use this method on any subset of the inventory items that you choose. Items without Access Codes assigned are available to all employees. User Defined Field Access This applies to the UDFs (User Defined Fields) you have set up. You can specify which UDFs will be restricted by editing the UDF definition on the Options tab for User Defined Fields (UDFs). There is also an option to disallow unrestricted items. You may also permit unrestricted items at the UDF level and disallow it at the individual UDF entry level. You may restrict as many or as few UDFs as you like. For UDFs that are restricted, there is a new tab on the property page for assigning inventory items to each item in the UDF.

Interaction with the Issue Screen

With user-defined types (UDFs) that are restricted, the list of available bins will change as you select entries for the UDFs because the items assigned to each thing you choose are different. There is a push button on the issue item toolbar that limits the list of bins to restricted items (unrestricted items are removed from the list because the list of Page 55 of 525

Working with Items unrestricted items is probably large). Touch the button to see only items assigned to your UDF. Release the button to see everything allowed for your UDF. NOTE: This button remains pressed if you have chosen the disallow unrestricted items check box on the property page for your UDF. TIP: You can assign a list of parts needed to each machine (if "machine" is one of your UDFs). The Crib Attendant can then quickly see a small list of items that apply to each specific machine. NOTE: You may use restricted UDFs without using restricted Inventory Items or the two concepts can overlap. You may assign any Inventory Item to a UDF (meaning it does not need to be a restricted Inventory Item). When the Restricted button on the Issue item toolbar is pressed, you see the list of assigned items that are not necessarily restricted Inventory Items.

Restricted Inventory Items

By default, all Inventory Items are unrestricted. To make an Inventory Item restricted, check the Restricted Item check box on the Inventory Information tab. It is not necessary to use this option to use restricted User Defined Fields (UDFs). This option works with the Restricted button on the Issue Screen Toolbar to show smaller sets of available inventory items to the Crib Attendant. Restricted Inventory Items act in two ways depending on whether there is a restricted UDF entered on the issue screen (and remember that UDFs may be optional or entry is not required). A restricted UDF entered on the issue screen - you may impose this behavior by making at least one restricted UDF required. When the Restricted button on the Issue screen toolbar is pressed, only items assigned to all the restricted UDFs are displayed. When the Restricted button is not pressed, all restricted and unrestricted inventory items assigned to restricted UDFs are displayed. Restricted inventory items that are not assigned to all restricted UDFs on the Issue screen cannot be issued whether the Restricted button is pressed or not. Unrestricted UDFs do not affect the list of items displayed.

Page 56 of 525

Working with Items No restricted UDF entered on the issue screen - When the "Restricted Item" button on the Issue screen toolbar is pressed, only restricted inventory items are displayed. When the Restricted button is not pressed, all inventory items are displayed. You can disallow this usage altogether by making at least one restricted UDF mandatory. Example: Only one UDF named Machine, which is not required and is restricted but allows unrestricted items. 2 Employees: Employee1 with Employee Access Code E (for example) Employee2 without Employee Access Codes 2 Machines: Machine1 is assigned odd numbered items. Machine2 is assigned even numbered items. Unrestricted items are not permitted. Access Code E E E E Restricted X X X X

Item1 Item2 Item3 Item4 Item5 Item6 Item7 Item8

"X" means the item is available to issue on the Issue screen. Item Number Employee 1 Employee 1/ Machine1 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X X 5 X X 6 X X 7 X X 8 X 1 X X 2 3 X X X 4 5 X X 6 7 X 8

Page 57 of 525

Working with Items Employee 1/ Machine2 Employee 2 Employee 2/ Machine1 Employee 2/ Machine2 X X X

X X

X X

X X

X X

TIP: The list of items can also be reduced using the recent issue button that restricts the list to items issued within the last 30 days to the employee and/or User Defined Fields entered.

Understanding Item Cost and Issue Price

Item Cost
CribMaster stores item cost by vendor. The item cost field on the Inventory Properties Item Information tab is the cost for a quantity of one purchased from the primary supplier. Up to six cost breaks can also be entered on the Supplier tab of the inventory properties. The cost and six cost breaks can be entered for each supplier assigned to an item. These costs are used when the item is placed on a purchase order.

Issue Price
On the Inventory property Item Information tab is a field to enter "Issue Price". On the Bin property Bin Information tab is a field to enter "Issue Price". The Issue Price for transactions is done as follows: If there is a number in the Bin Issue Price, it is used based on the price type on the Bin property page. If there is a number in the Inventory Issue Price, it is used based on the price type on the Inventory property page.

Page 58 of 525

Working with Items If there is a global cost ratio entered on the Option Configuration page, the issue price is computed by multiplying the global cost ratio times the item cost from the primary supplier.

Price type rules

Fixed - Use the price entered. Cost Ratio - Item Cost * number(ratio) entered in the price field. Surcharge - Cost + the number entered in the price field. Average Cost - The number in the price field is changed by the system each time the inventory is incremented through adjustments or receiving so that it represents the average cost of the inventory FIFO - (First-In-First-Out) inventory accounting in which the oldest items (those first acquired) are assumed to be the first sold with the Issue Price being the items purchase price. This setting is changed at the Bin level on the Bin Properties Bin information tab. Available in Enterprise version only.

Understanding Usage Tracking

CribMaster supports the usage tracking of returnable items (Reworkable, Durable, Gauge, and Kits). To track usage on an item you must enable usage tracking on the inventory property page Check the box marked "Track Item Usage". When Items marked "Track Item Usage" are returned to the crib, you will be prompted to enter the usage of the item which is then stored in the RETN or SCRAP transaction. You can then use CribMasters transaction reports to view the usage data. Serialized items are considered to have a repair cycle that is incremented each time the item is put into status "In Repair" or "In Calibration". The repair cycle is recorded in transactions with the usage so your Transaction Usage reports can be subtotaled by repair cycle.

Working with Lot Numbers

CribMaster provides a limited ability to track lot numbers. Lot number tracking is only available for Expendable items and Non-Serialized

Page 59 of 525

Working with Items Durable items. You can specify which items will track lot numbers by checking the box "Track Lot Numbers" in the Inventory property page. Lot Numbers are recorded on RECVE, ISSUE, ISSRT, RETN, TRIN, TROUT, TRIX, and TROX for item numbers that are marked to record lot numbers. If there is only one active lot for an item number, it is assumed that this lot number is being used for issue, and transfer transactions. If more than one active lot is available, you will be prompted to choose the lot that is being used. CribMaster tracks the quantity remaining for each lot number. ISSUE and SCRAP decrement quantity but not ISSRT (returnable issue). When the quantity for a lot number reaches 0, CribMaster will automatically set the lot to an inactive status. When receiving items that track lot numbers, the choose lot number dialog is displayed. You can create a new lot number by entering the new lot number or you may choose an existing lot from the lots listed. This is also true when receiving with ATR on the vending machines. When vending items that track lot number using ATR, the dialog to choose lot number is displayed after the vending is complete (if needed more than one active lot) so that the lot can be selected (or scanned) after you have the product in hand. RF Scanners will also ask for Lot Number when needed. NOTE: This is only the case for machines that are not Passive Issue. There are some lot number reports that are available at Purchasing > Print Lot Numbers The reports available are: Lot number list Items with Lot Numbers Lots Expiring within Days

Understanding the Lot Number Records Screen

To access the Lot Number Records screen, click Purchasing > Lot Numbers... The Lot Number Records screen displays:

Page 60 of 525

Working with Items

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Lot Numbers screen: Button Function Click this button to create a new lot number. Click this button to access the properties of the selected lot number. Click this button to delete the selected lot number. Click this button to access Online Help. Click this button to search the table. Click this button to clear the active search. Column Headers LotNo - This is the lot number. LotItemNumber - This is the number of the item associated with the lot number. LotTotalQuantity - This is the number of items associated with the lot number. LotExpirationDate - This is the date the lot is set to expire. LotInactive - This check indicates whether or not the lot number is inactive. LotComments - This is any additional information about the lot number. LotCreationDate - This is the date the lot number was created. LotLastTransDate LotNumberMember -

Page 61 of 525

Working with Items

Creating a Lot Number

To create a lot number, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchasing > Lot Numbers... The Lot Number Records screen displays: 2. 6. 7. 8. 9. Click New . The Lot Number Properties pane displays. Enter a Lot Number. Enter a Quantity. Enter any additional information. Click . The number is created.

Using the Lot Number Properties Dialog Box

To access the Lot Number Properties screen, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchasing > Lot Numbers... The Lot Number screen displays. 2. Select the lot number you want to edit. 3. Click Properties. The Lot Number Properties screen displays:

Page 62 of 525

Working with Items

Lot No. - This is the number assigned to the lot. No. - This is the database identifier for this lot number. Item Number - This is the number of the item to which this lot number is assigned. Item Lookup - If you need to designate a different item you can either type it in or click this button to select it from the list. Quantity - This is the amount of units that are included in this lot. Date Added - This is the date the lot number was created. Expiration Date - You can assign a date for the lot number. Last Transaction - This is the date last transaction took place. Comment - This is a space for any additional information about the lot number. Inactive Lot Number - Check this box to remove the lot number from active circulation.

Page 63 of 525

Working with Items

Using the More Tab

The More tab contains fields to further define the item. To access the More tab, follow the directions below:

1. Click Home > Inventory Items . The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. The Inventory Properties dialog box displays the information in the right-most pane. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. 3. Click the More tab. The More tab displays.

Page 64 of 525

Working with Items Description - This is a description of the item. Check Out Time Limit (Days) - Enter a number of days to have the system create a due date which will be entered in the Checkout record generated for all returnable items issued from this crib. This field also displays on the properties dialog boxes for items and bins. If there are conflicting time limits, CribMaster will prioritize. The hierarchy is as follows: bin, crib, item, global. NOTE: Time limits can be set globally in CribMaster Options. NOTE: To provide a means to have tools due back at the crib at the end of a shift CribMaster has the option: "Time offset in hours to Due Date to accommodate shifts (0=use integral days)". If you enter a number here, due dates are computed by adding the following number of hours to the current time: hours + (Entered Time Limit-1) *24 hours NOTE: The Overdue Item report shows items that are overdue at the time the report runs including items that are due earlier on the same day. NOTE: This number of days is used to create the Due Date on the checkout records produced when items are issued. This Due Date is used on the Overdue Checked Out Items report. Allow override when item is issued - Check this box to allow the Time Limit for the check out to be overridden by the crib attendant when the item is issued. NOTE: Issues to employees must have override time limit permissions. Cycle Counting Classification - Select a cycle counting classification from the drop-down. Cycle Counting Classification Delete - Click this button to clear the cycle counting classification field. Auto-scrap Option - Select one of the following options to remove the item from the return list if you do not want the item to be returned to the crib after issuing: Due Date - Select this option to have the item auto-scrap by the date specified by the Check Out Time Limit field. Immediately - Select this option to have the item auto-scrap when it is issued.

Page 65 of 525

Working with Items NOTE: In both of these options, the item will be scrapped by CM Agent at Days End processing. NOTE: These options are for non-serialized, durable and reworkable items as well as non-serialized kits. Exclude checked out items from ordering calculations - Check this box to specify that this particular Item Number will perform ordering based on the quantity that is in the bin without counting checked out items. NOTE: This is for non-serialized and durable items only. NOTE: Durable items normally compare items in bin plus items checked out with the OrderPoint to decide when to order. NOTE: There is a global selection to cause all durables to be treated this way on the Ordering Options page. If you select the global option, this option is meaningless until you turn the global option back off. The effect of this option wont be seen until each bin containing this item is next recalculated. TIP: You may want to Recalc All Bins if you change options on several item numbers. All bins are recalculated at the beginning of the month. Uses Check List - Check this box to indicate that this item uses a checklist before issuing or returning the item. NOTE: Checking this box will activate the Check List tab. Don't suggest intersite transfers for this item - Used in conjunction with the Data Warehouse and the Ordering Option "Transfer Surplus or Excess before purchasing," check this box to prevent intersite transfer. TIP: You may want to do this if items are inexpensive or difficult to ship. Requires Inspection - Check this box to send newly purchased units of this item to inspection rather than directly into inventory. NOTE: This option is copied to Purchase Order detail lines when the item is placed on order. NOTE: Changing this option affects new purchases only.

Page 66 of 525

Working with Items TIP: You can change the setting on the PO detail line if you have the Purchasing: Override Requires Inspection permission. Enable Foreign Object Debris (FOD) Control - Check this box to have CheckOut records created when the item is issued to FOD Employees, including issues of expendables. NOTE: These CheckOut records are marked as Foreign Object Debris (FOD) Control. NOTE: Return of FOD Control items prompts an optional scan of the Employee badge and is not permitted in Batch mode on the scanners. Critical Part - Check this box to use the alternate safety stock ratio in such a way that more items are kept in the bin. Certified System - Check this box to enable locking of your serialized kit in order to prevent others from changing the kit's components. NOTE: This field only applies to serialized kits. Locked - Check this box to prevent any change to a certified assembly's components. NOTE: Components can be changed only while the assembly is unlocked, during which time it cannot be issued or otherwise used. Item Stock From Crib - Enter a crib to have items supplied from it rather than from an outside supplier. NOTE: Bins in the "Stock From Crib" generate normal orders. TIP: This method of replenishment is only supported when the option "Transfer Surplus or Excess before purchasing" is enabled on the Ordering option tab. See Using the Ordering Tab for details. Comment - This screen allows you to enter any comments that you may need to note for this item. NOTE: These comments are displayed on the Examine and Issue screens. Custom Fields - are created by choosing the menu item: Database Utilities-Custom Fields. Enter and view the data for these fields using

Page 67 of 525

Working with Items the list box provided. This data is also displayed on the Bin list, the Inventory Item list, and the Issue Screen.

Understanding the Check Out Time Limit

CribMaster does not require a DUE date in the checkout record that is created when returnable items are issued. If you would like to limit the time that items can be checked out, enter a time limit at one of these levels:

Bin Level Property page Crib Level Property page Item Level Property page Global Level - Enter a number of days in the option "Elapsed time before checked out items considered overdue (days)" under the Overdue Item Options heading.

You normally would not enter a number at the Global level as this causes all returnable items to have a DUE date. Otherwise you can specify a number of days that each item is allowed to be kept out. To provide a means to have tools due back at the crib at the end of a shift CribMaster has the option: "Time offset in hours to Due Date to accommodate shifts (0=use integral days)". If you enter a number here, DUE dates are computed by adding the following number of hours to the current time: hours + ((Entered Time Limit-1) *24 hours). The Overdue Item report shows items that are overdue at the time the report runs including items that were due earlier on the same day.

Understanding Foreign Object Debris (FOD) Control

Enabling F.O.D. control forces a check out record to be written at the time of issue for ALL CribMaster item types. All items are then required to be returned to the crib even if the item type is Expendable. F.O.D. Control helps facilities ensure an employee's work station is cleared of materials when they leave work and helps to prevent any items from being lost/left during the manufacturing process as CribMaster will maintain a record for all items currently out of the crib.

Page 68 of 525

Working with Items Enabling F.O.D. Control is be done on the Employee Properties page, the More tab of the Item Properties page, and the Advanced tab of the Crib options page. Once done, Checkout records will be created when these items are issued to FOD Employees including issues of Expendables. These Checkout records are then marked as F.O.D. Control. NOTE: Items marked as F.O.D. are only accessible to employees with F.O.D. designation. Each Crib can have F.O.D. tracked on a different level based on the Crib-level F.O.D. Control selected on the Crib Properties > Advanced tab.

Using the Links Tab

This is the Links tab. It is used to link applicable files to bins, items, serial ID's, etc.:

Page 69 of 525

Working with Items

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Links tab: Icon Function Click this button to add a link to the selected record. Click this button to edit the selected link file. Click this button to remove the selected link.

Column Headers

Page 70 of 525

Working with Items

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Labor tab: Button Function Click this button to add a link to the selected record. Click this button to edit the selected link file. Click this button to remove the select link.

Column Headings

Page 71 of 525

Working with Items Description - This is a description of the link. File Name - This is the path to the linked file. Print Codes - Used for reporting. CribMaster will look for these codes when printing. ID - This is the database identifier for this link.

Adding a New Link

1. Click Item. The Item Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. 3. If the Properties tab is not visible, click Properties. The Item Properties dialog box displays. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. 4. Click the Links tab. 5. Click New. A new line is added to the list. 6. Enter a Description that explains the type of file to which you are linking. 7. Under Filename, click the Browse button ( ). 8. Locate the file you want to link. 9. Click Open. 10. Enter any needed Print Codes. 11. Click OK. TIP: You can link images to items records that will be accessible in ATR. However, for images to appear correctly, their size should be limited to 560 x 410 pixels or smaller. Fields Description - This is a description of the link. File Name - This is the path to the linked file. Print Codes - Used for reporting. CribMaster will look for these codes when printing.

Using the Suppliers Tab

To access the Suppliers tab, follow the directions below:

1. Click Home > Inventory Items Records screen displays.

. The Inventory

Page 72 of 525

Working with Items 2. Select the item you want to edit. The Inventory Properties dialog box displays the information in the right-most pane. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. 3. Click the Suppliers tab. The Suppliers tab displays:

Page 73 of 525

Working with Items The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to add a supplier to the selected item. Click this button to remove the selected supplier. Click this button to access the properties of the selected supplier.

Vender Item Number - If the supplier has a different number for the item than what is in your system, enter it here. NOTE: This is analogous to the supplier item number on the Item Information tab. Price Expiration - If the price is only good for a set time, enter the expiration here. NOTE: This date is used to prepare the Price Expiration report. Minimum Order - Enter the minimum number of items that can be ordered at one time from this supplier. NOTE: CribMaster will not generate a replenishment need for less than this quantity. Cost - Enter the pre-price break cost of each unit. Case Size - Enter the purchasing case size. NOTE: This field is used for ordering quantities. Unit of Measure - Enter the conveyance of the item purchased here. For example, Box, Carton, Bag, etc. Dist. Cost - Enter the per unit cost to the distributor for this item. Blanket PO # - Displays the blanket purchase order number for this item (if applicable). Price Break - Enter the price break quantities at each level they are available. NOTE: Some vendors may offer lower per unit costs if ordered in larger quantities. For example, an item may cost $5 for one, $9 for two, $12 for three, etc. Page 74 of 525

Working with Items Item Cost - Enter the price(s) associated with each break. Primary Supplier - Check this box to assign the selected supplier as primary. Sales Taxable - Check this box to assign a sales tax to orders. Allow as Substitute Supplier - Check this box to enable this supplier to be used as an alternative to the item's primary supplier. Auto-purchase - Check this box to designate the item as available for purchase via the automatic purchasing system. TIP: This option is used in conjunction with the Auto-purchase only designated items option. NOTE: This option is ignored with the other auto purchase options.

Column Headings
Supplier - This is the number of the supplier. Name - This is the name of the supplier. Blanket PO # - This is the blanket purchase order number for this item Expiration Date - This is the date the current blanket purchase order expires. Supplier Item # - If the supplier has a different number for the item than what is in your system, it is displayed here. Cost - This is the per unit cost of the item. Minimum Order - This is the minimum number of items that can be ordered at one time from this supplier. Case Size - This is the purchasing size. No. (Blanket PO) - This is the database identifier for the blanket purchase order. No. - This is the database identifier for the supplier. Blanket Inactive? - If the Inactive Blanket PO box is checked on the Blanket purchase order tab of the supplier properties, Yes will display in the column.

Page 75 of 525

Working with Items

Using the History Tab

This is the History tab. This screen is used to show all purchasing transactions associated with the selected item in the past year. These transactions display the Supplier that the item was bought from, the quantity, when the item was purchased and when it was received, the purchase order number and the price for each item purchased. It also displays the Week-To-Date, Month-To-Date and Year-To-Date amounts for this item. The Red Flag amounts are optional. They indicate the total dollar amount of this item that should be used in a given week, month, or year. If these amounts are exceeded, this item displays on the Red Flag report. To access the History tab, follow the directions below:

1. Click Home > Inventory Items . The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. The Inventory Properties dialog box displays the information in the right-most pane. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. 3. Click the History tab. The History tab displays:

Page 76 of 525

Working with Items

TIP: Double-click a purchasing record to access the Purchase Order Detail Item dialog box. Item Description - This is the item description from the Item Information tab. Properties - Click this button to access the Purchase Order Detail Item dialog box. Week-To-Date - Enter an amount limit for week-to-date. Month-To-Date - Enter an amount limit for month-to-date. Year-To-Date - Enter an amount limit for year-to-date.

Page 77 of 525

Working with Items

Column Headings
Supplier - This is the number of the supplier. Qty - This is the amount of units purchased. Ordered - This is the date the order was placed. Received - This is the date the item was received. NOTE: If this field is blank, the order is still open and expected from the supplier. PO Seq. - This is the internal CribMaster order number. Type - This is the type of purchase order. Supplier PO - This is the supplier Purchase Order number. $ Each - This is the per unit cost for each item. Bin - This is the CribMaster bin where the item is assigned. Required - This is the date by which the item is required to be received. Promised - This is the date by which the item is promised to be delivered. Returned - This is the date the item was returned. To Inspection - This is the date the item was sent to inspection. PO Status - This is the status of any orders made for the item. Status Date - This is the date the last status was assigned. No. - This is the database identifier for the purchase order.

Page 78 of 525

Working with Items

Using the Transactions Tab

This is the Transactions tab. It displays details about transactions involving the selected bin, item or work order:

NOTE: The above screen shot was taken from the Item Properties dialog box. However, any transaction tab you access will look and act the same way. The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Transactions tab: Page 79 of 525

Working with Items

Icon

Function Click this button to access the properties of the selected transaction record. Click this button to cancel the selected transaction.

The Right-click Menu

Right-click on a record to display the following menu:

Edit transaction - Click here to access the properties for the selected transaction record. Cancel - Select this option to cancel the transaction. Properties: Inventory Item - Click here to access the properties of the associated item. Bin - Click here to access the properties of the associated bin. Employee - Click here to access the properties of the associated employee. Issued To - Click here to access the properties of the user to which the item was issued. Serial ID - Click here to access the properties of the associated serial ID. Return items... - If an item has been issued, select this option to return it. Reprint Issue/Return Receipt... - Select this option to reprint receipts. Set Lot Number... - Select this option to enter a default lot number (if applicable).

Page 80 of 525

Working with Items View Stored Images... - If images of the item have been saved, select this option to view them.

Column Headers
Crib - This field displays the ID of the crib. Type - This is the transaction type. Crib-Bin - This field displays the ID of the crib and bin. Qty - This is the number of items involved in the transaction. Bin Qty - This is the amount of items left in the bin after the transaction. Cost - This is the cost of the transaction. Item - This is the number for the item involved in the transaction. Description - This is the primary description of the item. Empl ID - This is the identification of the employee who initiated the transaction. Name - This is the joined First Name and Last Name fields from the Name and ID tab of Employee Properties. Issued To ID - If the transaction was an item issue, this is the identification of the employee to which the item was issued. Date - This is the date the transaction took place. Serial ID - This is the serial ID of the item involved in the transaction (if applicable). Usage Item Number - This is the substitute item number (used with XREF). Usage CribBin - This is the CribBin used for the reservation involved in the transaction (used with XREF). Other CribBin - This depends on the type of transaction: ISSRT Contains the Return To CribBin if different RECVE Contains Rework bin if Receive New As Rework Option is Enabled for this item TRACK Contains the final destination bin WO Seq - This field is populated when the transaction is done against a Work Order. Batch - If the item is part of batch scan, the ID appears in this column. Count Class - This is the type of cycle count schedule set up for the item or bin. Expected Accuracy (%) - This is the expected accuracy of the cycle count. Related Key - If the selected transaction is related to another transaction (for instance, a cancellation) this field contains the Transaction number of the other transaction.

Page 81 of 525

Working with Items Site No - This is the identifier for the Site Profile involved in the transaction. User (1-6) - These are user-defined fields that may have been used in the transaction. No. - This is the database identifier for this transaction.

Understanding Table and Field Level Audit

CribMaster supports tracking of data changes for some of its main tables. The audit at the record level shows who created the record and who last changed the record. In addition to this information, you can choose to keep detailed information about changes to individual fields of data. You can track all the changes to fields with the previous values and user information. You must go to the Table Audit option page and choose each field that you want to track in this manner. Click File > Database Utilities > Table Audit Options.

Working with XREF Items

Understanding Item Relationships
CribMaster provides a mechanism to define item relationships. There are 4 predefined relationships: 1. 2. 3. 4. Substitute Made From Used On Cross Reference

You can add your own to the list using the screen displayed at System > XREF Type Codes. Use the XREF Items tab in Inventory Properties to create the relationships you want to use. These relationships are then available on the issue screen by selecting an item and pressing Substitute

. You can also use relationships on the reservation detail properties page.

Page 82 of 525

Working with Items

Creating an XREF Item Association

To create an XREF Item association, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items... The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Inventory Properties pane displays. 4. Click the XREF Items tab. The XREF Items tab displays. 5. Click New. The XREF Item Properties dialog box displays. 6. Select a Related Item. 7. Enter a quantity of the item. 8. Select an XREF Type. 9. Enter an XREF Code. 10. Enter any additional information. NOTE: Leave Special Instructions blank to prevent a work order from being automatically created. 11. Click OK. The association is created.

Editing an XREF Item Association

To edit an XREF Item association, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items... The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. . The Inventory Properties pane displays. Click Properties Click the XREF Items tab. The XREF Items tab displays. Select the XREF Item association you want to edit. Click Properties. The XREF Item Properties dialog box displays. Make any necessary changes. Click OK. The changes are saved.

Page 83 of 525

Working with Items

Using the XREF Item Properties Dialog Box

To access the XREF Item properties dialog box, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items... The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click Properties . The Inventory Properties pane displays. Click the XREF Items tab. The XREF Items tab displays. Select the XREF Item association you want to edit. Click Properties. The XREF Item Properties dialog box displays.

Inventory Item - This is the Item for which the relationship is being established. Related Item - This is the Item to which the above item is related. Quantity - This is the number of the related items required for the relationship (Usually 1). XREF Type - This is the relationship type. Usage Type - This field displays which bin will get usage charged to it when the substitution is done. XREF Code - This is the XREF Code associated with the relationship. Comments - This is any additional information about the XREF. Special Instructions - This is any additional guidelines for using the XREF. NOTE: Leave this area blank to prevent a work order from being automatically created. Custom Fields - Custom fields created for XREF items display in this area.

Page 84 of 525

Working with Items

Working with Gauges

Gauges are Serialized Items which require calibration or certification after a specified interval of time or number of uses. CribMaster maintains the calibration history for each gauge and, optionally, will not allow a gauge to be issued if it requires calibration. Unlike other serialized items, gauges cannot be scrapped. Setting up a gauge involves configuring the calibration schedule and specifying calibration standards, procedures, and/or measurements to be performed when the gauge is calibrated. CribMaster provides a wide range of options for both of these tasks.

Calibration Schedule
CribMaster supports three different methods of deciding when a gauge needs to be calibrated. Date-based Scheduling A gauge is calibrated after a specified period regardless of how many times it has been used. You can schedule calibration for a gauge at regular intervals, up to a maximum of 10 years. The interval can be in days, months or years. NOTE: You may place gauges in inactive status to prevent them from being issued or scheduled for calibration. The total inactive time for a gauge is added to the calibration interval when the gauge is returned to active use. Days Used This calculates the number of days a gauge is checked out and compares to the number allowed. If a gauge is checked out twice and returned twice on the same day, only one usage day is added. Usage days can be combined with calendar days by entering a calendar schedule and then entering a number in the Max Usage field. In this case the number entered in the Max Usage field will be treated as a days used limit.

Page 85 of 525

Working with Items Usage-based Scheduling A gauge is calibrated after it has been used a specified number of times. Usage-based scheduling takes precedence over date-based scheduling, so if you specify a maximum usage for a gauge then you cannot specify a certification interval. If you specify a maximum usage of zero, then CribMaster will never require calibration of the gauge. Inactive status will not affect the calibration scheduling for a usagebased gauge, but it will prevent the gauge from being issued. The calibration schedule is generally specified at the Item level, so that all gauges with the same Item number have the same calibration schedule. However, you can override the schedule for each individual gauge if required.

Understanding Reworkable Items

A Rework Purchase Order is produced to accompany each shipment of items to rework. All rework is treated as though it is handled outside the shop. If some rework is done inside the shop, a supplier should be set up describing each location you want to track. For each reworkable item, CribMaster uses two inventory Item IDs and two Bin IDs:

The first Item ID and Bin ID represent new stock that is ordered from a supplier. The second Item ID and Bin ID represent reworked stock and is sent to a Supplier to be restored.

The second Item ID gives you the ability to assign a separate price and multiple suppliers for reworked stock, each with a separate cost structure and minimum quantity. As items are used from the new crib, CribMaster watches the order point and decides when to place an order for more inventory. However, CribMaster does not try to order stock for the reworked bin.

Page 86 of 525

Working with Items

Setting Up Rework Items

It is highly recommended that Item IDs, Bin IDs, and item descriptions be assigned systematically so that the new stock and the reworked stock will always display together on the screen and on reports. It is also recommended that you append the letter R to the Item ID and the Bin ID of the new stock to create the Item ID and Bin ID of the reworked stock. The end of the description line for reworked stock should have a letter R to indicate that this is reworked stock. For example: 01-04-09 is not a reworked item. 01-04-09R is a reworked item. TIP: You can also specify whether the item is new or reworked in the Description field in Inventory Properties. However, if you start the descriptions with the word New or Rework, they will group together when items are sorted by description. It is better to put the words New or Rework at the end of the description if you decide to use them. On the inventory property page for new stock, you must indicate the Item ID of the reworked stock in the Reworked Item ID field. This is the indication to CribMaster that this item represents new stock and causes it to be ordered correctly. The Reworked Item ID field must be blank on the inventory property page for reworked stock. CribMaster uses the Item ID you supply here to change stock from one bin to another when new stock is moved to pending rework.

Rework Flow in the Crib

When an item needs to be reworked, the user sends the item to rework to let CribMaster know. Items can also be marked Pending Rework directly from the return screen (when checked out items are coming back to the crib). At this point, if you are using the Item ID for new stock, CribMaster will automatically move the stock to a bin with the reworked Item ID. Items pending rework are always on the reworked Item ID, but they are moved to this ID automatically so that you do not have to make any transfer entries. You also have the option to send "pending rework" items to the supplier. CribMaster will compile a list of all stock marked as needing Page 87 of 525

Working with Items restoration and you can select the items you want to send. A Rework Purchase Order is generated for the suppliers of each selected item. When items return from the Rework process, you can view them on the Select Items Being Received screen. All the items expected from purchase and Rework are listed and you can mark what is being received. Items can also be scrapped during the receive process if you are authorized to do so.

Rework Options
There are three important rework options that you may specify on an item-by-item basis. These options are located on the main property page for inventory items and are available for new reworkable items. Exclude checked out items and items in rework from ordering calculations - This option causes orders to be higher for reworked items because quantities checked out, quantities in pending rework, and quantities at rework are ignored for ordering calculations. Combine with rework for ordering - This option causes the two bins to be combined for ordering calculations that tend to cause items not to be ordered while reworked items are available. When checked, quantity on hand, and quantity checked out are combined for the two bins. When checked, the above option (Include checked-out items in ordering calculations) is ignored since reworked stock is included in the quantity figures. Receive New As Reworked - This option allows you to maintain only one bin location to store both new and reworked stock. Use this option with the Combine with rework for ordering option above to keep all the stock in the rework bin. This causes receipts of new stock to be placed in the rework bin. Orders will be placed using the new item number and the receipts report will show the receipts on the new item number for the accounting department. The RECVE transactions will be on the reworked item number and the bin quantity will be increased on the reworked item number. The intent is to always maintain the bin quantities on the reworked item number with no distinction being made between new and reworked items. All issues and returns are then processed on the reworked item number by the Crib Attendant.

Page 88 of 525

Working with Items

Sending Items to Rework

Bin to Pending Rework is used to move items to a pending rework status within CribMaster. Think of a bin as having two sections where one section is stock ready to be issued to users and the other section is stock accumulating to go to rework. When moved to pending rework, the bin quantity is reduced and the pending rework quantity is increased. Move stock from one section of the bin to the other. Reverse this process with Pending Rework Back to Bin. Quantities in the pending rework status will be displayed on the Pending Rework to Supplier dialog box. To send items to rework, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Bin to Pending Rework... The following dialog box displays:

2. Enter the Crib/Bin from which the items are to be sent. 3. Press Tab. Item to Rework populates with the item number and description. 4. Enter a quantity to send to rework. 5. Click OK. The items are sent.

Page 89 of 525

Working with Items

Sending Items Pending Rework Back to Bin

To send items from rework back to bin, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Pending Rework Back To Bin... The following dialog box displays:

2. Enter the Crib/Bin to which the items are to be sent. 3. Press TAB. Item from Pending Rework populates with the item number and description. 4. Enter a quantity to send to the bin. 5. Click OK. The items are sent.

Page 90 of 525

Working with Items

Sending Items Pending Rework to Supplier

To send items pending rework to a supplier, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Pending Rework to Supplier... The Items to Rework dialog box displays.

2. Select the supplier to which to send the items. 3. Select the item(s) you want to send to the supplier. 4. Click Generate purchase order. The Print Purchase Order Reports dialog box displays. 5. Click Print to print a purchase order report (if needed). 6. Click Close. The items are sent.

Page 91 of 525

Working with Items

Sending Pending Rework Items to Scrap

To scrap items that are pending rework, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Bin... The Crib/Bin Records screen displays. 2. Right-click the Crib/Bin from which you want to scrap items. 3. Select Pending to Scrap... The Scrap Items From Pending Rework dialog box displays:

4. Enter the Crib/Bin to which the items are to be sent. 5. Press Tab. Item from Pending Rework populates with the item number and description. 6. Enter a quantity to send to the bin. TIP: Check Include transaction in bin usage calculation to track the stock loss. 7. Click OK. The items are sent.

Page 92 of 525

Working with Items

Receiving Orders and Reworks

To receive orders or reworks, follow the directions below: 1. Click Purchasing > Receive Orders and Rework... The Select Items Being Received dialog box displays. 2. Select an item to receive. 3. Do one of the following: Double-click the line of the item you want to receive to auto-populate the Recd column. Enter a quantity in the Recd column. 4. Do one of the following: Click Receive to complete the receipt. Click Scrap to send the item to scrap. Click To Inspection to send the item to inspection. The items are received.

Using the Gauge Tab

To access the Gauge tab, follow the directions below:

1. Click Home > Inventory Items . The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. The Inventory Properties dialog box displays the information in the right-most pane. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. NOTE: If the Item Properties pane is not visible, click Properties .

3. Click Gauge. The Gauge tab displays:

Page 93 of 525

Working with Items

NOTE: This tab is only available if Gauge is selected as the Item Type on the Item Information tab. The following table illustrates the function of each icon:
Icon Function

Click this button to create a new measurement for the current calibration reference. NOTE: You will be warned if there are any existing certification records which use the current reference.

Page 94 of 525

Working with Items Click this button to add multiple measurements for the current calibration reference. Click this button to delete the currently selected measurement from the current calibration reference. NOTE: You will be warned if there are any existing certification records which use the current reference. Item Description - This is the item description from the Item Information tab. Model - This is additional identification information which assists in responding to subsequent product information. Use special "Inspected Tool" security privileges and nomenclature for this item - Check this box to designate the gauge as a tool that inspects other tools. Calibration Reference - The calibration reference is used to link all the standard and measurement information used for certifying gauges. The Revision, Reference, Tolerance, Calibration Form, Procedure/Standards, and Measurement Definitions are all associated with the current calibration reference. Changes to the calibration reference will affect any existing certifications which use the current revision of the reference. CribMaster will display a warning message when this occurs. Revision - This is the revision number for the calibration reference. NOTE: This number is incremented each time you create a new calibration reference for the gauge item. New Revision - Click this button to create a new calibration reference for the gauge item. CribMaster copies all information for the current reference to the new reference and increments the revision number. NOTE: Once you create a new calibration reference, you cannot edit the reference information (or measurement definitions) for any existing gauge certification records which use the previous reference. Reference - This is the name of the calibration reference. It is an information field which can be the name of a standard or any other name you want to use to identify the reference.

Page 95 of 525

Working with Items Tolerance - This is the default tolerance for any measurements defined for this reference. This may be overridden in individual measurement definitions if needed. NOTE: The number of digits after the decimal point will determine the number of digits displayed on the Gauge Certification screen. Cal. Form - If special paperwork is required in order to send a gauge to another party for calibration, enter the form name here. Precision - This is a measurement of how precise the tool is. Calibration Interval - For date-based calibration scheduling - the amount of time between scheduled certifications of the gauge. This can be in days, months, or years, up to a maximum of 10 years. If you use months or years, CribMaster will attempt to schedule the next certification on the same day of the month or year when possible (CribMaster does not schedule certifications for weekends). Leave this field blank if you want to schedule calibrations based on gauge usage instead of dates. NOTE: CribMaster will not allow a gauge to be checked out after its scheduled certification date has passed NOTE: CribMaster also supports Days Used as a Calibration Interval. Days Used is computed from days that the gauge is checked out. No matter how many times you check out and return a gauge on the same day, you only get one day used for that day. You can combine calendar usage with days used by entering your calendar schedule and then placing a number in the Max Usage field. The Max Usage field is considered a days' used limit when a calendar schedule has been entered. NOTE: Select "Times Used" in the Calibration Interval type combo box next to the Calibration Interval field. For usage based calibration scheduling the number of times a gauge can be used between certifications. CribMaster will not allow a gauge to be checked out after its usage since the last certification exceeds this number. Additionally, entering zero (0) in this field will disable certification checking for this gauge item it can be checked out regardless of the amount of usage or elapsed time since the previous certification.

Page 96 of 525

Working with Items Max Usage - This is considered a days used limit when a calendar schedule has been entered. Turnaround Days - This is a general indication of the time required to complete a calibration. NOTE: The system does not use this estimate in performing any calculations. Reminder Days - This is the number of days prior to the schedule certification when you would like to be reminded that the gauge is due for calibration. Max Inactive Days - This is the number of days after which the gauge will need to be calibrated regardless if the gauge is still in inactive status. Cost - This is an estimate of the cost of performing a calibration. Notes - This field allows multiple lines of information. Enter any notes which may be important to the handling of the gauge.

Column Headings
Description - This is a description of the tool. Set Point - This is a measurement of the tool. Tolerance - This is the default tolerance for any measurements defined for this reference. Min - This can be used to set any type of minimum. Max - This can be used to set any type of maximum. Units - These are units of measurement. ID - This is the database identifier for this item.

Calibration Standards and Measurements

You have several choices ranging from lenient to strict in setting up calibration standards for a gauge. In the simplest case, you can indicate the pass/fail status of the gauge before and after calibration.

Calibration Reference
You can also establish a calibration reference for the gauge, which you can use to save information about the procedures, standards, tolerance, forms, and specific measurements used to calibrate the gauge. The calibration reference is stored with the certification record, so you can revise the calibration reference without affecting previous

Page 97 of 525

Working with Items certification records if needed. CribMaster will warn you if you revise a calibration reference that has already been used to certify a gauge.

Calibration Measurements
Strict calibration uses measurements to certify each gauge. All of the measurements must be recorded and within tolerance before the gauge can be certified if any measurements for the gauge item are defined. Measurements include a Set Point, Description, Units and (optional) Tolerance Override. Only the Set Point is required to define a measurement. The Default Tolerance for the gauge measurements is specified with the calibration reference but may be overridden on a per measurement basis if desired. NOTE: The calibration reference for a gauge is always specified at the Item level and cannot be overridden for an individual gauge. TIP: Gauge reporting is available on the Serialized Items Reporting dialog.

Using the Inventory Records Screen

To access the Inventory Records screen, click Inventory Items .

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to create a new item.

Page 98 of 525

Working with Items Click here to access the properties of the selected item. Click here to remove the selected item from the system. Click here to access the web catalog of the selected items primary supplier. Click here to examine an item. Click here to search the current table. Click here to clear the current search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Column Headers
TIP: You can search these columns for specific values. Item - This is the item number for the selected item. Group - This is the item group for the item. Description - This is the primary description of an item. Description2 - This is additional information regarding the selected item. UPC Code - This is a code that may be used for scanning during receiving. Supplier - This is the primary supplier of the item. Comment - This is the space for any extra information about the selected item. Manufacturer - This is the company that created the item. Mfr # - If the item has a manufacturer number, it is displayed in this field. Status - This is an informational field (Items Status Codes with link added) that can be used for user defined item statuss. Inactive - If the item has been removed from the active list, this field will display "Yes." Unit of Measure (Issue) - This is the way the item is issued (box, carton, etc.).

Right-Click Menu
This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the Inventory Records screen: Page 99 of 525

Working with Items

New entry... - Select this option to create a new item. Properties... - Select this option to access the properties of the select item. Delete... - Select this option to remove the selected item from the system. Rename... - Select this option to change the name of the selected item in the system. This will affect old records and new. Merge... - Select this option to merge the selected item into another one. Bins - Select this option to view the properties for each of the selected items bin locations. New... - Select this option to create a new bin for the selected item. Show Item Locations(s)... - Select this item to show item location(s). This displays the bin locations, quantity in the bins, etc. Assemble Kit... - Select this option to assemble the selected kit. Kit Component Labels... - Select this option to print barcode labels for the components of the select kit. Create Like... - Select this option to create a new item based on the properties of the selected item. Merge Kit Components... - Select this option to merge the items that compose a kit into a single item. Assign RFID Tags to items - Select this option to assign an RFID tag to the selected item.

Page 100 of 525

Working with Cribs

Chapter 3: Working with Cribs

Using the Crib/Bin Records Screen
To access the Crib / Bin Records screen, click Home > Bin... The Crib / Bin Records screen displays:

The lists of crib records and bin records are displayed in a split window. The left pane of the split window displays crib records and the right pane lists bin records. TIP: You can list the bins from multiple cribs by holding down CTRL and clicking the cribs whose bins you want to view.

Using the Crib Information Tab

To access the Crib Information tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Bin... The Crib / Bin Records screen displays. 2. Select the crib you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Crib Properties dialog box displays. The Crib Information tab is in focus by default.

Page 101 of 525

Working with Cribs

Crib Number - This is the main identifier for the crib. Type - Select a type from the drop-down to define the type of machine this crib is: Standard - A normal toolcrib (not a machine). CTCS - A CTCS Vending machine. Sentinel - A Remstar Sentinel storage unit. Shuttle - A Remstar Shuttle storage unit. TD10 - A Remstar TD10 Storage Unit. CM ToolBox - A CribMaster ToolBox Vending machine. Crib Order Type - Select an ordering type from this drop-down: Normal - Standard ordering procedure for items in this bin. Surplus - All bins are considered Surplus. Rework - All items are considered being in rework.

Page 102 of 525

Working with Cribs No Excess - Select this option to have CribMaster overlook this crib for excess ordering. Central Stocking - Transfers "in and out" are treated as usage for Purchasing purposes. Name - Enter a descriptive name for your crib here so that it can be identified by more than its number. Comment - Enter any additional information or details here. Label Printer Name - Select a printer from this drop-down to which you want to print associated bar code labels. Crib Area - If your cribs are grouped together in one or more locations, you can name those locations with this ID. Next Sequential Bin - Enter an ID in this field to override the system's suggestion for the next bin ID. Site ID - Select the purchasing site ID from this drop-down. Return to Crib - enter a crib ID in this field to tell CribMaster that returnable items issued from this crib will go back to the crib specified.

NOTE: This is used to allow returnable items to be issued from vending equipment or satellite cribs where returns are not possible or wanted. The check out record for these items is associated with the first bin found in the Return To Crib that contains the item number. Crib Lookup - Click this button to locate a crib to be used as a "Return to" crib. Alert Email Addr - Enter an e-mail address here for notifications when bins in this crib hit Critical Point as well as for ART alerts. NOTE: This e-mail address will be used instead of the primary supplier alert e-mail address. Stock from Crib - Enter a crib ID in this box to indicate that this crib is to transfer items from another crib (this is usually a central stocking warehouse) rather than order items from an outside supplier. NOTE: This method of replenishment for a crib is only supported when the option "Transfer Surplus or Excess Before Purchasing" is enabled on the Ordering option tab. Crib Lookup - Click this button to locate a crib to be used as a "Stock from" crib. Custom Fields - These are customized fields set up for cribs.

Page 103 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the Advanced Tab

To access the Advanced tab, follow the directions below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Home > Bin... The Crib / Bin Records screen displays. Select the crib you want to edit. Click Properties. Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced tab displays:

Use item-centric ordering for this crib - Check this box to enable itemcentric ordering for the select crib. NOTE: This option tells CribMaster to code the first bin for an item in this crib as a "Primary Bin" and all additional bins for the Page 104 of 525

Working with Cribs item in this crib as "Secondary Bins." CribMaster orders for primary bins but not for secondary bins. Quantities and usage from secondary bins are combined with their primary bins when the primary bins are examined for ordering purposes. Primary Crib - Enter a bin here to have CribMaster look to it for a primary bin rather than the selected crib. NOTE: When new bins are created, this tells CribMaster to look for the Primary bin in another crib. This is useful for vending equipment that is related to a crib. Primary Crib Lookup - Click this button to locate a primary crib.

Automatically delete secondary bins in this crib when emptied - Check this box to have emptied secondary bins removed from the system. Restrict types of bins that can be created in this crib - Check this box to have CribMaster limit the types of bins that can be created. The restrictions depend on the item-centric settings for the crib:

Use item-centric ordering for this crib is UNCHECKED Primary and secondary bins are not automatically created. Use item-centric ordering for this crib is CHECKED, and the Primary Crib is either blank or the same crib - Normal bins cannot be created. Use item-centric ordering for this crib is CHECKED, and the Primary Crib is a different crib - Normal and primary bins cannot be created in this crib.

Check Out Time Limit (Days) - Enter a number of days to have the system create a due date which will be entered in the Checkout record generated for all returnable items issued from this crib. This field also displays on the properties dialog boxes for items and bins. If there are conflicting time limits, CribMaster will prioritize. The hierarchy is as follows: bin, crib, item, global. NOTE: Time limits can be set globally in CribMaster Options. NOTE: To provide a means to have tools due back at the crib at the end of a shift CribMaster has the option: "Time offset in hours to Due Date to accommodate shifts (0=use integral days)". If you enter a number here, due dates are computed by adding the

Page 105 of 525

Working with Cribs following number of hours to the current time: hours + (Entered Time Limit-1) *24 hours NOTE: The Overdue Item report shows items that are overdue at the time the report runs including items that are due earlier on the same day. Crib-level F.O.D. Option - Select a type of Foreign Object Debris (F.O.D.) control of the selected crib: NOTE: F.O.D. Control helps facilities ensure an employee's work station is cleared of materials when they leave work.

Disabled - F.O.D. Control is turned off. FOD Item + FOD Employee - This option designates the crib as F.O.D. All FOD Employees - This options designates all employees using this crib as F.O.D. All FOD Items - This option designates items as F.O.D. that are marked as such. All Items - The options designates all items in the crib as F.O.D. regardless of how they are marked.

Outgoing automatic transfers in increments of Default Issue Quantity Select this option to have outgoing transfers that are generated by CribMaster, for meeting needs in other bins, to be rounded to the Default Issue Quantity for the bin. You can use this option when items are packaged by Default Issue Quantity and you want to transfer whole packages. Require Work Order when issuing items from this crib - Select this option to require users to select a work order in order to issue an item. Allow inter-site transfers to and from this crib - If your organization is using multiple sites, this option allows those two sites to transfer items back and forth. NOTE: This option only applies if you have purchased the CribMaster Data Warehouse option. Require order review before orders for this crib are processed - Select this option to have replenishment needs for this crib be placed on the Review Ordering Requirements screen before the Authorize Purchasing screen.

Page 106 of 525

Working with Cribs

Enable automatic bin space tracking - Select this option to enable dynamic Crib/Bin creation and deletion. A CribBin may be auto created as necessary to reflect the storage of an item within a space. When the CribBin quantity goes to zero, the CribBin may be auto deleted. NOTE: The "Space" table defines storage spaces. Some examples of a storage space would be "rack", "shelf", and "tray", "cabinet". The system operates without regard to the type of space. For each storage space, the system will store a CribBin prefix, a space capacity (which is similar to box size) a space size (small, medium, large) and provide a place to store the computation of free space. Space bar-codes can be printed and used by the scanner. NOTE: The auto create and auto delete functions will assist in allowing multiple items to occupy the same space. For example, if a VSU ("Vertical Storage Unit") is defined as crib 150, the trays in the VSU would be added to the space table with the CribBin prefix values of 150-001, 150-002, 150-099. The system would be prepared to create CribBins such as 150-001-1, 150-001-2, 150001-3 as necessary to provide for the storage of multiple items within the 150-001 space. NOTE: All quantities stored in a space tracking crib will be accompanied by FIFO date records, which will identify when the quantity was stocked. As long as quantities associated with different stock dates are maintained in different CribBins, the system can recommend the oldest material. If material of different ages are combined into the same CribBin, the system will still maintain the dates, but the operator will not have any visual cues as to which product is older. If the operator picks the newer material by mistake, the system will assume that the older material was picked. NOTE: This is often used with Vertical Storage Units but can apply to a shelf or drawer as well. Preferred/Default Supplier Options - This section is used to designate how to determine the preferred supplier for the crib. The preferred supplier must also be set up for the item. Determine default supplier using inventory item - Select this option to have the inventory item settings determine the supplier.

Page 107 of 525

Working with Cribs Allow purchases from preferred supplier only - Select this option to override the inventory item settings and use a preferred supplier. Allow bins to be assigned to any supplier - Select this option to override all existing supplier settings and allow any supplier to be used. Preferred Supplier - If you have selected the second option above, this field will enable. Enter the supplier you want to be the preferred supplier. Preferred Supplier Number Lookup supplier from the list. - Click this button to select a

Understanding Item-Centric Ordering

Item-Centric ordering is a feature that allows multiple bins with the same Item Number to be treated as one for ordering purposes. On the Advanced tab of Crib Properties, select the option "Use Item-Centric ordering for this crib". CribMaster will assign a primary bin for each item (most recently used bin) and all other bins in the crib with that item number have their "Primary Bin" set to be this bin. There is an option to choose another crib to be the primary crib which tells CribMaster to look for the "Primary Bin" in the "Primary Crib" instead of the same crib. CribMaster will automatically set the Primary Bin when you create a new bin in an Item-Centric crib. It will also reset the Primary Bin for Secondary Bins if you delete a Primary Bin. However, the mechanisms to properly handle these bins does not depend on Cribs or Crib Options and you may manually set bin types to be Primary or Secondary and set the Primary Bin field for any Secondary Bin to be any Primary Bin with the same item number. CribMaster does not purchase for Secondary Bins (Bins that designate another bin as their "Primary Bin"). When CribMaster recalculates a Primary Bin, it includes quantities and usages from all of its Secondary bins in the calculations. It also includes transfers and reservations for its Secondary Bins.

Page 108 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the Transactions Tab

This is the Transactions tab. It displays details about transactions involving the selected bin, item or work order:

NOTE: The above screen shot was taken from the item properties dialog box. However, any transaction tab you access will look and act the same way.

Page 109 of 525

Working with Cribs The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Transactions Tab: Button Function Click this button to access the properties of the selected transaction record. This button is disabled on the Transactions tab. Transaction records cannot be deleted.

The Right-click Menu

Right-click on a record to display the following menu:

Edit transaction... - Click here to access the properties for the selected transaction record. Cancel... - Select this option to cancel the transaction. Properties: Inventory Item - Click here to access the properties of the associated item. Bin - Click here to access the properties of the associated bin. Employee - Click here to access the properties of the associated employee. Issued To - Click here to access the properties of the user to which the item was issued. Serial ID - Click here to access the properties of the associated serial ID. Return items... - If an item has been issued, select this option to return it. Reprint Issue/Return Receipt... - Select this option to reprint receipts. Set Lot Number... - Select this option to enter a default lot number (if applicable). View Stored Images... - If images of the item have been saved, select this option to view them. Page 110 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the Cycle Counting Tab

To access the Cycle Counting tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Bin... The Crib / Bin Records screen displays. 2. Select the crib you want to edit. 3. Click Properties .

4. Click the Cycle Counting tab. The Cycle Counting tab displays:

Cycle Counting Classification - This is the ID of the inventory cycle count schedule. Multiple schedules can be created. Cycle count classification can be assigned in the item, crib, or bin properties. Override settings for this classification in this crib - Check this box to override the start date for the current cycle. Todays date is supplied as the initial value, but you may change this to another desired date. This feature is used to modify the selection of bins for automatic scheduling. For example, you might need to recount the entire bin before the next cycle, even if they have already been counted. Overriding the start date to the current date would make all bins eligible for rescheduling. Schedule Criteria - Use these fields to further define the cycle count. End date for current cycle - This is the date by which the current inventory cycle count will be completed. The start date for the

Page 111 of 525

Working with Cribs cycle and the end dates for following cycles are calculated from this date. Length of inventory cycle - This is the number of months to complete each cycle count. During this period, the entire inventory will be counted. CribMaster uses this length to calculate the end date for the next cycle when the current cycle is completed. Day of month for end of inventory cycle - This field designates the day of the month for calculated cycle end dates. Length of inventory subcycle - Select a sub-cycle length used to compute the number of sub-cycles in the inventory cycle. Automatic scheduling will evenly distribute the remaining bins to be counted over the sub-cycles left in the current cycle. NOTE: Inventory counts are always initiated by the Crib Attendant by choosing Inventory Reconciliation from the Actions menu. CribMaster will compute how many bins to schedule for counting from the current scheduling criteria. The time remaining before the End Date of the current cycle is divided by sub-cycle length to determine the number of remaining sub-cycles. The number of bins that have not been counted during the current cycle is divided by the number of remaining sub-cycles to determine the number of bins to be scheduled. Automatically schedule bins for inventory - Check this box to have CribMaster automatically schedule bins for counting when you invoke the Inventory Reconciliation dialog from the Actions menu. The scheduled bins will automatically be added to the bin count list when the Inventory Reconciliation window displays. If you do not choose this option, you must press the Schedule button on the Inventory Reconciliation dialog to schedule bins for counting. Update serialized item count status on each transaction - Check this box to have the Date Last Count of all serialized items to match the Status Date for any change to the status of the item, except for "Lost", "Scrapped", and "Out Of Service". NOTE: These latter status changes remove the bin assignment from the item, so they would not be on the Cycle Count report for a bin in any case. Compute count date for serialized item bins - Check this box to have the Date Last Count for a bin containing serialized items to be automatically updated to the oldest Date Last Count value of any serialized item assigned to the bin. If all the items in the bin are used Page 112 of 525

Working with Cribs regularly, then the net effect of this that the Date Last Count value for the bin will gradually move forward. Bins whose Date Last Count field is older than the beginning date of the current counting cycle (e.g. July 1, 1998 in your case) will be scheduled for counting prior to the end of the cycle. NOTE: If enabled, the cycle count record for a serialized bin item will be automatically removed (e.g. the bin no longer requires counting during the cycle) as the result of a transaction or count operation if the computed Date Last Count for the bin becomes more recent than the beginning of the cycle. Hide "Expected Count" value when recording actual counts - Check this box to prevent the expected count column displaying on the cycle counting screen Expected Accuracy (1-100%) - Enter the percentage that the count should be accurate. Enter 100 if the count has to match exactly. If the expected accuracy percentage does not match the count, then the count cannot be reconciled in the Cycle Counting screen. Schedule bins according to: - Use this option to further define the bin counting schedule. Most time since last counted - Select this option to have CribMaster select bins with the oldest "date last counted" before bins which were counted more recently. Fewest number of items - Select this option to have CribMaster select bins with the lowest number of items which are easier and more accurate to count. CribMaster will schedule bins with smaller counts first when this is checked. Each bin will still be counted by the end of the cycle. This may cause the last counts to be more tedious because the bins that tend to contain more items will be counted last. Proximity (consecutive bin number) - Select this option to have CribMaster select bins in ascending order by bin ID to allow bins which are close together to be counted at the same time (e.g. down the aisles of the crib). This does not work if you have not numbered your bins this way. Cost (most expensive first) - Select this option to have CribMaster select bins by cost. If you select this sequence, you will be counting lesser value items later in the count cycle. Bins are ordered by the cost from the primary supplier for quantity of one. Price breaks are not considered and the quantity of items in the bin is not considered. When you are counting things that are too cheap, you can restart the cycle.

Page 113 of 525

Working with Cribs All at same time (at beginning of last subcycle) - Select this option to have CribMaster select all bins.

Page 114 of 525

Working with Cribs

Chapter 4: Working with Bins

Using the Bin Information Tab
To access the Bin Information tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Bin... The Crib/Bin Records screen displays. 2. Select the bin you want to edit. 3. If the properties tab is not visible, click Properties . The Bin Properties dialog box displays. The Bin Information tab is in focus by default.

Crib Number - This is the Crib where this bin is located. Page 115 of 525

Working with Cribs Recovery Managed - Check this box to enable Recovery Management on the selected bin. Consignment Bin - Check this box to mark the bin as a consignment bin. Stop Issue - Check this box if you want to stop issuing from this crib/bin. NOTE: This will automatically be marked if an ATR crib/bin fails to open. Bin ID - This is the Bin ID for this bin. Automatically delete bin when empty - Check this box to have CribMaster delete the crib/bin when it's empty. Create Reworked Bin - Click this button to trigger the creation of a reworked bin. You will be asked to confirm that you wish to create a new Reworked Bin to match the current bin. Select Yes to create a new Rework Bin. NOTE: The Bin ID of the new Reworked Bin is determined by appending the letter R to the current Bin ID. The Item ID associated with the new Rework Bin will be determined by appending the letter R to the Item ID associated with the current bin. This process does not create the Reworked Inventory Item. If the current Bin ID is a full 12 alphanumeric characters, this feature will not be successful, since appending the letter R would result in 13 characters, more than the maximum characters allowed for the Bin ID. Item Number - Enter an ID of the item that will be kept in this bin. Items In Bin - Enter a count of items currently in the bin and available to be issued. In Bin + Checked Out - This is the Bin Quantity plus all items checked out and expected to be returned. This number is different from Bin Quantity for Reworkable items, Durable items, and Gauges. NOTE: For Reworked stock this field also includes items that are pending rework. Recalculate Bin. - Click this button to apply changes made to Items in

Bin Type - Select from normal, primary, secondary, or temporary bin types.

Page 116 of 525

Working with Cribs NOTE: Primary and secondary bin types are used with itemcentric ordering. NOTE: Temporary bin type is used with transfer tracking. Primary Bin - Enter the primary bin for a secondary bin. NOTE: Primary and secondary bin types are used with itemcentric ordering. Stock From Bin - Used for satellite bins. If you enter a bin in this field, the ordering system will not order stock for it. Instead this bin will be shown on the Purchasing Stock Satellite Bins dialog when it drops below its Order Point. Bin Capacity - This is an optional maximum capacity for this bin. If you enter a number here, CribMaster will not order stock to overflow this quantity. NOTE: CribMaster will not replenish over this number. Print Bin Label - Click this button to print a barcode label for this bin. Default Issue Quantity - Enter the assumed issue quantity for the item. Last Counted - Enter the date the bin count was last verified with the Inventory Reconciliation system. Override Issue Price - Enter an override of the issue price specified for the item in the bin (if necessary). This price will be used if specified. Issue Price Properties - Click this button to specify a pending price change based on additional items being issued from the bin. NOTE: This button is enabled by clicking Options > Configuration > Issue/Return Options > Enable scheduled price/consignment flag changes. Price Type - Select a price type from the drop-down list.

Fixed - The price entered is used as the issue price. Cost Ratio - The cost is multiplied times the Issue Price number to compute the issue price used. i.e. 1.25 means 1.25 percent of the cost and 0.1 means 10 percent of the cost. Surcharge - The issue price amount is added to the cost to compute the issue price used. This might be appropriate for vending machine bins.

Page 117 of 525

Working with Cribs

Average Cost - The number in the price field is changed by the system each time purchases are received so that it represents the average cost of purchases. FIFO - First-In-First-Out: inventory accounting in which the oldest items (those first acquired) are assumed to be the first sold. NOTE: The FIFO option is only available in the Enterprise version. NOTE: This field works in conjunction with the Issue Price field above.

Enable FIFO Tracking - Check this box to use FIFO accounting. Total Value - This is Bin Qty * cost from the supplier record (AltVendor.Cost). Total Price - This is Bin Qty * issue price. Check Out Time Limit (Days) - Enter a time limit for this item's issue. NOTE: This field causes a DUE date to be entered in the Checkout record generated for all returnable items issued from this crib. Storage Space - Specify the amount of storage space used for the item. NOTE: This field is enabled when the crib/bin prefix is set. Crib/bin prefixes are set up in the Crib Properties tab. CribBin Prefix - Enter a prefix in this field if necessary. NOTE: The Crib/Bin prefix will be added as a prefix to the Crib/Bin number. Crib Space Properties - If you have a Crib Space set up, click this button to access its properties. Consigned Quantity - This field displays the amount of items owned by the distributor currently in the bin. Consigned Price - This field displays the cost of each item set by the distributor. Owned Quantity - This field displays the amount of items owned by the customer currently in the bin. Owned Price - This field displays the cost of each item set by the customer. Burn Quantity - This field displays the amount of customer items left in the bin after it has been taken over by the distributor. Page 118 of 525

Working with Cribs Cycle Counting - These fields help to define the way cycle counting is used with this bin. Include in Cycle Counting - Check this box if you want this bin included in the inventory reconciliation process. If this is not checked, the bin will not be scheduled for counting. Classification - Select the type of cycle count assigned to this bin. Override - Check this box to have the classification override the classification set in the item properties. NOTE: This box is already checked if it is checked on the Cycle Counting tab in Crib Properties. Comments - Enter any additional information in this field.

Stocking Satellite Bins

The satellite stocking feature provides an easy method for filling one bin from another. To set up a satellite bin, follow the directions below: 1. Click Bin. The Bin Records screen displays. 2. Select the bin you want to edit. 3. If the properties tab is not visible, click Properties . The Bin Properties dialog box displays. The Bin Information tab is in focus by default. 4. On the Bin Information tab, enter a bin in Stock From Bin. The purchasing system will no longer place the item in the list of needed items on the Authorize Purchasing dialog. NOTE: The Stock From Bin must contain the same item number as the satellite bin. 5. Click Purchasing > Stock Satellite Bins... The Satellite Stocking dialog box displays. 6. Enter the amount to transfer in the Tsf column. TIP: Double-click the line to have the Tsf column populated with the Need quantity. 7. Click Process. 8. Click Purchasing > Complete Transfers. The Complete Transfers dialog box displays. 9. Enter the amount to transfer in the Tsf column. 10. Click Complete . The items are transferred. Page 119 of 525

Working with Cribs

Each day CmServer will automatically generate transfers for open satellite stocking needs. This is done just after Auto Purchase. Since these bins will be restocked using transfers, CribMaster provides a separate place on the Ordering Options tab to enter the Cost of processing a transfer and the Lead Time to use for transfers. Order points and order quantities will be computed using these figures for satellite stocking bins. NOTE: When items are transferred to satellite bins, the quantity transferred is added to the usage for the bin the stock is transferred. This is necessary to track usage for the ordering system since the ordering system must order stock for both bins in the FROM bin. Usage is also tracked normally in the satellite bin. When you are analyzing usage, remember that transfers to satellite bins is counted as usage in the bin where the stock is ordered (the FROM bin) when the transfer takes place.

Understanding the Satellite Stocking Dialog Box

To access the Satellite Stocking dialog box, click Purchasing > Stock Satellite Bins... The Satellite Stocking dialog box displays:

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Satellite Stocking dialog box:

Page 120 of 525

Working with Cribs Icon Function Click this button to confirm changes made on this screen. Click this button to populate the Tsf column for all entries in the list. Click this button to clear the Tsf column for all entries in the list. Click the this button to examine the select item. Click this button to refresh the list of items with the latest data. Click this button to undo the previous action.

Column Headers
Crib-Bin From - This is the bin from where the stock will be moved. This is determined by the Stock From Bin entered on the Bin properties Bin Info tab. Placing a bin in the Stock From Bin is what causes a bin to be treated as a satellite bin rather than a normal bin. Qty - This is the current quantity in the Crib-Bin From bin. You cannot move more than this to the satellite bin. Crib-Bin To - This is the satellite bin. Case - This is the case size from the Inventory properties Supplier tab for the primary supplier. Need - This is the Order Now quantity calculated by CribMaster. Tsf - This is the quantity to move. An entry in this column determines that something will be moved. Item Number - This is the Item ID. Description - This is a short description of the item. Bin Comment - This is the comment from the Bin properties Bin Info tab.

Page 121 of 525

Working with Cribs

Understanding the Schedule Price Change Dialog Box

Pending Price Change is a method to automate the changing of the issue price and changing of the consignment status for a bin. This is usually used when inventory is being converted to consignment. NOTE: This dialog box is only available if Options > Enable scheduled price/consignment flag changes is checked. To access the Schedule Price Change dialog box, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Bin... The Crib/Bin Records screen displays. 2. Select the bin you want to edit. 3. If the properties tab is not visible, click Properties . The Bin Properties dialog box displays. The Bin Information tab is in focus by default. 4. In the Issue Price (Override) field, click the browse button ( ). The Schedule Price Change dialog box displays:

Enable Scheduled Price Change - Check this box to establish a scheduled price change for this bin. Price Change - Use these options to help define the price change. Quantity remaining at current price - CribMaster will update this total each time an issue takes place. Reverse issues also affect this number but only until the price has been updated. Once the update takes place, CribMaster no longer remembers the change and reverse issues have no affect. When the quantity remaining at current price drops to zero, CribMaster changes the price for this bin and updates the bin consignment setting. If a requested Issue exceeds the remaining quantity, then CribMaster produces Page 122 of 525

Working with Cribs two transactions with the extra quantity being issued at the new price and consignment setting. New issue price - Enter a new issue price. New Price Type - Select a price type from the drop-down list. Fixed - The price entered is used as the issue price. Cost Ratio - The cost is multiplied times the Issue Price number to compute the issue price used. i.e. 1.25 means 1.25 percent of the cost and 0.1 means 10 percent of the cost. Surcharge - The issue price amount is added to the cost to compute the issue price used. This might be appropriate for vending machine bins. Average Cost - The number in the price field is changed by the system each time purchases are received so that it represents the average cost of purchases. FIFO - First-In-First-Out: inventory accounting in which the oldest items (those first acquired) are assumed to be the first sold. NOTE: The FIFO option is only available in the Enterprise version. New consignment setting - Check this box to have newly entered items be designated as consignment. NOTE: Pending price changes must be enabled under Issue Options in the CribMaster Configuration Options. Each pending price change is entered by pressing the push button by the issue price on the Bin Property page.

Page 123 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the Order Information Tab

To access the Order Information tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Bin... The Crib/Bin Records screen displays. 2. Select the bin you want to edit. 3. If the properties tab is not visible, click Properties . The Bin Properties dialog box displays. The Bin Information tab is in focus by default. 4. Click the Order Information tab.

Order Information - These fields are for recording and displaying details regarding orders for the selected bin.

Page 124 of 525

Working with Cribs Force Order Quantity - Enter a quantity here to force CribMaster to order it when the bin is recalculated. NOTE: This will cause CribMaster to place this quantity into the Order Now field. NOTE: The bin must be saved before the force order quantity takes effect. NOTE: The actual order does not occur until either Auto Purchase produces Purchase Orders or someone manually produces Purchase Orders with the Authorize Purchasing dialog. When an order is placed, this field will be cleared and an On Order amount will appear. If at a later viewing the quantity is still present in the Force Order field, you may change or remove the number and order calculations will return to normal processing. Minimum Order - Enter a minimum quantity to order for this bin. This is an optional minimum for this bin only. If there is also a minimum supplied on the Supplier tab of the Inventory properties, CribMaster will order enough to cover the larger of the two minimums. This can be useful if the item is being ordered from multiple suppliers with different minimums. Fill Bin To Qty (MAX) - This is an optional override of the How Much to Order calculations for this bin only. If a number is entered in this field, CribMaster will order enough of this item to bring the quantity up to this number. Bin Capacity - This is an optional maximum capacity for this bin. If you enter a number here, CribMaster will not order stock to overflow this quantity. Order Now Quantity - This is the quantity CribMaster has computed to order. CribMaster has decided it is time to order this item and this is the quantity it has determined to order. Most of the numbers on this page affect this number. You can override some of the values and press Cal Now to see the new results in this field. Bins with a quantity in this field will be listed on the Authorize Purchasing dialog box. This is a calculated number and is displayed for information only. On Order/At Rework - If the item in this bin is a reworked item, the quantity displayed here is quantity at rework, otherwise it is quantity on order. The On Order quantity also includes pending Transfers where this bin is the Bin To Bin. When the transfer is

Page 125 of 525

Working with Cribs completed, the On Order amount attributed to the transfer will be removed. Pending Rework - This is the quantity for this bin that is in a pending rework status. This should only apply to reworked items. Items In Bin - This is the count of items currently in the bin and available to be issued. Items In Bin + Ckd Out - If item-centric order is turned off, this will be the Bin Quantity plus all items checked out and expected to be returned. If item-centric order is turned on, this will be the Primary and Secondary quantities plus items checked out. NOTE: This number is different from Bin Quantity for Reworkable items, Durable items, and Gauges. NOTE: For Reworked stock this field also includes items that are pending rework. Order Point - This is CribMasters computed order point for this bin. This is displayed for information even if an override has been entered. Overrides will be used if entered. NOTE: Order Point = MonthlyUsage * AverageLeadTime + Safety Stock. NOTE: For reworked items where the option to Combine with rework for ordering calculations has been chosen, the order point will be larger because the monthly usage is larger. However, the quantities compared to the order point are also combined so it is like having one bin that is larger in usage and stock available to be used. Order Point Override - To use a min/max ordering system, use the Override of Order Point for the Min and the Fill Bin To Quantity for Max. Order Quantity - This is CribMasters computed order quantity. This is displayed for information even if an override has been entered. Overrides will be used if entered. (+SF) Override - Overrides will be used for the above field if entered. Avg Lead Time (Days) - This is CribMasters computed Average Lead Time. This is displayed for information even if an override has been entered.

Page 126 of 525

Working with Cribs NOTE: The Average Lead Time is computed from all orders of the item from the primary supplier within the last year. When the primary supplier for an item is changed, the Average Lead Time is recalculated. Avg Lead Time (Days) Override - Overrides will be used for the above field if entered. Max Lead Time (Days) - This is CribMasters computed Maximum Lead Time. This is displayed for information even if an override has been entered. Max Lead Time (Days) Override - Overrides will be used for the above field if entered. Monthly Usage - This is CribMasters computed Monthly Usage. This is displayed for information even if an override has been entered. NOTE: The Monthly Usage is calculated with the information from the Usage Information tab. NOTE: For reworked items where the option to Combine with rework for ordering calculations has been chosen, the combined usage (new usage + reworked usage) is displayed. Monthly Usage Override - Overrides will be used for the above field if entered. Safety Stock - This is CribMasters computed Safety Stock. This is displayed for information purposes even if an override has been entered. Safety Stock Override - Overrides will be used for the above field if entered. Excess Floor - Any amount of items above this number is transferrable. Excess Floor Override - Overrides will be used for the above field if entered. Stop Ordering - Check this box to prevent CribMaster from automatically computing an Order Now quantity for this item. NOTE: You can still add this bin to a Purchase Order using the Add Item button on the Authorize Purchasing dialog box. Surplus Bin - This is used with the option to transfer excess material. Auto Purchase - Items that are designated "auto purchase" have purchase orders generated automatically for this bin. Page 127 of 525

Working with Cribs Critical Point - This is the quantity level used for sending critical alerts. Item Type Description - This is the type of item associated with the bin. Case Size for Primary Supplier - This is the purchasing case size from Item Properties. This field is used for ordering quantities. Max Months Supply allowed - This is the number of months supply allowed based on the crib options setting. Reservation Needs Additional - If there is a reservation, this field specifies how many additional units are needed. Reservation Needs Minimum - If there is a reservation, this field specifies how many units are needed at minimum. Date Last Recalculated - This is the last time the bin was calculated. Item Inactive - This field denotes whether or not the item was removed from the active item list. Primary Supplier - This is the recommended supplier of the item. -> times Monthly Usage = Max On Hand - This is the total of maximum supply * monthly usage. Excess Quantity Available for other bins - This field is associated with the transfer surplus or excess option. Transfers Out - This is the number of outgoing transfers. Transfers In - This is the number of incoming transfers. Calc Now - Click this button to recalculate the values on this property page. NOTE: It is useful to see the effects of changes you make. WARNING: The Calc Now applies current changes as if you had pressed the Apply button. This is necessary to get up-to-date results. Current changes are now updated in the database and cannot be undone with the cancel button. Override Primary Supplier [Blanket #] - If you would rather use a different supplier than the primary, select it from this drop-down. This is based on the setting in Crib Properties.

Page 128 of 525

Working with Cribs

Determining How Much to Order

By default CribMaster orders the Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) calculated:

This quantity represents the optimum quantity given the input available. You have the option to Add the Shortfall to this quantity where the shortfall is (OrderPoint - Quantity - OnOrder). The quantity is checked to make sure it at least gets the inventory level back over the Order Point so an immediate reorder is not generated. This quantity is then adjusted for the Minimum Order quantity for the primary supplier shown on the Suppliers tab of the Inventory Properties dialog. The quantity is also adjusted for the Bin Minimum and for the Bin Capacity shown on the Order Information tab of the bin properties. If there is a Force Order amount, the quantity ordered will be the Force Order amount. If the supplier has a price break schedule, order quantities are computed at each break level greater than the need and the extra profit generated by the lower price is compared to the carrying cost of the extra cost and the optimum quantity is chosen. CribMaster will not order more that the Maximum Months Supply to Order from the Options> Ordering tab. In addition, all orders are checked through the Price Schedule to make sure that more quantity cannot be purchased at the same or lower costs. Alternative Quantity - For any bin you may specify a Fill Bin To Quantity on the Order Information tab of the Bin properties. When the Fill Bin To Quantity is specified, none of the above calculations take place and a quantity is ordered to bring the quantity in the bin up to the quantity specified in the Fill Bin To Quantity field. If the OrderPoint is higher than the Fill Bin To Quantity, the order is increased to bring the level to the OrderPoint so an immediate reorder is not generated. NOTE: When cost has not been entered on the Inventory properties page, the economic order quantity cannot be computed. In this case the order quantity will be the largest of: Page 129 of 525

Working with Cribs

1 OrderPoint - Quantity - OnOrder Maximum - Quantity - m_OnOrder NOTE: For bins that use transfers for restocking, (bin has a StockFromBin, Crib has StockFromCrib, or Item has StockFromCrib) the Cost of Ordering in the EOQ formula is the Cost of Transferring a single item on the Ordering option tab.

Using the Safety Stock Tab

To access the Safety Stock tab, follow the steps below: 1. Click File > Options... The Crib Options dialog box displays. 2. Click the Safety Stock tab. The Safety Stock tab displays: Safety Stock Ratio - Select a safety stock ratio from the options below. (0.1 to 3 - Default = 0.7) - This is the Safety Stock Ratio which is multiplied times Monthly Usage * Avg Lead Time to compute the Safety Stock. This figure is system wide. A change in this number is applied to bins when they are next checked for an order need (when there is an issue, a receipt, or monthly). Critical Parts (Use for Items marked "Critical Part") - This ratio is used for bins contain inventory items marked "Critical Part" on the Inventory Properties More Tab. Safety Stock Formula - Select a safety stock formula from the options below. - This is the recommended Safety Stock formula.

- This is Form 2 of the Safety Stock formula. This computation for Safety Stock produces less Safety Stock when the Max Lead Time is close to the Avg Lead Time and more safety stock when Max Lead Time is more than twice as large as Avg Lead Time. Page 130 of 525

Working with Cribs

- This Safety Stock formula ignores Avg Lead Time and computes Safety Stock strictly as a ratio of Monthly Usage. NOTE: When you change your safety stock preference, the change applies to all future calculations and will not automatically change amounts to be ordered. If you want an immediate recalculation of all bins, click Actions > Recalculate All Bins from the menu.

Understanding Alerts for Critical Quantity Level

CribMaster will send you an Email when the quantity in a bin reaches a critical level. This is a short email message suitable for cell phones. To use this feature:

Enter the Critical Quantity for each bin you want warnings issued. This is keyed on the "Order Information" tab of the Bin properties. Enter the Email address for the message on the Crib Property page. You may alternately enter the Email address for Alert Messages at the Supplier level on the main property page for each supplier. If neither of these Alert Email address is entered, CribMaster will send the message to the Vendor Email Address.

CribMaster will send you an Email when one of the following transactions occurs and the BinQuantity is at or below the assigned Critical Quantity.

ISSUE ISSRT SCRAP TROX TROUT BNTPN RTOSP

To turn off the messages for a particular bin, just clear (blank) the Critical Quantity on the "Order Information" tab. NOTE: The messages are sent by CMServer. CMServer must be running and configured for sending Email.

Page 131 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the Usage Information Tab

To access the Usage Information tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Bin... The Crib/Bin Records screen displays. 2. Select the bin you want to edit. 3. If the properties tab is not visible, click Properties . The Bin Properties dialog box displays. The Bin Information tab is in focus by default. 4. Click the Usage Information tab.

Usage this Month - This field is the month to date usage from this bin. You may edit this number to make adjustments. Date Last Issue - This is the date of the last issue for this bin.

Page 132 of 525

Working with Cribs Date Last Received - This is the date of the last receipt for this bin (the receipt of an order from a supplier). Date Last Recalculated - This is the date of the last bin recalculation. Usage History - These are the usage figures for the given month for this bin. You can edit the numbers to enter history or make adjustments. NOTE: These numbers are used to compute the average monthly usage. NOTE: Prior Month one is last month and Prior Month 24 is two years ago.

Page 133 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the Transactions Tab

This is the Transactions tab. It displays details about transactions involving the selected bin, item or work order:

NOTE: The above screen shot was taken from the Item Properties dialog box. However, any transaction tab you access will look and act the same way. The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Transactions tab:

Page 134 of 525

Working with Cribs Icon Function Click this button to access the properties of the selected transaction record. Click this button to cancel the selected transaction.

Column Headers
Crib - This field displays the ID of the crib. Type - This is the transaction type. Crib-Bin - This field displays the ID of the crib and bin. Qty - This is the number of items involved in the transaction. Bin Qty - This is the amount of items left in the bin after the transaction. Cost - This is the cost of the transaction. Item - This is the number for the item involved in the transaction. Description - This is the primary description of the item. Empl ID - This is the identification of the employee who initiated the transaction. Name - This is the joined First Name and Last Name fields from the Name and ID tab of Employee Properties. Issued To ID - If the transaction was an item issue, this is the identification of the employee to which the item was issued. Date - This is the date the transaction took place. Serial ID - This is the serial ID of the item involved in the transaction (if applicable). Usage Item Number - This is the substitute item number (used with XREF). Usage CribBin - This is the CribBin used for the reservation involved in the transaction (used with XREF). Other CribBin - This depends on the type of transaction: ISSRT Contains the Return To CribBin if different RECVE Contains Rework bin if Receive New As Rework Option is Enabled for this item TRACK Contains the final destination bin WO Seq - This field is populated when the transaction is done against a Work Order. Batch - If the item is part of batch scan, the ID appears in this column. Count Class - This is the type of cycle count schedule set up for the item or bin. Expected Accuracy (%) - This is the expected accuracy of the cycle count. Page 135 of 525

Working with Cribs Related Key - If the selected transaction is related to another transaction (for instance, a cancellation) this field contains the Transaction number of the other transaction. Site No - This is the identifier for the Site Profile involved in the transaction. User (1-6) - These are user-defined fields that may have been used in the transaction. No. - This is the database identifier for this transaction.

Right-Click Menu
Right-click on a record to display the following menu:

Edit transaction - Click here to access the properties for the selected transaction record. Cancel - Select this option to cancel the transaction. Properties: Inventory Item - Click here to access the properties of the associated item. Bin - Click here to access the properties of the associated bin. Employee - Click here to access the properties of the associated employee. Issued To - Click here to access the properties of the user to which the item was issued. Serial ID - Click here to access the properties of the associated serial ID. Return items... - If an item has been issued, select this option to return it. Reprint Issue/Return Receipt... - Select this option to reprint receipts. Set Lot Number... - Select this option to enter a default lot number (if applicable). View Stored Images... - If images of the item have been saved, select this option to view them. Page 136 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the Links Tab

This is the Links tab. It is used to link applicable files to bins, items, serial ID's, etc.:

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Labor tab: Button Function Click this button to add a link to the selected record. Click this button to edit the selected link file. Click this button to remove the select link.

Page 137 of 525

Working with Cribs

Column Headings
Description - This is a description of the link. File Name - This is the path to the linked file. Print Codes - Used for reporting. CribMaster will look for these codes when printing. ID - This is the database identifier for this link. Adding a New Link 1. Click Crib/Bin. The Crib/Bin Records screen displays. 2. Select the bin you want to edit. 3. If the properties tab is not visible, click Properties . The Bin Properties dialog box displays. The Bin Information tab is in focus by default. 4. Click the Links tab. 5. Click New . A new line is added to the list. 6. Enter a Description that explains the type of file to which you are linking. 7. Under filename, click the Browse button ( ). 8. Locate the file you want to link. 9. Click Open. 10. Enter any needed Print Codes. 11. Click OK. Fields Description - This is a description of the link. File Name - This is the path to the linked file. Print Codes - Used for reporting. CribMaster will look for these codes when printing.

Page 138 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the Audit Tab

This is the Audit tab. It displays information about changes made to data in the database:

NOTE: This tab is for information purposes only. Table Audit History No - This is the database identifier for the audit record. Table Name - This is the database table affected. Field Name - This is the database name of the field affected. Key Value Audit Date - This is the date the action took place. Audit Type Audit UID Previous Value - This is the original information before the action took place. Current Value - This is the information as a result of the action.

Page 139 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the PO History Tab

This is the PO History tab. It displays information about purchase orders made that are related to the selected item, bin, serial ID or work order:

Click Properties ( Order properties.

) or double-click a work order to access Purchase

Page 140 of 525

Working with Cribs

Using the Crib/Bin Records Screen

To access the Crib / Bin Records screen, click Crib/Bin. The Crib / Bin Records screen displays:

The lists of crib records and bin records are displayed in a split window. The left pane of the split window displays Crib records and the right pane lists Bin records. The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to create a new crib. Click here to create a new bin. Click here to create a new item. Click here to access the properties of the selected crib. Click here to delete the selected crib.

Page 141 of 525

Working with Cribs Click here to examine an item. Click here to send the selected items to rework. Click here to adjust the count of the selected bin. Click here to transfer items from one bin to another. Click here to view all bins regardless of what crib is selected. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Column Headers
Left Pane Crib - This field displays the ID of the crib. Name - This field displays the name given to the crib. Area - This is the area ID assigned to this crib. Label Printer - This field displays the printer that is used when certain label reports are printed without specifying a printer. Comment - This field displays any additional information about the crib. Site - This field displays the purchasing site of the crib. Right Pane Crib-Bin - This field displays the ID of the crib and bin. Item - This field displays the item that is associated with the bin. Group - This field displays the inventory group for the selected item.

Page 142 of 525

Working with Cribs Bin Qty - This field displays the amount of the item currently in the bin. Description - This field displays the description of the item. Description2 - This field displays any additional information about the item. Bin Type - This field displays the type of bin: normal, primary, secondary, or temporary bin types. Primary and secondary bin types are used with item-centric ordering. The temporary bin type is used with transfer tracking. On Order - This field displays the amount of the selected item that is on order. Pend. Rwk - This field displays the amount of the selected item that is pending rework. Comment - This field displays any additional information about the bin. Mfr # - This field displays the number of the manufacturer of the item. Manufacturer - This field displays the name of the manufacturer of the item. Primary CribBin - This field displays the primary bin (if the bin is used for item-centric ordering). Stop Ordering - If the Stop Ordering check box is checked on he Order Information tab of the Bin Properties dialog box, Yes displays in this field. Inactive - If the Remove from active item list check box is checked on the Bin Information tab, Yes displays in this field. Stop Issue - If the Stop Issue check box is checked on the Bin Information tab, Yes displays in this field. Last Recalc Date - This field displays the date the bin was last calculated from the Order Information tab of the Bin Properties dialog box. Unit of Measure (Issue) - This field displays the way the selected item is issued.

The Right-Click Menu

Left Pane This is the menu that displays when you right-click the left pane of the Crib / Bin Records screen:

Page 143 of 525

Working with Cribs

New entry - Select this option to create a new crib. Edit Properties - Select this option to access the properties of the select crib. Delete - Select this option to remove the selected crib from the system. Set as current crib - Select this option to set the selected crib as the assigned crib for the current workstation. Print crib label - Select this option to print a barcode label for the crib. Right Pane This is the menu that displays when you right-click the right pane of the Crib / Bin Records screen:

Page 144 of 525

Working with Cribs New Bin - Select this option to create a new bin. Bin Properties - Select this option to edit the properties of the selected bin. Delete Bin - Select this option to remove the selected bin from the system. Rename Bin - Select this option to change the name of the selected bin. Print Bin Label - Select this option to print a barcode label for the bin. Inventory Item Properties - Select this option to access the properties of the item associated with the selected bin. Examine Item - Select this option to examine the selected item. Show Item Location(s) - Select this option to display the Show Item Location dialog box for the selected item. Record Out of Stock - Select this option to create a record indicating a request for an Out Of Stock item. This information will appear on the stock out report. Adjust Bin Count - Select this option to increase or decrease the bin count. Verify Bin Count - Select this option to verify the bin count. The last counted date will be updated and the bin will skip to the next inventory cycle. Purge Bin - Select this option to remove all inventories from the selected bin. Retrieve Bin - Select this option to pull the bin for counting or inventory purposes. NOTE: For use with the CMAX supported dispenser. Transfer Items - Select this option to transfer items from one bin to another. Transfer to Different Item - Select this option to transfer non-serialized items from one bin to another bin and merge the inventory. Recovery Billing - Select this option to move multiple items from consignment to non-consignment. Bin to Pending Rework - Select this option to send a reworkable item type to a rework bin. The item will appear as pending rework and will not be available for issue until it is returned from rework. Pending Rework Back to Bin - Select this option to return reworkable type items from pending rework back to the bin. Bin to Scrap - Select this option to scrap non-serialized items and make them unavailable for issue. Pending to Scrap - Select this option to scrap reworkable type items from pending rework.

Page 145 of 525

Working with Cribs Assemble Kit - Select this option to assemble all the components of a kit type item. Transfers will be generated to transfer the components from the component crib/bin to the kit crib/bin. Disassemble Kit - Select this option to un-assemble or disassemble an assembled kit. Transfers will be generated to transfer the components from the kit crib/bin to the individual component crib/bin. Inspect Kit - Select this option to inspect the components of an assembled kit. Components can be transferred in, scrapped, or transferred out from the inspect kit screen. Transfers will be generated for the components.

Page 146 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Chapter 5: Working with Serial Items

NOTE: Items of type Gauge are always serialized. Items of type Durable and Kit may be designated as serialized item type on the Item Info property page. If an inventory item is designated as serialized, then all items using that inventory item number must be serialized (You may not assign Serial IDs to some items and not to others). Each serialized item within CribMaster is assigned a unique SerialID that identifies it throughout the system. CribMaster also supplies an optional spot to store the manufactures Serial Number, but this is not used to identify an item within CribMaster (Although you can search for these, they are not required and are not unique). The serialized item list displays all serialized items within CribMaster. You will see different subsets of the list of serialized items from some of the property pages: (Note that the Serial tab only appears when the item is serialized.) Displayed on the list of serialized item is the status of each item. You can change the status of an item from the Context Menu (right mouse click on the item) and from the items property page. Activity such as issue and return will also affect item status.

Creating a New Serial ID

To create a new Serial ID, follow the steps below: 1. Click Serial ID. The Serial ID Records screen displays. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click New . A new line is added. Enter the Serial ID. Enter the Item Number. Enter any additional information. . Click

Page 147 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Editing a Serial ID
To edit a Serial ID, follow the steps below: 1. Click Serial ID. The Serial ID Records screen displays. 2. Select the serial ID you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Serial ID Properties pane displays. 4. Make any necessary changes. 5. Click .

Deleting a Serial ID
To delete a Serial ID, follow the steps below: 1. Click Serial ID. The Serial ID Records screen displays. 2. Select the serial ID you want to delete. 3. Click Delete . The serial ID is removed from the system.

Using the Serial Information Tab

This tab is used to enter the primary information related to a particular item and establish the existence of the item in CribMaster. The Serial ID uniquely identifies the item within CribMaster. Before you enter these records, you should enter an Inventory Item for each serial item type. To access the Serial Information tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Serial ID. The Serial ID Records screen displays. 2. Select the serial ID you want to edit. . The Serial ID Properties tab displays. The 3. Click Properties Serial Information tab is in focus by default:

Page 148 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Serial ID - This is the Serial ID that you want to associate with this item. Serial ID Employee - This is the ID of the employee that currently has the tool checked out if the tool is in check out status. Item Number - This is the item number of the inventory item that describes this particular serial item. Serial Number - This is the serial number of this item. This field is optional and is used for verification. Manufacturer - This is the name of the manufacturer of the item. ID Locked - This field denotes whether or not the serial ID is associated with a certified system whose components are locked. Mfr # - This is the manufacturer's part number.

Page 149 of 525

Working with Serial Items Alternate Scan Code - If some of your serialized items already have a unique bar code associated with them, you can enter their values in this field and use the bar codes within CribMaster. Status Date - This is the date of the last status change. Date in Service - This field is automatically set when the Serial ID record is created. This is for record keeping only and represents the date that this serial item was placed in service. Status - Shows the status of the selected Serial ID: Checked In - Serial ID is available for issue. Checked Out - Serial ID is issued to an employee. Lost - Serial ID is no longer in the system. In Calibration - Serial ID is being calibrated. Inactive - Serial ID is unavailable for issue. In Repair - Serial ID is being repaired. Off-Site - Serial ID is not at the current facility. Out of Service - Gauge is no longer being used. Unassigned - Serial ID is not assigned to a crib/bin. Unusable - Serial ID is no longer usable. In Assembly - Serial ID is part of an assembled kit Scrapped - Serial ID has been thrown away. NOTE: Not all statuses apply to all items. Kit Serial ID - This is the Serial ID of the kit in which the item is located. Reason Code - This field describes the change in status of this serialized item. Crib-Bin - This is the crib/bin to which the item is assigned. Date Counted - This is the date that the tool was last counted. Sequence - This field is used internally by CribMaster in conjunction with certain tool vending equipment. Run Units - This field is used for recording the meter reading on serialized tools that have a meter. Expiration Date - This field is used to track expiration on any serial ID's. TIP: There is an Expiration report on the Serial Items report dialog to track these expirations. Last Issued - This is the date the serial ID was last issued Repair/Cal No. - This is used for recording the number of times a tool has been placed in Repair status. Repair/Cal No. Reset - Click this button to reset the Repair/Cal No. Purchase Cost - This is the purchase cost of the item. Page 150 of 525

Working with Serial Items

NOTE: This field can be entered manually or it can be autopopulated with a purchase cost from an intersite-transfer. Comments - This is used to record anything about an individual item. Custom Fields - These are customized fields set up for serial ID's.

Understanding the Transactions Tab

This is the Transactions tab. It displays details about transactions involving the selected bin, item or work order:

Page 151 of 525

Working with Serial Items NOTE: The above screen shot was taken from the Item Properties dialog box. However, any transaction tab you access will look and act the same way. The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Transactions tab:

Icon

Function Click this button to access the properties of the selected transaction record. Click this button to cancel the selected transaction.

Column Headers
Crib - This field displays the ID of the crib. Type - This is the transaction type. Crib-Bin - This field displays the ID of the crib and bin. Qty - This is the number of items involved in the transaction. Bin Qty - This is the amount of items left in the bin after the transaction. Cost - This is the cost of the transaction. Item - This is the number for the item involved in the transaction. Description - This is the primary description of the item. Empl ID - This is the identification of the employee who initiated the transaction. Name - This is the joined First Name and Last Name fields from the Name and ID tab of Employee Properties. Issued To ID - If the transaction was an item issue, this is the identification of the employee to which the item was issued. Date - This is the date the transaction took place. Serial ID - This is the serial ID of the item involved in the transaction (if applicable). Usage Item Number - This is the substitute item number (used with XREF). Usage CribBin - This is the CribBin used for the reservation involved in the transaction (used with XREF). Other CribBin - This depends on the type of transaction: ISSRT Contains the Return To CribBin if different RECVE Contains Rework bin if Receive New As Rework Option is Enabled for this item Page 152 of 525

Working with Serial Items

TRACK Contains the final destination bin WO Seq - This field is populated when the transaction is done against a Work Order. Batch - If the item is part of batch scan, the ID appears in this column. Count Class - This is the type of cycle count schedule set up for the item or bin. Expected Accuracy (%) - This is the expected accuracy of the cycle count. Related Key - If the selected transaction is related to another transaction (for instance, a cancellation) this field contains the Transaction number of the other transaction. Site No - This is the identifier for the Site Profile involved in the transaction. User (1-6) - These are user-defined fields that may have been used in the transaction. No. - This is the database identifier for this transaction.

Right-Click Menu
Right-click on a record to display the following menu:

Edit transaction - Click here to access the properties for the selected transaction record. Cancel - Select this option to cancel the transaction. Properties: Inventory Item - Click here to access the properties of the associated item. Bin - Click here to access the properties of the associated bin. Employee - Click here to access the properties of the associated employee. Issued To - Click here to access the properties of the user to which the item was issued.

Page 153 of 525

Working with Serial Items Serial ID - Click here to access the properties of the associated serial ID. Return items... - If an item has been issued, select this option to return it. Reprint Issue/Return Receipt... - Select this option to reprint receipts. Set Lot Number... - Select this option to enter a default lot number (if applicable). View Stored Images... - If images of the item have been saved, select this option to view them.

Using the Status History Tab

To access the Status History tab, follow the steps below: 1. Click Serial ID. The Serial ID Records screen displays. 2. Select the serial ID you want to edit. . The Serial ID Properties tab displays. 3. Click Properties 4. Click the Status History tab.

Page 154 of 525

Working with Serial Items The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Status History Tab:

Icon

Function Click here to access the properties of the selected serial ID status history. Click here to access the serial ID properties of the parent kit. Click here to return back to the child kit from the parent kit.

Column Headings
Status This field displays the status of the serialized item. Date This field displays the date of the status change. Employee ID This field displays the ID of the employee who generated the status change. Name This field displays the name of the employee who generated the status change. Serial ID Employee This field displays the employee ID with checkout record. Reason Code This field displays the reason code for the status change. Description This field displays the description of the reason code. Crib/Bin This field displays the crib/bin for the item. Kit SerialID - If this serial ID is included in a kit, that kit's serial ID displays here. No. - This field is an identifier for the record.

Page 155 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Using the Serial Status History Properties Dialog Box

This dialog box displays when you select a serial ID status history and click Properties :

Serial ID - This is the selected serial ID. No. - This field is an identifier for the record. Employee - This field displays the ID of the employee who generated the status change. Status - This field displays the status of the serialized item. Status Date - This is the date the status was applied. Issued To - This is the employee to which the item was issued. Reason Code - This field displays the reason code for the status change. Custom Fields - These are custom fields created for this tab.

Page 156 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Understanding the Links Tab

This is the Links tab. It is used to link applicable files to bins, items, serial ID's, etc.:

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Links tab: Icon Function Click this button to add a link to the selected record. Click this button to edit the selected link file. Click this button to remove the selected link. Page 157 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Column Headers
Description - This is a description of the link. File Name - This is the path to the linked file. Print Codes - Used for reporting. CribMaster will look for these codes when printing. ID - This is the database identifier for this link. Fields Description - This is a description of the link. File Name - This is the path to the linked file. Print Codes - Used for reporting. CribMaster will look for these codes when printing.

Using the Advanced Tab

To access the Advanced tab, follow the steps below: 1. Click Serial ID. The Serial ID Records screen displays. 2. Select the serial ID you want to edit. . The Serial ID Properties tab displays. 3. Click Properties 4. Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced tab displays:

Page 158 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Home Crib - This field designates the current owning tool room for a serialized tool. This field will be preserved even in situations in which CribMaster clears the current Crib/Bin assignment. Serial ID Return Option - This indicates whether the Serial ID can be returned (or issued) from another crib. This field provides for a per Serial ID override of the global return option. The option types are: Use the global default setting Item will be returned using the options set at File-Options: Serialized Item Return Options or Gauge Item Return Options. Otherwise you may specify the handling for each Serialized item individually. Return allowed only to Home Crib - When a Serialized tool is returned, it is always returned to its current assigned location regardless of where the transaction was performed.

Page 159 of 525

Working with Serial Items Return anywhere with automatic transfer back to home crib When a serialized tool is returned to a crib other than the home crib, it is temporarily assigned to a location in the crib to which it was returned. A transfer request is automatically created to transfer the tool to its home crib. A temporary location will be created in the returned-to crib if necessary. Other use of the tool will be blocked. Return anywhere with Home Crib assignment change to return location - The home crib will be automatically switched (optional) to the returned-to crib provided a permanent location exists for the tool. If a permanent location for the tool already exists, the user will be prompted as to whether the home location for the tool should be assigned to the corresponding tool room. If a permanent location does not exist (or the user does not confirm the reassignment), the behavior described in (2) above will apply: The tool will be transferred back to its home crib. The home crib also can be reassigned: By directly changing the home crib field on the Serial ID Properties page. Optionally, by transferring the tool to a new location: When a transfer of a serialized tool of any type is completed, CribMaster will look at the crib option settings under "Automatically Reassign Home Crib When Transferred." Tools transferred via an Inter-site transfer will automatically be assigned to the destination crib when the transfer is completed. Purchased tools will automatically be assigned to the crib associated with the purchase request. A tool without a home crib assignment will be treated as a Type 3 tool. The CribMaster "area" concept interacts with the home location: A tool may always be returned to any crib in the same area regardless of its Type. If the designated return location is not in the home crib: Type 1 and 2 tools will always be transferred back to the home location. Type 3 tools will be treated as described above. Page 160 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Regardless of the value of the Item Serial Return Option, a confirmation message will always be displayed when item is being returned elsewhere (even if permitted). When transfers are generated to move tools back to their home crib, the transfer report/label options will determine whether paperwork associated with the transfer is generated. Assembly Status

Complete All parts present. Transfers Pending Transfers are pending indicating that items need to be added or removed from the assembly. Verification Required The assembly is in an unknown state and should be reverified. This option will display a dialog box on screen when the kit is issued informing the user that the kit is in an unknown state and asks them to confirm the issue.

CribMaster will require confirmation when an assembly is issued in anything except for a "Complete" status. When assembly transfers are created as a result of an assembly inspection or rekitting operations (e.g. to restock or disassemble an assembly), it will be put into "Transfer Pending" status. Completion of all pending transfers will set the assembly back to "Complete" status. Deletion of a transfer into or out of the assembly will set it to "Verification Required" status. This status will remain until the assembly is inspected again. Any change to a kit definition will set all affected assemblies to "Verification Required" status. Enable preventive or corrective maintenance on this item - Check this box to allow this serialized item to be used in preventive maintenance functions.

Page 161 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Using the Gauge/INSP Tool Tab

To access the Gauge/INSP tab, follow the steps below: 1. Click Serial ID. The Serial ID Records screen displays. 2. Select the serial ID you want to edit. . The Serial ID Properties tab displays. 3. Click Properties 4. Click the Gauge tab.

Status Status Date - The date of the last status change. Status - Shows the current status of this gauge.

Page 162 of 525

Working with Serial Items Last Calibration Date - Shows the last time this gauge was calibrated. Current Usage Usage is recorded each time the item is returned after being checked out. This is the current accumulated usage on the gauge since the last time this gauge was calibrated. If this amount exceeds the Usage per Calibration amount, this gauge will show up on the Calibration Report. Inactive Days Inactive days are accumulated while a gauge is in the inactive state. These days are not considered when deciding if a gauge needs calibrating. Date Removed from Service - This field is used to show the date that a gauge is permanently removed from service. This field is set when the Remove From Service button on the bottom of this dialog is pressed. Once selected, this gauge cannot be issued any more. It is VERY important not to remove a gauge from service until you are sure that this gauge will no longer be used as there is no way to return a gauge to service once it has been removed. Calibration Schedule Base Date - If you are scheduling calibration of a gauge based on time rather than on usage, this would be the date from which periodic calibrations would be based. For example, if you enter a base date of 02/01/96 and you indicate that you want the gauge calibrated four times per year, the system will schedule the gauge to be calibrated on 05/01/96, 08/01/96, 11/01/96 and so on. It would be scheduled every three months counting from the base date of 02/01/96. Next Calibration - Shows the next scheduled date for calibration. Override - You can specify the next calibration date if you like. Calibration Interval For date-based calibration scheduling, the amount of time between scheduled certifications of the gauge. This can be in days, months, or years, up to a maximum of 10 years. If you use months or years, CribMaster will attempt to schedule the next certification on the same day of the month or year when possible (CribMaster does not schedule certifications for weekends). Leave this field blank if you want to schedule calibrations based on gauge usage instead of dates. CribMaster will not allow a gauge to be checked out after its scheduled certification date has passed (Optionally See Gauge Option Section on main options page). NOTE: CribMaster also supports Days Used as a Calibration Interval. Days Used is computed from days that the gauge is checked out. No matter how many times you check out and return a gauge on the same day, you only get one day Page 163 of 525

Working with Serial Items used for that day. You can combine calendar usage with days used by entering your calendar schedule and then placing a number in the Max Usage field. TIP: (Choose "Times Used" in the Calibration Interval type combo box next to the Calibration Interval field.) For usage based calibration scheduling, the number of times a gauge can be used between certifications. CribMaster will not allow a gauge to be checked out after its usage since the last certification exceeds this number Additionally, entering zero (0) in this field will disable certification checking for this gauge item it can be checked out regardless of the amount of usage or elapsed time since the previous certification. Max Usage The Max Usage field is considered to be a days used limit when a calendar schedule has been entered. Reminder Days - If you are scheduling calibration of a gauge based on time, you might want the gauge to appear on the Gauges Needing Calibration report a week early. The gauge might be in production and time should be allowed for an appropriate substitution. In this case you would enter "7" for the reminder days. Max Inactive Days - The gauge will be calibrated at this number of inactive days even though it is still in an inactive state. Override - In some cases you will need to set a fixed date for a calibration. If you enter a date here it will be observed, even if regularly scheduled times are later. Use delayed activation for this gauge - Tools marked as delayed activation will automatically change into Inactive status when they are returned/received from calibration.

Page 164 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Using the Certification Tab

To access the Certification tab, follow the steps below: 1. Click Serial ID. The Serial ID Records screen displays. 2. Select the serial ID you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Serial ID Properties tab displays. 4. Click the Certification tab. The Certification tab displays:

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Certification tab:

Page 165 of 525

Working with Serial Items Icon Function Click this button to create a new certification record. Click this button to access the properties of the selected certification record. Click this button to remove the selected certification record.

Date Recorded - This is the date the certification results were recorded. Date Certified - This is the date the gauge was last certified. Certified By - This is the user that performed the certification. General Notes - This is a field for any additional information about the certification record. ID - This is the database identifier for the record.

Using the Serial ID Records Screen

To access the Serial ID Records screen click Serial ID. The Serial ID Records screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to access the properties of the serial ID. Click here to create a new serial ID.

Page 166 of 525

Working with Serial Items Click here to remove the selected serial ID from the system. Click here to filter the list down to gauges only. Click here to filter the list down to durable items only. Click here to filter the list down to kits only. Click here to filter the list down to inspected tools only. Click here to filter the list down to items that are out of service. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Column Headers
TIP: You can search these columns for specific values. Serial ID - This is the ID of the selected serial ID. NOTE: This field is required and is used when issuing the item. Item Number - This is the number of the item to which the serial ID is assigned. Group Description - This is a description of the item group. Serial Number - This is the serial number of the item (optional). Gauge type - This is going to be either "Gauge" or "Inspection Tool." Crib-Bin - This is the crib/bin in which the serial ID is assigned. Status - This is the current status of the gauge. Reason Code - This is the code that denotes the change in status of the serialized item. Reason Code Description - This field describes the change in status of this serialized item. Employee - This is the employee to which the serialized item was checked out. Name - This is the name of the employee to which the serialized item was checked out.

Page 167 of 525

Working with Serial Items Assembly Status - This is the current status of the assembly associated with the selected serial ID. Status Date - This is the date the last status was noted. Next Calib - This is the next date a gauge is set for calibration. Expiration - This is the expiration date of the selected serial ID. Out Service - This is the date the gauge was taken out of service. Kit SerialID - This is the Serial ID of the kit that this item is in. Count Date - This is the date that the tool was last counted. Alt. ScanCode - If some of your serialized items already have a unique bar code associated with them, the entered value displays in this field. Home Crib - This field designates the current owning tool room for a serialized tool. NOTE: This is used in conjunction with the return option. Last Issue - This is the date the serial ID was last issued.

Right-Click Menu
This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the Serial ID Records screen:

New Serial ID... - Select this option to create a new serial ID. Serial ID Properties... - Select this option to access the properties of the selected serial ID. Delete Serial ID... - Select this option to remove the serial ID from the system. Page 168 of 525

Working with Serial Items Rename... - Select this option to rename the serial ID. Properties: Serial ID - Select this option to access the properties of the selected serial ID. Inventory Item - Select this option to access the properties of the item associated with the selected serial ID. Bin - Select this option to access the properties of the bin associated with the selected serial ID. NOTE: Deletion of serial ID's is not recommended. Certify/calibrate gauge... - Select this option to certify the tool. Set Status: In Calibration - Select this option to denote that the tool is being calibrated. Checked In - Select this option to denote that the tool has been checked back in. Checked Out - Select this option to denote that the tool has been checked out. NOTE: This option cannot be selected unless the item has been checked out. Inactive - Select this option to denote that the tool is inactive. Out of Service - Select this option to denote that the tool is no longer in service. In Assemble - When a serial ID is assembled, this status is selected automatically. Lost - Select this option to denote that the tool has been lost. Off-site - Select this option to denote that the tool has been taken away from the crib's facility. In Repair - Select this option to denote that the tool is being repaired. Unusable - Select this option to denote that the tool is no longer usable. Add to Assembly - Select this option to add the associated serial ID to an assemble. Transfer Items - Select this option to transfer items from one bin to another. Kit Component Labels - Select this option to print labels for the components of the selected kit. NOTE: This option only displays when you right-click a serial ID associated with a kit. Page 169 of 525

Working with Serial Items

Inspect Kit - Select this option to inspect the components of an assembled kit. Components can be transferred in, scrapped, or transferred out from the Inspect Kit screen. Transfers will be generated for the components. NOTE: This option only displays when you right-click a serial ID associated with a kit. Assembly transfers - This displays the Complete Transfers screen filtered to transfers associated with the selected Serial ID. NOTE: This option only displays when you right-click a serial ID associated with a kit. Disassemble Kit - Select this option to un-assemble or disassemble an assembled kit. Transfers will be generated to transfer the components from the kit crib/bin to the individual component crib/bin. NOTE: This option only displays when you right-click a serial ID associated with a kit. Kit Status Report - This option sends a kit status report directly to the default printer. NOTE: This option only displays when you right-click a serial ID associated with a kit. View: Durable - Click here to filter the list down to durable items only. Gauge - Click here to filter the list down to gauges only. Kit - Click here to filter the list down to kits only. Inspected Tool - Click here to filter the list down to inspected tools only. Print Serial ID Label... - Select this option to print a barcode label for the selected serial ID. Assign RFID Tag to Serial ID... - Select this option to assign an RFID tag to the selected serial ID.

Page 170 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields

Chapter 6: Working with User Defined

Fields
CribMaster offers flexibility in tracking use of items from the tool crib. Each issue is tracked by employee and up to six categories to be named by you. Each time an item is issued; the categories are specified and saved. You can run reports of usage for each category and as well as reports of transactions, checked out items, and red flags by category. Some possible categories might be: Department Machine Job Cell Account Number Company Operation Employee (If you want to track a second employee for usage such as courier.)

You need to choose categories and set them up before you begin using CribMaster. The categories are stored in transactions and therefore changing categories after you have transactions, causes existing transactions to have incomplete data. CribMaster allows renaming and changing categories but you need to consider the affects of these changes on existing data. You can specify how User Defined Fields are treated for Normal Transactions and Transactions with a Work Order from the maintenance module. This allows you to use a different set of User Defined Fields for maintenance transactions.

Page 171 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields

Creating User Defined Fields

To create a user defined field, follow the steps below: 1. To access User Defined Fields, click System > System Options > User Defined Fields... The User Defined Fields screen displays:

2. Select an unused field. 3. Select either Optional or Required for Issue Transactions. 4. Select either Optional or Required for Work Order Transactions. 5. Enter any additional information. 6. Click Save. The field is now ready to be used.

Editing a User Defined Field

To edit a user defined field, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > System Options > User Defined Fields... The User Defined Fields screen displays. 2. Select the user defined field you want to edit. 3. Make any necessary changes. 4. Press Tab. The field is now ready to be used.

Page 172 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields

Working with the User Defined Fields Screen

Using the Option Properties Dialog Box
Using the Name and ID Tab To access the Name and ID tab for user defined fields, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Your User-Defined Field. The User-Defined screen displays. 2. Select the user-defined field option you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Option Properties dialog box displays. The Name and ID tab is in focus by default:

Page 173 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields ID - This is the ID of the option. Name - This is the name of the user-defined field option. Comment - This is a description of the user-defined field option. Enable preventive or corrective maintenance on this item - Check this box to make this option available for preventive maintenance. Remove from active list - Check this box to disable this option. Custom Fields - These are fields created for this screen. Using the History Tab To access the History tab for user defined fields, follow the steps below: 1. Click View > Your User-Defined Field. The User-Defined screen displays. 2. Select the user-defined field option you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Option Properties dialog box displays. 4. Click the History tab. The History tab displays:

Week-To-Date - Enter an amount limit for week-to-date. Month-To-Date - Enter an amount limit for month-to-date. Year-To-Date - Enter an amount limit for year-to-date. Page 174 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields

Using the User Defined Fields Screen

To access the screen of your user-defined field, follow the steps below: Click Home > Your User-Defined Field. The User-Defined screen displays:

NOTE: In the above screenshot, the example user-defined field is called "Shift." You user-defined field may be different. The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to create a new user-defined field. Click here to access the properties of the selected user-defined field. Click here to delete the selected user-defined field.

Page 175 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields Click here to access data warehouse data. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode. Column Headers ID - This is the ID of the select user-defined field. Name - This is the name of the user-defined field option. Comment - This is a description of the user-defined field option. Right-Click Menu This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the UserDefined screen:

New entry... - Select this option to create a new user-defined field option. Edit properties... - Select this option to edit the properties of the selected user-defined field option. Delete... - Select this option to delete the selected user-defined field option. Rename... - Select this option to rename the selected user-defined field option. Merge... - Select this option to merge one record into another.

Creating a New User-Defined Field Option

To create a new user-defined field option, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Your User-Defined Field. The User-Defined screen displays.

Page 176 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Click New . The Option Properties dialog box displays. Enter an ID. Enter a Name. Enter any additional information. Click . The option is created.

Editing a User-Defined Field Option

To edit a user-defined field option, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Your User-Defined Field. The User-Defined screen displays. 2. Select the user-defined field option you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Option Properties dialog box displays. 4. Make any necessary changes. . The changes are saved. 5. Click

Deleting a User-Defined Field Option

To delete a user-defined field option, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Your User-Defined Field. The User-Defined screen displays. 2. Select the user-defined field option you want to delete. 3. Click Delete . The option is removed.

Understanding the Configure User-Defined Field Dialog Box

To access the Configure User-Defined Field dialog box, click System > System Options > User Defined Fields...

Field Number - Displays the UDT (User Defined Type) being edited. Page 177 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields Text Label for field on dialog - This is the text label that will display on dialog boxes that feature this field. Issue / Work Order Transactions - User Defined Fields can be used to track information for normal tool-crib issues and for work order issues. For each User Defined Field you specify how it is used for each type of transaction: Not Used - This User Defined Field is not displayed for issues Optional - This User Defined Field is displayed but the user is not required to enter information before issues are allowed. Required - This User Defined Field is displayed for this issue type and the user must enter valid information before issuing items. Trigger character for bar code scanning - On the bar code reports, CribMaster puts /Letter in front of the ID so it can tell which table the ID is from. You need to assign a unique letter to each category if you plan to use the bar code reports for scanning. Letters that are preassigned by CribMaster: /B Crib Bin Number /E Employee /I Item Number /L Lot Number /P Purchase Order Number - Invokes receiving if not receiving /Q Quantity /S Serial Number /V Supplier Number /W Work Order Number Database - Use these options to define if and how the UDF is used with the database. Field contents are maintained in database table - Items that use a database require that you enter the items in a database table and select from the entries at issue time. When a database is not used, the data is entered at issue time and is not required to match any other data. . NOTE: Without a database, the entries will not be consistent. NOTE: If you specify that field contents be maintained in a database table, then you must enter the valid choices for this UDT in the table that you specify. Table Name - When you use a database with an item, you are given the option to select the table associated with it. Normally Page 178 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields each item is assigned its own table and you use User1 for item 1 and User 6 for item 6. You may however reuse a table so you may store two or more associations with each transaction. Examples: If you want to track employees picking up items as well as employees the items are assigned to, you can use one of the user fields to be Courier. Assign the item to the employee table and the crib attendant will select a courier from the employees table each time items are issues. (Of course you can make it an optional field by making required = NO.) You might want to track a second department for each item but you only want to maintain one department list. Select one of the user items to be department. Select a second user item to be department2 and associate it with the table used with the user item you choose for department. Restrict inventory items to be issued for this field - This option activates the restricted item support for this UDT (user defined type). If you select this option for a UDT, there will be an additional tab on the property dialog for this UDT where you indicate which inventory items are assigned to each item in the table for this UDT. Note that you may not see this tab if you have not been granted access to it by the system administrator. This option allows you to assign inventory items for this UDT. You may do this as a way to make finding items easier. The Crib Attendant can look at the assigned items or look at the entire list by using the assigned items button on the toolbar. Unless you check the next option (Do not allow unrestricted inventory items) below, this set of assigned items is optional at issue time. Do not allow unrestricted inventory items to be issued for this field - This is used with restricted UDFs (see the above option) to specify that only inventory items that have been assigned to an entry may be issued. If you enable this option, the "Restricted Items" button on the Issue Screen Toolbar will always be depressed so that unrestricted inventory items cannot be issued for this UDT. When this option is not used, the Crib Attendant may use the "Restricted Items" button on the Issue Screen Toolbar to toggle the items available from showing only inventory items assigned or inventory items assigned plus all unrestricted inventory items. Page 179 of 525

Working with User Defined Fields

TIP: There is a similar option that applies to only one item in the UDT instead of the entire UDT. Menu Item text (for record list and reporting functions) - This is used to label the category in several places throughout the system including the issue screen and reporting dialogs and reports. Examples: Department, Job, and Company. TIP: Use a descriptive label for the category however do not make it too long or it may be truncated in some places. Dynamic Filtering - Use these options to define dynamic filtering. Enable dynamic filtering for this field - Check this box to have the User defined field be dependant on other UDFs. Database table for generating dynamic filter - Select the database table that the user defined field is dependant on.

Page 180 of 525

Working with Employee Records

Chapter 7: Working with Employee

Records
The list of employees displays the Employee ID, Last Name, and First Name, Badge, Supervisor, and default values for User Defined Fields (i.e. Department, Cell, Machine, and Job). The list can be sorted by any one of these columns by clicking on the corresponding column heading. The first click will sort in ascending order. The next click will sort in descending order. The columns can be searched by clicking with the right mouse button on the corresponding column heading. This will change the column heading to a search box. As text is entered in the search box, the list will highlight the first matching record.

Using the Name and ID Tab

To access the Name and ID tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Employee. The Employee Records screen displays. 2. Select the employee you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Employee Properties dialog box displays. The Name and ID tab is in focus by default:

Page 181 of 525

Working with Employee Records

Employee ID - Enter the Employee ID that you want to associate with this entry. NOTE: This ID may include alpha and numeric characters and be up to 12 characters long. First Name - Enter the first name of the employee. Last Name - Enter the last name of the employee. NOTE: The first and last names of the employees will display in all employee lookup screens and employee reports. Start Time - Enter the start time of this employee's shift (Optional). End Time - Enter the end time of this employee's shift (Optional). NOTE: Once these times are entered, this employee will only be able to check out items between the start and end time. This feature should be used to limit employees access to items to when they are on the job (Vending devices only). Labor Rate - Enter the hourly cost of labor for the employee (Optional). NOTE: This field is used for informational purposes only. Password - Enter the personal password for this employee. NOTE: If encryption is enabled, the password will display asterisks. Expiration - The password expiration date can be specified in this field. NOTE: This field will automatically populate if the crib option is set with a default password expiration interval time period. Expire Password Immediately - If selected, the user will be prompted to set up a new password immediately after attempting to log on. NOTE: This field will automatically populate if the crib option is set to expire the password immediately if changed by another user.

Page 182 of 525

Working with Employee Records Badge Number - Enter the Badge Number that you want to associate with this entry (if it is different from the employee ID). Email Address - Enter the work e-mail address of the employee (Optional). Supervisor - Enter the ID of the employee's supervisor (Optional). Supervisor Lookup - Click this button to locate and select the supervisor for this employee. P.O. Approval - Enter the P.O. Approval limit threshold. NOTE: If specified, the employee can approve POs only up to the specified dollar amount (with specified permissions). External Supplier Access Only (This user cannot login to the standard CribMaster) - This check box is used with additional CMSupply software distributed prior to CribMaster version 7.0. NOTE: The Employee ID must be the same as the Supplier ID. NOTE: In CMVend.ini add the entry UseSupplierFilter=1 in the [CRIB] section. Foreign Object Debris (FOD) Control Level - Set this level to allow CheckOut records and special tracking for F.O.D Expendable and Returnable items issued to FOD Employees: None - This is no FOD limitations. FOD - This is basic FOD limitations. FOD Restricted - With this setting, the employee cannot be selected on the Issue Screen if the current crib assignment of the workstation isnt in their list. Inactive Employee - Check this box to make the employee inactive, therefore prohibiting access. Custom Fields - These are user-defined fields set up for employees. Working with Employee Pictures CribMaster supports bitmap format pictures. It looks for a file having the Employee Number as its name with the extension of .BMP in the Image directory for employees. The Image directory is in the Data directory and is named database.img. Under the Image directory is a directory named Inventory for item pictures and a directory named Employee for employee pictures. Example: the employee picture for employee number 1234567890 will be a bitmap file named C:\Program Files\CribMast\Data\CribMstr.Img\Employee\1234567890.bmp Page 183 of 525

Working with Employee Records

Using the Defaults Tab

This screen is used to enter any User Defined default information that may be used when items are issued to this asset/employee. The information you enter on this screen is loaded into their respective fields on the Issue Item screen each time you select this employee/asset. This tab also allows you to default all of the redundant information each time the employee/asset is selected. You may enter any combination you want. Only those fields that have an entry will default. Remember that although the fields may default, each may be overridden.

Page 184 of 525

Working with Employee Records

Using the History Tab

To access the History tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Employee. The Employee Records screen displays. 2. Double-click the employee you want to edit. The Employee Properties dialog box displays. 3. Click the History tab. The History tab displays:

Totals - Week-To-Date - This is an accumulation of all items that this cell has used this week. Totals - Month-To-Date - This is an accumulation of all items that this employee has checked out this month. Totals - Year-To-Date - This is an accumulation of all items that this employee has checked out this year. Red Flag Amounts - If the Total amount exceeds the Red Flag amount for any of the time periods, an entry will appear on the Red Flag report. Last Year - At the end of each year, the Year-To-Date figure is stored in the Last Year field and the Year-To-Date field is cleared for the new year.

Page 185 of 525

Working with Employee Records

Using the Access Tab

The Access tab is used to assign the security levels for your employees. It allows you to set access to the CribMaster System and item access for each employee. To access the Access tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Employee. The Employee Records screen displays. 2. Select the employee you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Employee Properties dialog box displays. 4. Click Access. The Access tab displays:

Page 186 of 525

Working with Employee Records The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Access Tab:
Icon Function

Click this button to reset the selected employee's permissions:

Item Access Codes Primary Crib Groups Non-Primary Crib Groups Primary Crib Permissions Non-Primary Crib Permissions

Click this button to copy permissions from another employee:

1. Click Lookup to select an employee from which to copy permissions. 2. Select the appropriate options. 3. Click OK.

Name - This is the joined First Name and Last Name fields from the Name and ID tab. Primary Crib Privileges - This list shows the CribMaster security groups. Select the security groups for this employee by checking the box or boxes next to each group granted to the employee. TIP: These groups are entered on the Security Access Codes dialog box. View Non-Primary Privileges - Check this box to toggle the view between primary and non-primary privileges.

Page 187 of 525

Working with Employee Records NOTE: This option is only available if the option "Enable separate security privileges for primary and non-primary cribs" is selected on the Options > Configuration tab. NOTE: When a permission is granted for a primary crib, the selected user can perform that function at the primary crib. However, the user must have the non-primary permission explicitly granted to them to perform the function at a nonprimary crib. When a non-primary permission is granted, the user can perform that function at any crib, even at a primary crib where the primary permission is explicitly denied. Permissions granted for non-primary cribs will always override permissions denied for a primary crib. Id - This is the database identifier of the security access code. Code - This is the security code itself. Description - This is a field that describes the security access code. Item Access - This list shows the item access codes. Select codes for each employee by checking the box next to each access group. TIP: These groups are entered on the Item Access Codes dialog box. TIP: For more information on Item Access, see Understanding Item Access Codes. Access - This is the access code. Description - This is a field that describes the access code. The Permissions List The list at the bottom of the tab displays all of the permissions in the system with check marks for the permissions granted to the employee by virtue of belonging to groups. To grant additional permissions to the employee's group, click the box under Grant next to the permission. To deny permissions from the employee's group, click the box under Deny next to the permission. To grant or deny a permission for just the selected employee rather than the entire group, click the Grant or Deny check box until the individual icon displays. Page 188 of 525

Working with Employee Records

Permission Examples NOTE: For permissions that are comma-separated, when an employee has any one of the permissions, they have access to that screen. adjust = "Transaction:Stock Adjustments,Cycle Counting:Adjust Bins"; transfer = "Transfers:Transfer Items,Transfers:Complete Transfers"; assign = "Database Utilities:RFID Definitions"; count = "Cycle Counting:Schedule Bins,Cycle Counting:Count Bins"; receive = "Purchasing:Receive Inventory"; Crib Permissions in ATR ATR9 will filter out any employees that do not have permission to issue from at least one local crib. This means that an employee must have issue permissions for at least one local crib in order for that employee to log into the instance of ATR9 for any reason. The following employees are excluded:

Employees who have primary access to any of the local cribs but do not have primary or non-primary issue permissions (Transaction/Issue Items). Employees who do not have primary access to any of the local cribs and do not have non-primary issue permissions (Transaction/Issue Items).

NOTE: Both Enable separate security privileges for primary and nonprimary cribs and Also require transaction privileges for CribMaster ATR (vending equipment) must be enabled on the Configuration tab of System Options.

Page 189 of 525

Working with Employee Records

Using the Login History Tab

The Login History tab displays a log of when the selected employee logged into CribMaster. In order to see this tab, user login auditing must be enabled under CribMaster Options > Configuration > Login Options. To access the Login History tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Employee. The Employee Records screen displays. 2. Select the employee you want to edit. . The Employee Properties dialog box 3. Click Properties displays. 4. Click the Login History tab. The Login History tab displays.

Page 190 of 525

Working with Employee Records Login Options\Attributes - These options are used to better define the employee's login options. Employee Login Disabled - Check this box to prevent this employee from logging in. This option may be checked automatically. Group Account - Check this box to prevent the selected employee from logging through CmProxy for mobile devices. Last Login Activity Date - This field displays the last day and time this user logged in. Windows User Name - This is the Windows user name of the employee. Column Headings No - This is the database identifier for this line item. Empl ID - This is the employee ID for the selected employee. Name - This is the joined First Name and Last Name fields from the Name and ID tab. Login Event - This is the type of action that took place when the user logged in. Date - This is the date that the login event took place. Application - This field specifies the application used to log into the database. Application Version - This field specifies the version of the application used to log into the database. Password - If the password changes, it is displayed here. IP Address - This is the IP address of the employee's computer. MAC Address - This is the MAC address of the employee's computer. Terminal ID - This is the identification of the workstation used to log into the system. Comment - This column contains any additional information about the login entry.

Page 191 of 525

Working with Employee Records

Using the Security History Tab

To access the Security History tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Employee. The Employee Records screen displays. 2. Select the employee you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Employee Properties dialog box displays. 4. Click the Security History tab. The Security History tab displays:

Name - This is the joined First Name and Last Name fields from the Name and ID tab. Column Headers Action - This is the action taken by the employee. Description1 - This is a description of the security access code. Description2 - This is a further description of the security access code. Page 192 of 525

Working with Employee Records Scope - Shows the changes to security. Date - This is the date the action took place. Employee - This is the ID of the employee who performed the action. Name - This is the name of the employee who performed the action. No. - This is the database identifier for this item.

Using the Craft Codes Tab

To access the Craft Codes tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Employee. The Employee Records screen displays. 2. Select the employee you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Employee Properties dialog box displays. 4. Click the Craft Codes tab. The Craft Codes tab displays:

Name - This is the joined First Name and Last Name fields from the Name and ID tab. Page 193 of 525

Working with Employee Records Column Headings Code - This is the craft code. Description - This is a description of the craft code. Rate - This is the rate at which an employee, assigned the selected craft code, will work.

Using the Employee Records Screen

To access the Employee Records screen, click Employee. The Employee Records screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Employee Records screen: Icon Function Click this button to create a new employee. Click this button to access the properties of the selected employee. Click this button to delete the selected employee. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Page 194 of 525

Working with Employee Records

Column Headers
TIP: You can search these columns for specific values. Empl. ID - This is the ID of the selected employee. Last - This is the last name of the selected employee. First - This is the first name of the selected employee. Badge - This is the badge number of the selected employee (if applicable). Supervisor - This is the name of the supervisor of the selected employee.

The Right-Click Menu

To access this menu, right-click on the Employee Records screen:

New entry... - Select this option to add a new employee. Edit properties... - Select this option to access the properties dialog box for the selected employee. Delete... - Select this option to remove the selected employee. NOTE: You cannot delete an employee with checkout records. Rename... - Select this option to rename the selected employee ID. Merge... - Select this option to merge the selected employee into another. Print Checked Out Item Report... - Select this option to send a Checked Out report to your default printer. The report displays a list of items the employee currently has checked out. Assign RFID Tag to Employee... - Select this option to Assign an RFID tag to the selected employee.

Page 195 of 525

Page 196 of 525

Working with Suppliers

Chapter 8: Working with Suppliers

Creating a New Supplier Record
To create a new supplier record, follow the steps below: 1. Click Supplier. The Supplier Records screen displays. . The Supplier Properties pane displays. 2. Click New 3. Enter or accept the Supplier ID. 4. Enter a Supplier Name. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Click Properties . On the Address Information tab, enter the address. Enter contact information. Enter any additional information. . CribMaster adds the supplier to the list. Click

Editing a Supplier Record

To edit a supplier record, follow the steps below: 1. Click Supplier. The Supplier Records screen displays. 2. Select the supplier you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Supplier Properties dialog box displays. 4. Make any necessary changes. 5. Click OK. The changes are saved.

Deleting a Supplier Record

To delete a supplier record, follow the steps below: 1. Click Supplier. The Supplier Records screen displays. 2. Select the supplier you want to delete. 3. Click Delete . CribMaster deletes the supplier.

NOTE: Suppliers that are associated with active purchase orders cannot be deleted.

Page 197 of 525

Working with Suppliers

Using the Address Information Tab

To access the Address Information tab: 1. Click Supplier. The Supplier Records screen displays. 2. Select a supplier record. . The Supplier Properties dialog box 3. Click Properties displays. The Address Information tab is in focus by default:

Supplier ID - Enter a unique supplier ID. Remove from active list - Check this box to disable this supplier in the system and prevent users from selecting it for items. Supplier Name - Enter the name of the supplier. These names will appear in all the Supplier lookup screens, supplier reports and purchase orders. Address 1 - Enter the accounts payable address for this vender. NOTE: This address appears on new Purchase Orders for this Supplier. TIP: You can override the address on individual Purchase Orders whenever you like. Page 198 of 525

Working with Suppliers

Address 2 - Enter any additional address details. City, State, Zip - Enter city, state and zip code for the supplier. Phone Numbers / Contact Information - This is section is for information on contacting the supplier. Phone - Enter the phone number for this supplier. NOTE: This phone entry is used for information purposes only. Fax Phone - Enter the fax number for this supplier. NOTE: Fax number is used when Purchase Orders are faxed to the suppliers and the EDI Number is used for EDI Transactions. TIP: You may specify the Recipient of a fax by appending colon, Recipient name to the fax number. For example: 1 (770) 4191968:WinWare Customer Support. EDI EMail - The Email address for this Supplier. NOTE: This is used if you specify Email as the delivery method for POs. EMail Add - This is the supplier's email address. NOTE: You can change the format of the file format of attached POs by including a format specifier. Alert Email - Enter the email address used for Critical Quantity alerts. NOTE: If this address is omitted, CribMaster will send the alert to the normal e-mail address for the supplier. NOTE: An alternate e-mail address may have been entered at the Crib Level which will be used instead of sending alerts to the supplier. Home Page - Enter the suppliers home page. Catalog Page - Enter the URL of the suppliers ordering web page. Comment - Enter any additional information in this field. NOTE: The above field displays on the Supplier Information Report.

Page 199 of 525

Working with Suppliers

Using the Purchasing Info Tab

To access the Purchasing Info tab: 1. Click Supplier. The Supplier Records screen displays. 2. Select a supplier record. 3. Click Properties . The Supplier Properties dialog box displays. 4. Click the Purchasing Info tab. The Purchasing Info tab displays:

Supplier Name - This is the supplier name from the Address Information tab. Information - These fields are general information about the supplier.

Page 200 of 525

Working with Suppliers Terms and Conditions - Enter any need-to-know information here. NOTE: This is for informational purposes. NOTE: This will display on PO's. Minimum Dollar Order - When using automatic purchasing, orders will not be produced for this supplier until the total amount of an order is greater than or equal to this amount. Items that need to be ordered will still appear on the purchase authorization dialog and you can manually produce orders whenever you like. NOTE: This can be overridden on the individual PO. Shipping Instructions - These fields contain information related to shipping. PO Number prefix - Optional blanket PO Number from this supplier. If supplied, it will appear in the Supplier Purchase Order box on Purchase Orders generated for this supplier. Release # - Enter the optional blanket PO Release Number from this supplier. NOTE: This is a number that is incremented each time a Purchase Order is generated for this supplier. It will appear in the Supplier Purchase Order box on Purchase Orders generated for this supplier. NOTE: If a blanket PO Number is also supplied in the field above, this number is appended to the blanket PO Number to generate the Supplier Purchase Order number placed on Purchase Orders for this supplier. You may manually change the number any time you like on the Purchasing Info tab of the Supplier properties. Date Required - Enter the amount of time by which you need orders to be received. For example, ASAP. Shipping - Enter any special shipping instructions in this field. NOTE: This appears on new Purchase Orders and can be changed manually on the Purchase Order. Comment - Enter any additional information in this field. AutoPurchase Order Method - Select the way orders are processed via autopurchase for this supplier. Print - Select this option to print out purchase orders. Page 201 of 525

Working with Suppliers EDI - Select this option to create an EDI file. Fax - Select this option to have orders sent automatically via fax. NOTE: This requires an additional fax application. See Using Winfax SE. EMail - Select this option to have orders sent automatically via e-mail. No Auto Delivery - Select this option to opt out of auto delivery. Days - Select the days that you wish AutoPurchase to run for this supplier. NOTE: The default for this field is All Days. Prophet 21 - If your company uses Prophet 21, enter the information in these fields. Use Prophet 21 XML Interface - Check this box to enable the Prophet 21 interface. NOTE: Additional setup is required for P21 exchange. Trading Partner Name - Enter your trading partner name in this field. PO Printer - Select a printer to send purchase orders. Build Time for Minimum Dollar Order - This section contains a computation of the average build times for the Purchase Orders used. NOTE: The number of Purchase Orders to be used is specified on the Options Ordering tab. Avg. Build Time Computed - This is a computed number that is displayed here for informational purposes. The build time for each Purchase Order is the number of days since the last Purchase Order for this supplier. Build Time is always computed and saved by Supplier. If this field is blank, the ordering system will use the Default Build Time specified on the Options Ordering Tab. Override - Enter an Average Build Time for this Supplier only. The computed Average Build Time is displayed for informational purposes even when the Override is filled. The ordering system will use the override when computing Average Lead Time. Custom Fields - These are customized fields set up for suppliers.

Using the Blanket PO Tab

The Blanket PO tab provides access to all Blanket POs for the given supplier. Page 202 of 525

Working with Suppliers

To access the Purchasing Info tab, follow the steps below: 1. Click Supplier. The Supplier Records screen displays. 2. Select a supplier record. . The Supplier Properties dialog box 3. Click Properties displays. 4. Click the Blanket PO tab. The Blanket PO tab displays:

Supplier Name - This is the supplier name from the Address Information tab. Blanket Order Number - Expand the drop-down to select a blanket order number. NOTE: If items are not ordered using a Blanket PO, None displays for this field. Add Blanket Order - Click this button to add a new blanket order. Delete Blanket Order - Click this button to remove the selected blanket order.

Page 203 of 525

Working with Suppliers Copy Blanket Order - Click this button to copy the selected blanket order. Expiration Date - This is the date the select PO is set to expire. NOTE: If you change the expiration date, you will be prompted via a dialog box when you save your changes to do one of the following: Only update blanket items with matching expiration dates. Update expiration dates for all blanket items Do not update any blanket item expiration dates. Remove from active list - Check this box to disable the selected blanket order. Add Item - Click this button to add items to the blanket order. Edit Item - Click this button access the inventory properties of the selected item. Remove Blanket items - Click this button to add or remove items to or from the blanket order. NOTE: The Inventory Properties dialog box displays with the Suppliers tab in focus. Blanket Order Items - This is a list of items included in the blanket purchase order. Custom Fields - These are customized fields set up for blanket PO's.

Column Headings
Item Number - This is the number of the inventory item. Supplier Item # - This is the number of the item as assigned by the supplier. Expiration Date - This is the date the select PO is set to expire. Description1 - This is a description of the item. Description2 - This is a description of the item. Cost - This is the cost of the item. Min Order - This is the minimum amount of units that must be ordered at one time. Case Size - This is the amount of purchasing units. No. - This is the database identifier for this item.

Page 204 of 525

Working with Suppliers

Using the Supplier Records Screen

To access the Supplier Records Screen, click Supplier.

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Supplier Records screen: Icon Function Click this button to create a new supplier. Click this button to access the properties of the selected supplier. Click this button to delete the selected supplier. Click this button to access Online Help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Page 205 of 525

Working with Suppliers

Column Headers
TIP: You can search these columns for specific values. Supplier - This is the supplier ID. Supplier Name - This is the full name of the supplier. Phone - This is the contact or sales number for the supplier. Fax - This is the number where fax orders can be sent. Comment - This is a space for any additional information regarding the supplier.

The Right-Click Menu

To access this menu, right-click on the Supplier Records screen:

New entry... - Select this option to add a new supplier. Edit properties... - Select this option to access the Properties dialog box for the selected supplier. Delete... - Select this option to remove the selected supplier. Rename... - Select this option to rename the selected supplier. Merge... - Select this option to merge the selected supplier into another.

Page 206 of 525

Working with Kits

Chapter 9: Working with Kits

Understanding Kits
A kit is a combination of multiple items that are grouped together into a bill of material for a particular job or function. Understanding Unassembled Kits Unassembled kits are kits where the components are kept in separate bins.

Understanding Assembled Kits Assembled kits are kits where the components are physically grouped together in the crib.

Page 207 of 525

Working with Kits

Merging Kit Components

This feature allows you to add the component list of one kit to another kit without changing the component list of the source kit (or deleting the source kit). To merge components from one kit to another, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Right-click the kit from which you want to merge components. 3. Select Merge Kit Components. The Merge Kit Components dialog box displays. 4. Select a destination kit. 5. Enter any additional information or settings. 6. Click OK. The components are merged.

Understanding the Merge Kit Components Dialog Box

To access the Merge Kit Components dialog box, follow the directions below: 1. Click Item. The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Right-click the kit from which you want to merge components. 3. Select Merge Kit Components... The Merge Kit Components dialog box displays. Source - Enter the origination kit item ID. Destination - Enter the destination kit item ID. Inactivate source item after merging components - Check this box to have the source kit removed from the active list. Inactive items will not generate ordering requirements. New instances of it can no longer be assembled, and its kit definition cannot be changed when a kit item is inactive. Create XREF relationship between source and destination item - Check this box to have the user prompted for the relationship properties after the merge operation is completed. The default relationship type will be a new standard relationship type "Replaced By."

Page 208 of 525

Working with Kits Merge Options For Duplicate Components - These settings are for merge instances where one or more of the components are the same in both kits. No duplicate component items to merge - This selection is the default for kits that do not contain duplicate items. Add duplicate component quantity from source to destination kit component quantity - Select this option to merge the duplicate component quantities and components of the source into the destination kit Add duplicate component quantity only if insufficient quantity in destination kit - Select this option to increase quantities by the difference of the source kit quantity only if the source kit quantity is greater than the destination kit quantity. Create Separate kit component items in destination for each duplicate (not recommended) - Select this option to list each duplicate component separately. Skip components in source which have duplicate component in destination Select this option to skip merging of duplicate components.

Page 209 of 525

Working with Kits

Using the Kit Tab

To access the Kit tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. The Inventory Properties pane displays the information in the right-most pane. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. NOTE: If the Item Properties pane is not visible, click Properties .

3. Click Kit. The Kit tab displays:

NOTE: This tab is only available if the Kit is selected as the Item Type on the Item Information tab. Item Description - This is the item description from the Item Information tab. Page 210 of 525

Working with Kits The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click this button to access the properties of the selected item. Click this button to access the Kit Component Properties. Click this button to add an item to the kit. Click this button to remove an item from the kit. Click this button to move the selected item up in the list. Click this button to move the selected item down in the list. Click this button to assemble the kit. Click this button to access the User Defined Extensions tab. Item Number - This is the number of the individual item. Qty - This is the number of units in the kit. Description - This is the description of the individual item. Kit Description - This is the description of the overall kit. Sequence - This states where the line item will display on a report. User Data (1-18) - This is any user-entered data for the kit. No. - This is the database identifier for this item.

Creating an Unassembled Kit

To create a new unassembled kit, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items... The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Click New Item . The Inventory Properties pane displays.

Page 211 of 525

Working with Kits 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Enter an Item Number. Select Kit as the Item Type. Enter a description of the item in the Description 1 field. Enter any additional information. Do not assign a Crib/Bin. Click . CribMaster returns to the Inventory Records screen.

NOTE: The kit will issue as multiple items.

Creating an Assembled Kit

To create a new assembled kit, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items... The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Click New Item . The Inventory Properties pane displays.

3. Enter an Item Number. 4. 5. 6. 7. Select Kit as the Type. Enter any additional information. Assign the kit a Crib/Bin. Click . CribMaster returns to the Inventory Records screen. NOTE: The kit will issue as a single unit.

Page 212 of 525

Working with Kits

Adding Items to a Kit

To add items to an existing kit, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items. The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the kit to which you want to add an item. The Inventory Properties dialog box displays the information in the right-most pane. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. NOTE: If the Item Properties pane is not visible, click Properties 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. .

Click Kit. The Kit tab displays. Select the next available line. to look up an item to add. Click Enter any additional information. Click . Repeat steps 4-7 until all of the items you want to add are added. NOTE: This will not add items to a previously assembled kit.

Removing Items from a Kit

To remove items from an existing kit, follow the directions below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items. The Inventory Records screen displays. 2. Select the kit from which you want to remove an item. The Inventory Properties dialog box displays the information in the right-most pane. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. NOTE: If the Item Properties pane is not visible, click Properties .

3. Click Kit. The Kit tab displays. 4. Click Remove Item. The item is removed. NOTE: This will not remove an item from a previously assembled kit.

Page 213 of 525

Working with Kits

Using the Inspect Kit Dialog Box

This dialog box displays when you return a kit with the option "Verify kit parts at return time" selected.

Column Headings
Kit Quantity - This is the count of this item included in each assembly. SubKit - This is the kit number of the SubKit. Item - This is the item number in the kit. Description - This is the description of the item. Qty - This is the quantity in the kit. Good Qty - This is the number of items in good condition. Qty In - This is the amount of items returned. An incoming transfer will be created for the final "Qty In" amount. Qty Out - This is the amount of items out. Parent Kit - The serial number of the parent kit. Type - The numeric code for item type 0=expendable, 1=reworkable, 2=durable, 3=gauge, 4=kit. Return Qty - Count of the item being returned in good shape. Scrap/Expend - Count of the item that is used up or needs to be scrapped. Rework Qty - Count of the item to be sent to rework. Serial ID - The serial ID of the item in the kit, if it is a serialized item. ParentID - If this is a kit within a kit, this displays the ID of the parent kit. Type - This is the item type (Expendable, Reworkable, Durable, Gauge, Kit). Kit Description - This is the kit description of the component. Certify Date - This is the last certify date, if it is a gauge. Expiration Date - This is the expiration date, if serialized. Next Calib (projected) - This is the next calibration date, if it is a gauge. Cert Interval - This is the certification interval, if it is a gauge. Interval Type - This is the interval type, if it is a gauge. Current Usage - This is the number of times the item was used, if it is a gauge. Max Usage - This is the maximum amount of times the item can be used usage, if it is a gauge.

Page 214 of 525

Working with Kits

Fields
Kit Replenishment - Use these fields to define how kit components are replenished. Good - This is the number of items in good condition. Qty Out - This is the amount of items out. An outgoing transfer will be created for the final "Qty Out" amount. NOTE: Items can be removed simply by increasing the "Qty Out" amount to reflect the item(s) to be removed. This will cause a corresponding transfer of the item(s) out of the assembly. Scrap Qty - This is the amount of items that have been scrapped. Qty In - This is the amount of items in. An incoming transfer will be created for the final "Qty In" amount. Rework - This is the amount of items sent to rework. Comment/Memo for kit replenishment transfers - If you have more than one assembly of this type in the bin, you should identify each with some name or number. Enter this name or number here and it will print it on the Transfer report for any parts needed. Assume Expendables Scrapped - Check this box to scrap all expendables. Print Replenishment Report - Check this box to cause the Replenishment report to print. You can reprint the Replenishment report later (for open items only) by right clicking on an item from the report on the Complete Transfers dialog box. NOTE: Any transfers generated are scheduled on a per kit item basis when final confirmation of the kit inventory is confirmed. NOTE: When an item is removed from an assembly, it is transferred back to a component bin from which it may be used elsewhere via a standard CribMaster transaction.

Page 215 of 525

Working with Kits

Disassembling a Kit from the Crib/Bin or Inventory Records Screen

To disassemble a kit from the Crib/Bin Records screen, follow the steps below: 1. Click Bins. The Crib/Bin Records screen displays. 2. Right-click the kit you want to disassemble. 3. Select Disassemble Kit... The Assembly Information dialog box displays: 4. Use the up and down arrows to adjust the number of kits to disassemble. 5. Click OK. The kit is disassembled. NOTE: Transfers will be generated to transfer the components from the component crib/bin to the kit crib/bin.

Page 216 of 525

Managing Transactions

Chapter 10: Managing Transactions

Issuing Items
To issue an item, follow the steps below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Actions > Issue Item. The Issue Item screen displays. Enter an Employee. Enter a Work Order (Preventive Maintenance only). Enter an answer for all user-defined fields (If applicable). TIP: For any of the three previous fields, click Lookup search for and select a record from a list. 5. Select an item from the right pane. . 6. Click Add 7. If necessary, adjust the Quantity. to

8. Click Issue

NOTE: If the item is part of a lot, the system will prompt you to make a specific item selection. Select the item and click OK. NOTE: If the user already has items checked out, a recent issue warning displays. Click OK to continue the issue. NOTE: If Allow overrides when item is issued is enabled on the Inventory properties > More tab, the system will prompt for an override time limit. NOTE: If the user has items checked out past the item due date, a dialog box listing the items checked out displays.

Page 217 of 525

Managing Transactions

Issuing a Kit
To issue a kit, follow the steps below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Actions > Issue Item... The Issue Item screen displays. Enter an Employee. Enter a Work Order. Enter a Location (Optional). . The Item Select dialog box displays:

5. Click Kit Lookup

6. Select an item. 7. Click OK. 8. Double-click the Issue Qty. 9. Enter the quantity you want to issue. 10. Click OK. The components of the kit display on the left pane of the issue item window. TIP: To view the item properties of the kit, highlight and click Properties.

Page 218 of 525

Managing Transactions

Substituting an Item on the Issue List

To add a substitute item to the issue list, follow the steps below: 1. Select the item you want to substitute.

2. Click Substitute . The Select Substitute Items dialog box displays. 3. Select an item to substitute with the original item. 4. Double-click the Issue Qty. 5. Enter a quantity. 6. Click OK. The alternate item will appear on the left pane of the issue item window. NOTE: The substitute items are set up in Item Inventory Properties XREF tab.

Page 219 of 525

Managing Transactions

Using the Issue Item Screen

To access the Issue Item screen, click Actions > Issue Item... The Issue Item screen displays:

The Issue Item window is split vertically into two sections or panes. The left pane allows for the selection of an employee (and associated user defined fields) and will list the items that have been selected for issue. The right pane lists inventory items and corresponding Crib/Bin assignments. TIP: The bar that falls between the two panes is a sizing bar. Drag it left or right to increase the size of one pane while reducing the size of the other. The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to issue the item. This creates transaction records of type ISSUE that will appear on various reports. Data in the left pane (employee and issue list) will be cleared and ready for the next Page 220 of 525

Managing Transactions transaction. NOTE: If issuing an inventory item of Gauge type, you will be prompted to identify the individual gauge. Click here to create a reservation for a later issue. Click here to print a pick list for issued items. Enter an Inventory Item ID or Serial ID in this selector box and press ENTER. This will cause an entry to appear in the left pane. The initial quantity will be one. If you repeat this action for the same inventory item, it will not add another entry to the issue list, but will increase the quantity of the original entry. This is a quick way to adjust the quantity when you are issuing just a few of an item. For larger quantities, click in the left pane on the quantity and change it using the keyboard. Click here to add a selected item from the right pane to the list of items to be issued. Click here to reset the screen. Click here to remove a selected item from the left pane. Click here to access the properties of the bin of the selected item from the right pane. Click here to view kits or issue an unassembled Kit. Click here to view suggested alternate items for the highlighted item from the right pane.

Page 221 of 525

Managing Transactions Click here to see more plant details about an inventory item. Click here to adjust the bin count of the selected item. Click here to load a reservation for which to issue items. Click here to display all cribs in the system (as opposed to just the default crib). Click here to display items from all bins, including those for which the selected employee does not have authorization. NOTE: Items that cannot be issued to the selected employee are grayed out and cannot be selected. Click here to display items from all bins, including restricted items. NOTE: This button may not be turned off when a User Defined Field with the "Do not allow unrestricted Inventory Items to be issued for this field" is specified in one of the User Defined Field categories on the options screen. The button acts differently when restricted UDFs are entered on the screen. With restricted UDFs and button pressed, only inventory items assigned to all restricted UDFs are displayed. Click here to display only items that have been issued in the past thirty days to the employee. TIP: The time limit for recently issued items can be adjusted on the Crib Options Configuration tab.

Page 222 of 525

Managing Transactions Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search.

Column Headers
Item - This is the item number for the selected item. Qty - This is the number of items in the bin. Group - This is the inventory group. Description - This is the description field from the Item Information tab. Crib/Bin - This is the crib/bin where the item resides. On Order - This is the number of items currently on order. Pending - This is the number of items that are pending rework. Access - This is the access code. Description2 - This is additional information regarding the selected item. Bin Comment - This is the comment field from the Bin Information tab. Inv Comment - This is the comment field from the Item Information tab. Mfr# - This field displays the number of the manufacturer of the item (if applicable). Manufacturer - This is the company that created the item. Stop Issue - If Stop Issue is selected on the Bin Information tab, this field will display "Yes." Unit of Measure (Issue) - This is the way the item is issued (box, carton, etc.). C.N.S. # - This is the common item number (if applicable).

Page 223 of 525

Managing Transactions

Right-Click Menu
This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the Issue Item screen (right pane): New Bin - Select this option to create a new bin. Bin Properties - Select this option to edit the properties of the selected bin. Delete Bin - Select this option to remove the selected bin from the system. Rename - Select this option to change the name of the selected bin. Examine Item - Select this option to examine the selected item. Print Bin Label - Select this option to print a barcode label for the bin. Inventory Item Properties - Select this option to access the properties of the item associated with the selected bin. Examine Item... - Select this option to examine the selected item. Show Item Location(s) - Select this option to display the Show Item Location dialog box for the selected item. Record Out of Stock - Select this option to create a record indicating a request for an Out Of Stock item. This information will appear on the stock out report. Adjust Bin Count - Select this option to increase or decrease the bin count. Verify Bin Count - Select this option to verify the bin count. The last counted date will be updated and the bin will skip to the next inventory cycle. Purge Bin - Select this option to remove all inventories from the Page 224 of 525

Managing Transactions selected bin. Retrieve Bin - Select this option to pull the bin for counting or inventory purposes. NOTE: For use with the CMAX supported dispenser. Transfer Items - Select this option to transfer items from one bin to another. Transfer to Different Item - Select this option to transfer non-serialized items from one bin to another bin and merge the inventory. Bin to Pending Rework - Select this option to send a reworkable item type to a rework bin. The item will appear as pending rework and will not be available for issue until it is returned from rework. Pending Rework Back to Bin - Select this option to return reworkable type items from pending rework back to the bin. Bin to Scrap - Select this option to scrap non-serialized items and make them unavailable for issue. Pending to Scrap - Select this option to scrap reworkable type items from pending rework Assemble Kit - Select this option to assemble all the components of a kit type item. Transfers will be generated to transfer the components from the component crib/bin to the kit crib/bin. Disassemble Kit - Select this option to un-assemble or disassemble an assembled kit. Transfers will be generated to transfer the components from the kit crib/bin to the individual component crib/bin. Inspect Kit - Select this option to inspect the components of an assembled kit. Components can be transferred in, scrapped, or transferred out from the inspect kit screen. Transfers will be generated for the components. Assign RFID Tag to CribBin - Select this option to assign a RFID to the selected Crib/Bin. Unassign Single CribBin RFID Tag... - Select this option to unassign an RFID tag from a CribBin. Page 225 of 525

Managing Transactions

Returning an Item
NOTE: The process for returning an expendable item is different than the following steps. Scroll further down to view the steps on returning expendable items. To return an item, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Return Item... The Return Item screen displays. 2. Enter an Employee (Optional). 3. Enter a Serial ID (Optional). TIP: For any of the two previous fields, click Lookup for and select a record from a list. 4. Select an item to return. 5. Click Return . 6. Adjust the Quantity if necessary. NOTE: The quantity must be the same or less than the quantity checked out. to search

7. Click Process

. The item is returned.

NOTE: If you return an item with usage tracking activated, you will be prompted to enter the number of times it was used. NOTE: If you return a kit, the Inspect Kit dialog box displays. NOTE: If you select Scrap, you will be asked to confirm that the item is indeed to be scrapped. NOTE: If you select To Rework, the item will be recorded as waiting for rework. NOTE: If you select Return Items, all quantities in the "Qty In" column will be marked as returned. The quantities in the checkout

Page 226 of 525

Managing Transactions record will be reduced, and the quantities in the Bin record will be increased. NOTE: FOD items may require an employee bar code scan. NOTE: Serialized items may require a transfer or return to home crib.

Returning an Expendable Item

To return an expendable item, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Return Item... The Return Item screen displays. 2. Enter an Employee (required). 3. Enter a Serial ID (if applicable). TIP: For any of the four previous fields, click Lookup for and select a record from a list. 4. Select an expendable item to return. NOTE: The list displays the current quantity of items in the bin as opposed to items checked out. to search

. 5. Click Return 6. Adjust the Quantity if necessary. NOTE: The quantity must be the same or less than the quantity checked out. 7. Enter a quantity to return. NOTE: The quantity must be the same or less than the quantity checked out.

8. Click Return

. The item is returned.

Page 227 of 525

Managing Transactions

Using the Inspect Kit Dialog Box

This dialog box displays when you return a kit with the option "Verify kit parts at return time" selected.

Column Headings
Kit Quantity - This is the count of this item included in each assembly. SubKit - This is the kit number of the SubKit. Item - This is the item number in the kit. Description - This is the description of the item. Qty - This is the quantity in the kit. Good Qty - This is the number of items in good condition. Qty In - This is the amount of items returned. An incoming transfer will be created for the final "Qty In" amount. Qty Out - This is the amount of items out. Parent Kit - The serial number of the parent kit. Type - The numeric code for item type 0=expendable, 1=reworkable, 2=durable, 3=gauge, 4=kit. Return Qty - Count of the item being returned in good shape. Scrap/Expend - Count of the item that is used up or needs to be scrapped. Rework Qty - Count of the item to be sent to rework. Serial ID - The serial ID of the item in the kit, if it is a serialized item. ParentID - If this is a kit within a kit, this displays the ID of the parent kit. Type - This is the item type (Expendable, Reworkable, Durable, Gauge, Kit). Kit Description - This is the kit description of the component. Certify Date - This is the last certify date, if it is a gauge. Expiration Date - This is the expiration date, if serialized. Next Calib (projected) - This is the next calibration date, if it is a gauge. Cert Interval - This is the certification interval, if it is a gauge. Interval Type - This is the interval type, if it is a gauge. Current Usage - This is the number of times the item was used, if it is a gauge. Max Usage - This is the maximum amount of times the item can be used usage, if it is a gauge.

Page 228 of 525

Managing Transactions

Fields
Kit Replenishment - Use these fields to define how kit components are replenished. Good - This is the number of items in good condition. Qty Out - This is the amount of items out. An outgoing transfer will be created for the final "Qty Out" amount. NOTE: Items can be removed simply by increasing the "Qty Out" amount to reflect the item(s) to be removed. This will cause a corresponding transfer of the item(s) out of the assembly. Scrap Qty - This is the amount of items that have been scrapped. Qty In - This is the amount of items in. An incoming transfer will be created for the final "Qty In" amount. Rework - This is the amount of items sent to rework. Comment/Memo for kit replenishment transfers - If you have more than one assembly of this type in the bin, you should identify each with some name or number. Enter this name or number here and it will print it on the Transfer report for any parts needed. Assume Expendables Scrapped - Check this box to scrap all expendables. Print Replenishment Report - Check this box to cause the Replenishment report to print. You can reprint the Replenishment report later (for open items only) by right clicking on an item from the report on the Complete Transfers dialog box. NOTE: Any transfers generated are scheduled on a per kit item basis when final confirmation of the kit inventory is confirmed. NOTE: When an item is removed from an assembly, it is transferred back to a component bin from which it may be used elsewhere via a standard CribMaster transaction.

Page 229 of 525

Managing Transactions

Using the Return Item Screen

To access the Return Item dialog box, follow the steps below: Click Actions > Return Item... The Return Item screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to process the return. Click here to return the selected item to its original crib/bin. Click here to create a scrap transaction. NOTE: Item should not be returned to crib/bin. . NOTE: This function cannot be used for gauges. Click here to return a serialized item to its bin and place it in "repair" status (by default).

Page 230 of 525

Managing Transactions Click here to return a reworkable item to pending rework. NOTE: Rework bin must be associated with an item. Click here to return the selected gauge to its bin and place it in "In Calibration" status. Click here to return a serialized item to its bin and place it in "Unusable" status. Click here to return an item as new. Click here to clear all your changes and start from scratch. Click here to select all items to return.

Employee ID - This is the employee to which the item was issued. Serial ID - This is the serial ID of the item to be returned.

Stacked Fields
Notice the stacked field headers in the right pane:

The top portion in gray acts as a key to what the fields in blue are. For example (using the above screenshot): Action = ReturnIt

Page 231 of 525

Managing Transactions

Column Headers
Qty Out - This is the quantity originally issued less any quantity which has been returned. Qty In - This will be blank until you indicate a quantity to be returned, scrapped, or reworked. Item - This is the Inventory Item ID. Description - This is the short description corresponding to the Inventory Item ID. Employee Name - This is the employee name to which the item was originally issued. Bin - This is the Crib/Bin from which the item was originally issued. Date - This is the data the item was issued. Serial ID - If the item is a serialized item (gauge or serialized durable), this is its ID Serial Number - This applies only to serialized items. This will help you find the right gauge. Alt Scan Code - This applies to serialized items only. Sites - This is the purchasing site. Lot Number - If you are using lot numbers to track items, the lot number displays here. Type - This is the numeric item type. Description2 - This is additional information regarding the selected item. Date Due - If you are using checkout time limits, this is the date the item is due back. FOD - If you are using FOD control. FOD items require employee ID to be entered or scanned before returning. No. - This is the database identifier for the select item.

Page 232 of 525

Managing Transactions

Using the Show Item Location Dialog Box

The Show Item Location dialog box is useful for finding out what bins an item is associated with, quantities in the bin, and information pertaining to current orders and ordering needs. To access the Show Item Location dialog box, click Actions > Find Item. The Show Item Location dialog box displays:

To show an item's location, follow the steps below: 1. Type an inventory item number in the Item field or select it from the list by clicking the browse button ( ). 2. Press Tab. The results display. TIP: To view more information about a displayed Purchase Order, right-click the entry for a context menu. The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click this button to retrieve the latest information from the database.

Page 233 of 525

Managing Transactions Click this button to print the results. Click this button to see what the printed results would look like, make formatting changes or insert a watermark.

Fields
Item - This is the number of the item on which you are searching. Limit Display To Crib - Use this drop-down to filter the results by crib. TIP: To clear the filter, select the blank space at the top of the drop-down list.

Headings
TIP: Double-click any of the bold headings to collapse the results. Bin... - This is the bin with which the item is associated. Other Serial ID Details - This section contains details on any serial ID's associated with the bin and not currently usable. Assembly Details - This section contains details regarding the assemblies with which the item is part of the assembly components list.

Page 234 of 525

Working with Reservations

Reservations

Chapter 11: Working with

Creating a Reservation
There are two ways to create a tool reservation: The first way: 1. 2. 3. 4. Click Actions > Issue. The Issue Item screen displays. Enter an Employee. Select the items you want to reserve. Enter any user defined information.

5. Click Reserve . The Reservation Properties pane displays. 6. Enter any necessary information. 7. Click . NOTE: If you have chosen the option File > Options > Print Options > Print report automatically when items are reserved, a printed reservation report will be produced. Otherwise, the Reservations dialog displays so that you can adjust the reservation and press the print button if you like. The second way: 1. Click Actions > Reservations... The Reservations screen displays. 2. 3. 4. 5. . The reservation properties pane displays. Press New Enter an employee in the Reserve For field. Enter any additional information. Click . The Reservation is created.

Page 235 of 525

Working with Reservations

Issuing Against a Reservation

To issue tools against a reservation, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Item Issue. The Issue Item screen displays.

. The Select/Print Reservation dialog 2. Press Reservation box displays. 3. Select the reservation you want to load. 4. Click OK. The reserved items are added to the issue list. NOTE: If you do not see items expected, check on their status. When you choose an item from the list, all the parts for this reservation are placed in the Issued window. NOTE: If there is insufficient quantity for any item, you will be given a choice to get the parts that are available or wait.

Understanding the Reservations Screen

To access the Reservations screen, click Actions > Reservations. The Reservations screen displays:

Page 236 of 525

Working with Reservations The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to create a new reservation. Click here to delete a reservation. Click here to filter for reservations in Open status. Click here to filter for reservations in Approved status. Click here to filter for reservations in Partial status. Click here to filter for reservations in Closed status. Click here to filter for reservations in Rejected status. Click here to filter for reservations in Deferred status. Click here to filter for Regular, Walk-in, System, or Broker reservations types. Click here to print the selected reservation. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Column Headers
No. - This is the database identifier for the reservation. Status - This is going to be one of the following: Open, Approved, Partially Filled, Closed, Rejected, Deferred. Reserved For - This is the employee ID for which the reservation was created. Name - This is the name of the employee for which the reservation was created. Type - This is the type of reservation (Regular, Walk-In, System or Broker). Approved By - This is the employee that approved the reservation. Created By - This is the employee that created the reservation.

Page 237 of 525

Working with Reservations Created - This is the date the reservation was created. Required - This is the date that the reservation is required. Status - This is going to be one of the following: 0-Unfilled, 1-Partial, 2-Closed(Short), 3-Closed, 4-Deferred. Type # - This is the type of reservation (0-Regular, 1-Walk-In, 2System, 3-Broker). Priority - This is the reservation numeric priority. It is not possible to change a reservation's priority. Expiration Date - This is the date the reservation expires. WO No. - This is the number of the associated work order. Schedule No. - This is the work order schedule number. External ID# - This is for reservations created externally.

Right-Click Menu
This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the Reservations screen:

New entry... - Select this option to create a new item. Properties... - Select this option to access the properties of the selected item. Delete... - Select this option to remove the selected item from the system. Set Status - Select this option to change the status of the selected item.

Page 238 of 525

Working with Reservations

Using the Reservation Properties Tab

To access the Reservation Properties tab, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Reservations. The Reservations screen displays. 2. Select the reservation you want to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Reservation Properties tab displays:

No. - This is the database identifier for the record. Created - This is the date the reservation was created. Page 239 of 525

Working with Reservations Required - The date the reservation is expected to be issued. Reserved For - This is the user for which the reservation was created. Created By - This is the user who created the reservation. Approved By - This is the user who approved the reservation. Status - Use this field to set the status of the reservation. Expiration - This is the date the reservation expires. Locations - This is the location where the item is to be issued. Sites - This is the purchasing site. Add - Click here to add an item to the reservation. - Click here to access the properties of the reservation

Properties item. Delete

- Click here to delete the reservation item.

Column Headers
No. - This is the database identifier for the selected record. Crib-Bin - This is the CribBin associated with the item. Item Group - This is the inventory group the item is associated with. Orig. Item # - Original item number in substitution was selected. Priority - This is the reservation numeric priority. Reserve Qty - This is the amount items in reserve. Actual Qty - This is the quantity issued Bin Qty - This is the number of items in the bin. Description - This is the primary description of an item. Description2 - This is additional information regarding the selected item. On Order - This is the amount of items on order. Pend. Rwk - This field displays the amount of the selected item that is pending rework. Comment - This is the space for any extra information about the selected item. Usage Item Number - This is the substitute item number. Usage CribBin - This is the CribBin used for the reservation. Seq - This is the unique identifier for this item.

Page 240 of 525

Working with Reservations

Using the More Tab

To access the More Properties tab, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Reservations. The Reservations screen displays. 2. Select the reservation you want to edit. . The Reservation Properties tab displays: 3. Click Properties 4. Click the More tab. The More tab displays:

Reservation Type - This is going to be one of the following: Regular, Walk-In, System. Create Work Order for this Reservation - Check this box if a work order is required. Order Option - This is going to be one of the following: Additional, Minimum, None. WO/Schedule - This is the scheduled work order for which the reservation was created. Special Instructions - Use this space to add any additional instructions. Custom Fields - This space contains any user-defined fields you may have set up. Page 241 of 525

Page 242 of 525

Using Cycle Counting

Chapter 12: Using Cycle Counting

CribMaster includes support for performing a running inventory reconciliation of all the bins maintained by CribMaster. The inventory reconciliation process is controlled by parameters you set via the Options Dialog. These parameters are used to control two different periods used in scheduling bins for counting: The total cycle is the period in which all the bins are to be counted. This period can be anywhere from 1 month to 2 years. When you first set the options for Inventory Reconciliation, specify when the next cycle is to be completed and the length of the following cycles. The total cycle is broken down into one or smaller periods called sub cycles. Sub cycles can be as short as 1 day or as long as the total cycle. Sub cycles assist in counting the bins over time so that the workload of counting the bins can be distributed over the total cycle. CribMaster supports manual and automatic scheduling of bins to be counted. When a bin is scheduled for counting, it is added to the bin count list. Refer to description of the Bin Inventory Window for information on working with the count list. If automatic scheduling is enabled, CribMaster automatically adds bins to the count list as needed to keep the inventory process on schedule. Bins can be prioritized for scheduling based on the elapsed time since the previous count, the number of items in the bin (fewer items are easier to count), or proximity (bins close to each other are easier to count). As time goes by, CribMaster will continue to add items to the counting schedule. If you do not count bins and confirm or adjust their counts, the list will get longer and longer.

Page 243 of 525

Using Cycle Counting

Using the Cycle Counting Screen

To access the Cycle Counting screen, follow the steps below:

Click Actions > Cycle Counting... The Cycle Counting screen displays: The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click this button to update the count history for any bins in the list whose actual count matches the expected count in the bin (e.g. which do not require adjustment.) NOTE: This will simply update the "last counted date" in the bin record and remove the bin from the count list. Bins that require adjustment (and bins that have not been counted) are not affected and remain in the list.

Page 244 of 525

Using Cycle Counting Click this button to display options for the schedule. Click this button to add more bins to the count. Click this button to auto-schedule all bins. NOTE: This is not normally necessary unless you have changed your options or manually removed bins from the list. CribMaster Server will automatically perform this function on a daily basis if you have enabled automatic scheduling. Click this button to remove the selected bin from the cycle count list. Click this button to remove all bins, and any added count records, from the list. Click this button to display the Adjust Bin Count window for the currently selected bin. NOTE: To adjust all bins in a single operation, select the Adjust All.. menu option from the context menu for the bin list. Click this button to count the serialized items in the bin. Click this button to toggle the bin list between single-crib and all-cribs mode. In single-crib mode, only bins in the selected crib which are scheduled for counting are displayed. In all-cribs mode, bins scheduled for counting in any crib are displayed. Click this button to print a report of the bins currently displayed in the count list.

Page 245 of 525

Using Cycle Counting Click here to search the current table. Click here to clear the current search.

Column Headers
Right Panel Crib - This is the crib of the bins you are counting. Name - This is the name of the crib. Area - This is the crib area. Label Printer - This is the printer to which printer commands are sent. Comment - This is any additional information about the crib. Site - This is the site ID of where the crib is located. Left Panel Crib-Bin - This is the crib-bin that is being counted. Item - This is the item that is being counted. Description - This is a description of the item. Actual Count - This is the result of a physical count of items in the bin. Expected Count - This is the expected result of a physical count of items in the bin. NOTE: An asterisk may display in this field if Hide Expected Count Value is selected on the Crib Properties > Cycle Counting tab. Counted - This is the last time the bin was counted during this subcycle. Due - This is when the next count is set to be completed. Scheduled - This is the date the count was scheduled. Last Counted - This is the date the bin was last counted. Count Class - This is the type of cycle count schedule set up for the item or bin. Expected Accuracy (%) - This is the expected accuracy of the cycle count. Hide - This displays either "Yes" or "No" depending on whether or not Hide "Expected Count" value when recording actual counts is checked on the Crib Properties > Cycle Counting tab.

Page 246 of 525

Using Cycle Counting

Right-Click Menu
Right Panel This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the left panel of the Cycle Counting screen:

Properties - Select one of the two lower options to access their associated properties. Inventory Item - Select this option to view item properties. Bin - Select this option to view bin properties. Adjust/Record... - Select this option to adjust bin quantity. Adjust All... - Select this option to adjust bin quantity for all bins where actual and expected counts did not match. Clear Count - Select this option to clear the Actual Count column for the select bin. Clear All Counts - Select this option to clear the Actual Count column for all bins. NOTE: Bins will reappear during this cycle if not counted. Remove... - Select this option to remove this bin, and any added count records, from the list. Remove All... - Select this option to remove all bins, and any added count records, from the list. View - Use these options to filter the list of bins. Uncounted bins - Select this option to filter the list down to uncounted bins. Verified bins - Select this option to filter the list down to verified bins. Bin requiring Adjustment - Select this option to filter the list down to bins that are in need of adjustment.

Page 247 of 525

Using Cycle Counting Left Panel This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the right panel of the Cycle Counting screen:

New entry... - Select this option to create a new crib. Edit properties... - Select this option to access the properties of the selected crib. Delete... - Select this option to delete the selected crib. Set as current crib... - Select this option to have the selected bin set as the default. Print Crib Label - Select this option to print a bar code label for this bin.

Entering an Actual Count

To enter an actual count, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Cycle Counting... The Cycle Counting screen displays. 2. Select a crib whose bins require counting. The left pane populates with the bins that are due for a count. 3. Enter the number of items into the Actual Count column. NOTE: If you enter an Actual Count that is the same as the Expected Count, a check mark displays next to the CribBin. If you enter an Actual Count that is not the same as the Expected Count, an "x" displays next to the CribBin.

4. Click Mark Verified

. The bin counts are marked.

NOTE: Once bin counts have been marked, their entries turn gray.

Page 248 of 525

Using Cycle Counting

Adjusting the Bin Count from the Cycle Counting Screen

To adjust the bin count from the Cycle Counting screen, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Cycle Counting... The Cycle Counting screen displays. 2. Select a crib whose bins require adjusting. 3. Select the bin that requires adjustment. 4. Click Adjust/Record . The Adjust/Record Bin Count dialog box displays. 5. Enter a New Bin Quantity. 6. Enter a Reason Code if necessary. 7. Click Yes. The quantity is changed.

Scheduling Additional Bins

To schedule additional bins, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Cycle Counting... The Cycle Counting screen displays. 2. Select the crib for which you want to schedule additional bins.

3. Click Schedule Additional Bins Bins For Cycle Counting dialog box displays:

. The Schedule

Page 249 of 525

Using Cycle Counting

4. Select or accept the Cycle Counting Classification. 5. Enter the number of bins you want to add to the schedule. NOTE: CribMaster selects the bins to add. TIP: The second line from the bottom displays the number of bins that can be added to the schedule. 6. Click OK.

Counting Serialized Items in CribMaster Client

To count serialized items in the CribMaster Client, follow the steps below: 1. Click Actions > Cycle Counting... The Cycle Counting screen displays. 2. Select a crib whose bins require counting. The left pane populates with the bins that are due for a count. 3. Select a bin with a serialized item. 4. Click . The Serialized Item Count screen displays. 5. To account for a present Serial ID, select it in the left pane and click the right-pointing arrows ( the right pane. ). The serial ID moves to

TIP: If a serialized item is present in the bin but does not display in the left pane, enter it in the Scan/Enter Serial ID field. 6. When the serial IDs have been accounted for, click OK. NOTE: Serial IDs that do not belong to that bin, but are accounted for on the Serialized Item Count screen, will be marked in the transaction records as an incorrect bin. 7. Back on the Cycle Counting screen; enter the number of items into the Actual Count column. 8. Click Mark Verified. The bin counts are marked. Page 250 of 525

Understanding Transfers

Chapter 13: Understanding Transfers

CribMaster provides a transfer system to move items from one bin to another. It works to:

Generate or schedule transfer items Print the transfer report Move the items and mark movements on the report Use the Complete Transfers screen to let CribMaster know what was moved

You can choose to track transfers to different cribs as they move from source to destination. When you do this, CribMaster creates temporary bins in the cribs to contain the items. These bins are named Crib$TTransferID i.e. 01-$T1234 where the Transfer ID is 1234. This allows you to find and account for things that are in transit. You might want to set up a single crib named "In Transit" or you can set up a crib for each Cart or intermediate location you want to use. Each time you track an item to a new crib, CribMaster writes a TRACK transaction to permanently record this movement. Generate transfer items: Transfers can be generated in different ways. The Satellite Stocking system generates transfers to stock bins in satellite cribs. You can manually add transfers by choosing Purchasing. When you manually generate a transfer, you can choose Schedule or Transfer Now. Transfer Now moves the quantity and finishes the transfer immediately so that no further processing is required. Assembly and Disassembly of kits also generate transfers. Print the Transfer report: The Transfer report is printed at Purchasing > Print Transfers. It lists all open transfer items with a place indicated to write the number of items actually moved. The report is intended as a working report used by the crib attendant when moving the stock from one bin to the other. You can choose an option that prints the transfer report automatically each day when open transfers exist. This option is on the Options Config property page. The Complete Transfers step is the step CribMaster uses to reduce the quantity shown in one bin and increase the quantity shown in the other bin. If you move part of the quantity needed on a transfer, the remaining quantity will continue as an open transfer until you fill it or delete it. The exception to this rule is that Satellite Stocking transfers will be purged when any partial quantity is moved against them and Page 251 of 525

Understanding Transfers the bin will be reexamined to see if further transfers are needed. (May be over Order Point after the partial transfer). Outstanding transfer items can be viewed at any time on the Complete Transfers dialog. You can remove a transfer item with the Delete button on the Complete Transfers screen. Transfers can be completed in two steps. Step one is to initiate the transfer meaning it has left the sending crib. Step two is to complete the transfer, which means the item has been received at the receiving crib. Items which have been initiated and not yet completed will appear in the list with a lightning bolt beside it. Group Transfers - Transfers are sometimes assigned a group number so that they can easily be moved together. When transfers have a group number, you can use "Set Quantity for Group" and "Select Items in Group" from the context menu on the complete transfer screen. There is also a "Group Transfer" report that you can print from the context menu. This report has a special Group barcode at the top and barcodes for the individual transfers in the list. Groups are created automatically in some places in CribMaster like:

Receiving items destined for the same crib Manually creating group transfers Assembling and Disassembling kits

Even when an item is part of a group, you may treat it as though it is an individual transfer and move it by itself which will take it out of the group.

Transferring Items
Items can be transferred to other bins, cribs or sites. To transfer items, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchasing > Transfer Items... The Transfer Items screen displays. 2. Select the Crib/Bin to which you want to transfer the items. 3. Enter a quantity to transfer. 4. Enter any additional information. 5. Do one of the following: Click Schedule Transfer to have the transfer scheduled. Click Transfer Now to have the transfer take place at that moment. The items are transferred.

Page 252 of 525

Understanding Transfers

Understanding the Transfer Items Dialog Box

This screen is used to move stock from one bin to another. It is part of the Transfer System and generates transfer needs that appear on the transfer report. The transfers are then completed with the Complete Transfers screen. To access the Transfer Items screen, follow the steps below: Click Transfer Items... The Transfer Items screen displays.

NOTE: This option is only available to users of CribMaster's Data Warehousing feature.

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click this button to initiate the transfer.

Page 253 of 525

Understanding Transfers Click this button to set the transfer to run at a different date and time. Click this button to reset the transfer screen.

Transfer Multiple Items - Check this box to create multiple transfers that will have a common group number which can be used to initiate and track the transfers. Group # - Enter the buyers group number (if applicable). Item - Enter an item to be transferred. Serial ID - Enter a serial ID to help identify the current bin and narrow the destination bin choices. Select Source Location - Use these fields to define the crib-bin from which the items are being transferred. This Site - Select this option transfer items from your current site. Other Site - Select this option transfer items from a different site. NOTE: This option is only available to users of CribMaster's Data Warehousing feature. Show Cribs Only - Check this box to narrow the list to show only cribs. Select Destination Location - Use these fields to define the crib-bin to which the items are being transferred. This Site - Select this option transfer items to your current site. Other Site - Select this option transfer items to a different site. NOTE: This option is only available to users of CribMaster's Data Warehousing feature. Show Cribs Only - Check this box to narrow the list to show only cribs. Quantity - Enter an amount of stock to move. NOTE: This amount cannot be larger than the bin quantity of the from bin for "Transfer Now" items but you may

Page 254 of 525

Understanding Transfers schedule more than the existing quantity. The person completing the transfer will not be allowed to move more than the bin quantity at the time the transfer is initiated. To Bin Location - Select a location from drop-down list. NOTE: All acceptable choices are listed in the combo box. Often there is only one choice and it is already selected for you. Schedule Comment - Enter any additonal information that you want printed on the transfer report.

Column Headings
Crib-Bin - This is the bin from which the item is being transferred. Item - This is the item number. Description - This is the description of the item. Quantity - This is the amount of units in the bin. On Order - This is the amount of units on order. Bin Comment - This is any additional information about the bin. Inv Comment - This is the contents of the comment field from item properties. Unit of Measure (Issue) - This is the conveyance of the item issue. For example, Box, Carton, Bag, etc. CINo - This is the common item number.

Page 255 of 525

Understanding Transfers

Transferring to Different Items

Items can be transferred into other items. This function can be used to help consolidate items. For instance, let's say your company has a group of expensive drills they want to keep track of. You made each drill its own item number. In CribMaster you would have one item number then all the drill serialized under that one item number. So in that instance you would transfer all the drills to one item (effectively changing the item number), then make that one item serialized and then give all the drills a serial number. To transfer items to different items, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Bin... The Crib/Bin Records screen displays. 2. Right-click the bin from which you want to transfer items. 3. Select Transfer To Different Item... The Transfer To Different Item screen displays. 4. Enter a quantity to transfer. 5. Select the Crib/Bin to which you want to transfer. 6. Do one of the following: Click Schedule Transfer to have the transfer take place at a scheduled time. Click Transfer Now to have the transfer take place at that moment. The items are transferred. NOTE: When the items are transferred, they take the number of the items to which they have been transferred.

Understanding the Transfer to Different Item Dialog Box

To access the Transfer to Different Item dialog box, follow the directions below: 1. Click Bins. The Bin Records screen displays. 2. Right-click the item you want to transfer. The right-click menu displays. 3. Select Transfer to Different Item. This is the Transfer to Different Item dialog box:

Page 256 of 525

Understanding Transfers

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click this button to initiate the transfer. Click this button to set the transfer to run at a different date and time.

From Crib-Bin - Enter bin from which to move items. Quantity - Enter the amount of items being moved.

Page 257 of 525

Understanding Transfers Column Headers Crib-Bin - This is the crib-bin to which you are moving items. Item - This is the item into which you are moving items. Group - This is the item group of the selected item. Bin Qty - This is the amount of that item currently in the bin. Description - This is the description of the item from the Item Information tab in Inventory Properties. Description2 - This is the second description field of the item from the Item Information tab in Inventory Properties. Bin Type - This field displays the type of bin: normal, primary, secondary, or temporary bin types. Primary and secondary bin types are used with item-centric ordering. The temporary bin type is used with transfer tracking. On Order - This is the amount of units on order. Pend. Rwk - This is the amount of units current pending rework. Comment - This is any additional information about the item. Mfr # - This field displays the number of the manufacturer of the item (if applicable). Manufacturer - This field displays the name of the manufacturer of the item. Primary Crib-Bin - This field displays the primary bin (if the bin is used for item-centric ordering). Stop Ordering - If the Stop Ordering check box is checked on the Order Information tab of the Bin Properties dialog box, Yes displays in this field. Inactive - If the Remove from active item list check box is checked on the Bin Information tab, Yes displays in this field. Stop Issue - If the Stop Issue check box is checked on the Bin Information tab, Yes displays in this field. Last Recalc Date - This field displays the date the bin was last calculated from the Order Information tab of the Bin Properties dialog box. Unit of Measure (Issue) - This is the conveyance of the item issue. For example, Box, Carton, Bag, etc.

Page 258 of 525

Understanding Transfers

Understanding the Satellite Stocking Dialog Box

To access the Satellite Stocking dialog box, click Purchasing > Stock Satellite Bins. The Satellite Stocking dialog box displays:

Column Headers
Crib-Bin From - This is the bin from where the stock will be moved. This is determined by the Stock From Bin entered on the Bin properties Bin Info tab. Placing a bin in the Stock From Bin is what causes a bin to be treated as a satellite bin rather than a normal bin. Qty - This is the current quantity in the Crib-Bin From bin. You cannot move more than this to the satellite bin. Crib-Bin To - This is the satellite bin. Case - This is the case size from the Inventory properties Supplier tab for the primary supplier. Need - This is the Order Now quantity calculated by CribMaster. Tsf - This is the quantity to move. An entry in this column determines that something will be moved. Item Number - This is the Item ID. Description - This is a short description of the item. Bin Comment - This is the comment from the Bin properties Bin Info tab.

Page 259 of 525

Understanding Transfers

Completing Transfers
Completing transfers is necessary when using a two step transfer. Step one is to initiate the transfer and step two is to complete the transfer. The Complete Transfers step is the step CribMaster uses to reduce the quantity shown in one bin and increase the quantity shown in the other bin. If you move part of the quantity needed on a transfer, the remaining quantity will continue as an open transfer until you fill it or delete it. The exception to this rule is that Satellite Stocking transfers will be purged when any partial quantity is moved against them and the bin will be reexamined to see if further transfers are needed. (Maybe over Order Point after the partial transfer). Outstanding transfer items can be viewed at any time on the Complete Transfers dialog box. To complete a transfer, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchasing > Complete Transfers... The Complete Transfers screen displays. 2. Highlight the transfer you want to complete. 3. Double-click the Amount field to automatically populate it with the transfer amount. TIP: If you are accepting a lower amount you can type it into the field.

4. Click Complete

. The transfer is completed.

TIP: You can remove a transfer item with the Delete button.

Page 260 of 525

Understanding Transfers

Understanding the Complete Transfers Screen

To access the Complete Transfers screen, follow the directions below: Click Purchasing > Complete Transfers... The Complete Transfers screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to complete the selected transfer. Click here to initiate the transfer. Click here to delete the transfer record. Click here to examine the item.

Page 261 of 525

Understanding Transfers Click here to select all transfer records. Click here to clear all transfer records. Click here to select or change the serial ID of the item in the selected transfer. Click here to substitute an item. Click here to view all cribs (as opposed to just the default crib). Click here to synchronize multiple databases. Click here to filter the list to just assembly transfers. Click here to reset the screen.

Column Headers
Bin From - This is the bin the stock was moved from. Status - This displays the current status of the transfer. Qty - This is the quantity suggested to be moved. Bin To - This is the bin the stock was moved to. Tsf Qty - This is the quantity that was actually transferred from one bin to the other. Qty Available - This is the current bin quantity known to CribMaster. NOTE: You will not be allowed to transfer more than this quantity. Item - This is the item number. Description - This is the description of the item. Comment - The type of transfer displays in this column. Kit SerialID - If the item being transferred is a serialized kit, the number displays in this column. Employee - This is the employee that requested the transfer. Date Ordered - This is the date the transfer was requested.

Page 262 of 525

Understanding Transfers Serial Id - This is the serial ID of the item being transferred (if applicable). Group# - If this transfer is associated with a buyer's group, the group's ID is displayed in this column. Track - This is the tracking number of the transfer (if applicable). Save Force Order - Denotes whether or not the items in the transfer are forced order items. Crib To - This is the crib to which the item is being transferred. Crib From - This is the crib from which the item is being transferred. From Site No. ID - This is the database identifier for the transfer. Site Tfr No. Site Group# -

Page 263 of 525

Page 264 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Purchasing

Chapter 14: Understanding

CribMasters purchasing system will automatically keep your crib stocked at the proper levels. You have numerous options and overrides to tweak the system, or tweak just one bin to adjust the levels to your exact specifications. The system supports multiple suppliers and up to seven price break levels for each item. Stock is always ordered from the primary supplier for each item, but you may alter that on the Purchase Authorization screen and you may change the primary supplier at any time. Purchasing is always done by bin, but information contained in the item and supplier records affect what is ordered. There are two decisions in purchasing, when to order and how much. In the record for each bin, there is a field called Order Now that can be seen on the Order Information tab of the Bin properties. Order Now is the quantity that CribMaster will order if an order is placed right then. When you look at the Purchase Authorization screen, you see a list of all bins that have an amount in the Order Now field. The Order Now field is recalculated: When an item is issued. When items are received through purchase (they are queued to be calculated when CM Server is available). When you leave the order information screen under Bin Info. When all items are recalculated monthly.

Page 265 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Understanding Average Lead Time

Average lead time is used to compute Order Point and Safety Stock. The Average Lead Time is computed from all orders of the item from the primary supplier within the last year. When the primary supplier for an item is changed, the Average Lead Time is recalculated. Average Lead Time is calculated in the background when CM Server is not processing other requests, so the change may not appear on your screen immediately. On the Options > Ordering tab there is a place to supply a default Average Lead Time for CribMaster to use until there are two orders for an item. (It takes two orders to compute the time between orders.) Maximum Lead Time is the longest lead time within the last year. Maximum Lead Time is only used in Form 2 of the Safety Stock formula. See Below. Build Time is the time between orders to a supplier. This is stored by supplier and recalculated each time a purchase order is produced for a supplier. This is not item-related but is the average time it takes to accumulate enough need to produce the minimum dollar amount needed for an order to the supplier. On the Options > Ordering tab you choose how much of this build time to add to Average Lead Time and Maximum Lead Time. The choices are None, One Half, and All. On the Supplier Properties Purchasing Info tab there is a place to enter an override build time for the supplier. On the Options Ordering tab there is a place to supply a default Build Time for CribMaster to use until there are two orders for a supplier. NOTE: It takes two orders to compute the time between orders.

Page 266 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Understanding Order Point

An Order Point is established for each Bin. You may override the Order Point for any Bin on the Order Information tab of the bin's properties. The calculated Order Point will still be displayed for information, but the override quantity will be used in calculations. NOTE: On reports displaying the Order Point, the override quantity will be displayed as the Order Point while the calculated Order Point will be displayed as the suggested Order Point. The formula for Order Point is: Order Point = MonthlyUsage * AverageLeadTime + Safety Stock CribMaster generates an order need for a bin when the quantity for the bin is less than or equal to the order point. For reworkable items, there are two options on the item property page that allow you to include checked out stock in the quantity and another option to include all the reworked stock in the quantity (when this is done, the reworked usage is also used in computing the order point.) CribMaster does not order reworked reworkable items and CribMaster does not automatically order gauge or kit items. NOTE: For bins that use transfers for restocking, (bin has a StockFromBin, Crib has StockFromCrib, or Item has StockFromCrib) the AverageLeadTime is not calculated but its static value, specified in Options > Ordering tab, is displayed on the Ordering Options page.

Page 267 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Understanding Safety Stock

The Safety Stock Ratio is specified separately for Inventory Items designated as Critical Part on the Inventory Properties More tab. The Safety Stock formula is selected on the Options > Safety Stock screen. There are three formulas for Safety Stock:

Formula 1: Safety Stock

NOTE: This is the recommended formula and the default.

Formula 2: Safety Stock

NOTE: This formula reduces Safety Stock as MaximumLeadTime approaches AverageLeadTime. When MaximumLeadTime is the same as AverageLeadTime, Safety Stock will be 0. You should not switch to form 2 when there is little ordering history available.

Formula 3: Safety Stock

NOTE: This formula ignores AverageLeadTime and computes Safety Stock as a percentage of MonthlyUsage. The Safety Stock Ratio defaults to 0.7 and should probably range somewhere from 0.3 to 1.2. If you could count on your lead-time and you always ordered on time, you would need exactly MonthlyUsage * AverageLeadTime to last you until the next order. The Safety Stock Ratio allows you specify an amount to maintain above this level to cover abnormal usage, order delays, etc.

Page 268 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Understanding Item Ordering

Here are some points to remember when ordering items:

Items of type Kit can be ordered if you enter a primary supplier. You control which kits are ordered automatically by entering the primary supplier. Items are not ordered if a primary supplier has not been assigned. You can print a list of items without a primary supplier using one of the additional reports on the Additional Reports dialog box. Bins with a Bin ID entered in the Stock From Bin field are not ordered. These items generate an entry on the Satellite Stocking dialog box. Reworkable items are not ordered unless there is an Item ID in the Reworked Item Number field. When this ID is not present CribMaster assumes this item is the reworked item rather than the new item so that it cannot be ordered. Gauges are not ordered based on usage. You must enter a number in the Force Order field on the Order Information screen for the bin to have them appear on the Purchase Authorization dialog box. This will also cause them to be ordered, if you are using automatic ordering, the next time an order is placed with the appropriate supplier. You can order gauges manually by pressing Add Item on the Purchase Authorization dialog box.

Determining How Much to Order

By default CribMaster orders the Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) calculated:

This quantity represents the optimum quantity given the input available. You have the option to Add the Shortfall to this quantity where the shortfall is (OrderPoint - Quantity - OnOrder). The quantity is checked to make sure it at least gets the inventory level back over the Order Point so an immediate reorder is not generated.

Page 269 of 525

Understanding Purchasing This quantity is then adjusted for the Minimum Order quantity for the primary supplier shown on the Suppliers tab of the Inventory Properties dialog. The quantity is also adjusted for the Bin Minimum and for the Bin Capacity shown on the Order Information tab of the bin properties. If there is a Force Order amount, the quantity ordered will be the Force Order amount. If the supplier has a price break schedule, order quantities are computed at each break level greater than the need and the extra profit generated by the lower price is compared to the carrying cost of the extra cost and the optimum quantity is chosen. CribMaster will not order more that the Maximum Months Supply to Order from the Options> Ordering tab. In addition, all orders are checked through the Price Schedule to make sure that more quantity cannot be purchased at the same or lower costs. Alternative Quantity - For any bin you may specify a Fill Bin To Quantity on the Order Information tab of the Bin properties. When the Fill Bin To Quantity is specified, none of the above calculations take place and a quantity is ordered to bring the quantity in the bin up to the quantity specified in the Fill Bin To Quantity field. If the OrderPoint is higher than the Fill Bin To Quantity, the order is increased to bring the level to the OrderPoint so an immediate reorder is not generated. NOTE: When cost has not been entered on the Inventory properties page, the economic order quantity cannot be computed. In this case the order quantity will be the largest of: 1 OrderPoint - Quantity - OnOrder Maximum - Quantity - m_OnOrder NOTE: For bins that use transfers for restocking, (bin has a StockFromBin, Crib has StockFromCrib, or Item has StockFromCrib) the Cost of Ordering in the EOQ formula is the Cost of Transferring a single item on the Ordering option tab.

Page 270 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Authorizing Purchase Orders

To authorize a purchase, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchasing > Authorize Purchasing... The Items to Order screen displays. 2. Do one of the following: Select the item you want to authorize and double-click the line to auto-populate Order Qty. Click the Ordered Quantity of the item you want to authorize and enter a different number. . The Print Purchase Order Reports dialog 3. Click Purchase box displays. 4. Click Print to create a paper copy of the order (Optional). 5. Click Send to send the order to another destination (Optional). 6. Click Close. The purchase order is created.

Understanding the Items To Order / Request Items be Purchased Dialog Box

To access the Items To Order screen, do one of the following: Click Purchasing > Authorize Purchasing... Click Purchasing > Request a Purchase... This is the Items To Order / Request Items be Purchased screen:

Page 271 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

The following table illustrates the function of each icon:

Icon Function

Click here to produce a Purchase Order for each supplier that has items selected. Click here to purchase only items in the list. NOTE: If you use filters by searching or selecting a Sup #, the set of records displayed in the list will change. Click here to look for surplus and excess in other bins to try to satisfy the selected items (items where the Order Quantity is filled in) by making a transfer from another location. Click here to display the add item dialog which allows you to add items manually to the list. NOTE: Gauges and one-time buys are often ordered manually with the Add Item button. Page 272 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Click here to input or change the purchase order detail about the selected item. Click here to remove an item from the list. NOTE: This is used to remove items you manually add to the list with Add Item or One Time. You can remove other items but items that were automatically added to the list will probably be automatically added again unless conditions have changed. System generated items are removed automatically by the system if conditions change and orders dont need to be placed. Click here to print the selected purchase order. Click here to examine the selected item. Click here to place the suggested quantity in the Order Quantity column for all items in the list. NOTE: If the list is restricted to items for one supplier with the Supplier Combo, then only items for that supplier are affected. Click here to clear all entries in the Order Quantity column for the items currently in the list. Auto-purchased items are denoted by a "Yes" in the Auto column. NOTE: If the list is restricted to items for one supplier with the Supplier Combo, then only items for that supplier are affected. Click here to show all buyer groups. Click here to have the list show autopurchased items.

Page 273 of 525

Understanding Purchasing NOTE: This button remembers its setting each time the screen is invoked. Click here to list items from all sites / other site ID's. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search.

Vendor - Select a supplier from this drop-down. NOTE: If the Order Details are hidden, you can view them by clicking Expand .

Address Tab
Mail PO To - This is the mailing address of the Purchase Order. NOTE: The supplier's address comes from the supplier properties. ShipTo Address - This is the Ship To address of the Purchase Order. NOTE: The address comes from the Site ID properties. Bill To Address - This is the Bill To address of the Purchase Order. NOTE: The address comes from the Site ID properties.

Order Instructions
PO # - This is the PO Number from the supplier properties or global default (marked as "auto"). NOTE: You have the ability to modify the number for any PO on demand. Date Required - This is the date required for the order (if the order is required). The information comes from the supplier properties. TIP: Anything can be entered here (i.e. ASAP). Page 274 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Freight This is the shipping cost. Shipping Instructions - These are the shipping instructions. The information comes from the supplier properties. NOTE: This is generated from the Suppliers record but you may modify it for any PO. Terms - These are the Payment Terms as they are displayed on the PO (i.e. Net 30). The information comes from the supplier properties. Comments - Enter any additional notes for a Purchase Order. NOTE: The notes will print on the Purchase Order. NOTE: You can print the Purchase Order and then enter notes for yourself if you want to keep a note without printing it on a Purchase Order to mail to a supplier.

Order Contact
Edi Phone - This is the phone number for the selected supplier. EMail Address - The Email address for this Supplier. NOTE: This is used if you specify Email as the delivery method for POs. Fax Phone - This is the fax number for this supplier. NOTE: Fax number is used when Purchase Orders are faxed to the suppliers and the EDI Number is used for EDI Transactions. TIP: You may specify the Recipient of a fax by appending colon, Recipient name to the fax number. For example: 1 (770) 4191968:WinWare Customer Support. Site ID - This is the ID of the select Site Profile.

Page 275 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Column Headers
Qty - This is the quantity from the original order Suggested Qty - If orders are reviewed by crib this field is quantity suggested by crib. See Reviewing Ordering Requirements. Ordr - This is the qty to be Purchased. $ Each - This is the price of each item. NOTE: This number will change with the Ordr column when the supplier has a price break. Cost - This is the Ordr column * $Each. Min - This is the larger of the minimum quantity for the primary supplier and the minimum quantity for the bin. Item - This is the Item ID. Auto - This field denotes auto-purchasing. A "Yes" in this column denotes an auto-purchase. Description - This is a description of the item. Desc2 - This is a description of the item. Supplier - This is the Supplier ID. Crib-Bin - This is the Crib-Bin ID. Bin Comment - This is the comment field from the Bin Information tab. Inv Comment - This is the inventory comment from the More tab. Comment - This is the comment for the individually purchased item. NOTE: This comment is entered on the Purchase Order Detail Item screen. You can later modify the comment on the Edit Purchase Order screen. Special - This is the special field from the Item Information tab in Inventory Properties. Buyer Group - This is the Buyer Group field from the Item Information tab in Inventory Properties WO - This is the WO number for the order if using Preventive Maintenance. This is manually entered. No. - This is the database identifier for the item. Consign - This field specifies whether or not the item is a consignment item. Type - This is an internal CribMaster number. "0" means it was autogenerated, "1" means a user added it. Avg Mthly Usage - This is the average monthly usage for this bin. MTD Usage - This is the month to date usage for this bin, this month. Pl Qty - This is the Plant Quantity for this bin, which includes items in the bin and items that are checked out. Page 276 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Understanding One-Time Purchases

In CribMaster, a purchase without a CribBin assignment is referred to as a one-time purchase. These items are handled in the purchasing system but do not flow into the inventory and transaction system when received. You can add items to a Purchase Order that are not to be placed in a bin when received. This gives you full access to the purchasing system for items that are not set up in bins or the inventory item table. You may also purchase items that are set up in the inventory item table but are not assigned to bins. These items appear on Purchase Orders, the Purchase Order detail reports, and the receiving dialog. Through the purchasing system they are handled just like any other item. When received, the one-time items are not placed in a bin and their life in CribMaster is over. The one-time purchase can be viewed in the history tab of the supplier properties.

Creating a One-Time Purchase

To create a one-time purchase in the Pending order screen, follow the directions below: 1. Click Purchasing > Authorize Purchasing.

2. Click Add . 3. Select an Item. 4. Select the Supplier. NOTE: One-Time purchases must have a supplier. 4. Enter the Quantity. 5. Enter the Supplier Item Number. NOTE: This field is required. 6. Enter a Description. 7. Enter any additional information. . 8. Click

Page 277 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Working with Purchase Orders

Using the Purchase Orders Screen
To access the Purchase Orders screen, click Purchasing > Edit Purchase Orders... The Purchase Orders screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to create a new purchase order. Click here to access the properties of the selected purchase order. Click here to remove the selected purchase order. Click here to filter the list down to ordered purchases. Click here to filter the list down to requested purchases. Click here to filter the list down to partial orders. Click here to filter the list down to quotes. Click here to filter the list down to approved

Page 278 of 525

Understanding Purchasing purchase orders. Click here to filter the list down to rejected purchase orders. Click here to filter the list down to closed purchase orders. Click here to filter the list down to purchase orders with errors. Click here to print approved purchase orders. Click here to see what the PO will look like when it is printed. Click here to print the selected PO. Click here to send the selected PO to a recipient. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode. Column Headers PO Type - This is the type of purchase order. Status - This is the status on which the above filters are based. Date - This is the date the order was placed. Supplier PO - This is the purchase order number of the supplier. PO Seq. - This is the sequence number of the line item on the Purchase Order. Supplier - This is the number of the supplier of the item(s). Mail To - This is the name of the supplier of the item(s). Requested By - This is the CribMaster user that requested the item(s). Name - This is the name of the CribMaster user that requested the item(s). Approved By - This is the CribMaster user that approved the purchase order. Created By - This is the CribMaster user that created the purchase order. Buyer - This is the employee responsible for making the purchase. Note - This is any additional information about the purchase order. Site - This is the for which the purchase is intended.

Page 279 of 525

Understanding Purchasing The Right-Click Menu This is the menu that displays when you right-click the Purchase Orders screen:

New Purchase Order... - Select this option to create a new purchase order. Edit Purchase Order... - Select this option to edit the selected purchase order. Delete... - Select this option to remove the selected record. Preview - Select this option to view the purchase order as it would appear on paper. Print - Select this option to print the purchase order. Send... - Select this option to send the purchase order to another party. PO Labels... - Select this option to print labels for the selected purchase order. Receive Orders and Reworks... - Select this option to access the Select Items Being Received dialog box. Print Multiple Purchase Orders - Select this option to access the Print Purchase Order Reports dialog box. PO Detail Reports... - Select this option to access the Purchase Order Detail Reports dialog box. Set Status - Select one of the four options below to set a status for the purchase order. Ordered - Select this option to designate the PO as ordered. Closed - Select this option to designate the PO as completed.

Page 280 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Partial - Select this option to designate the PO as partially fulfilled. Approved - Select this option to designate the PO as approved for order. Create Prophet (850) Request - Used with Prophet 21 systems.

Creating a Purchase Order

To create a purchase order, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchase Orders from the CM Explorer tree. The Purchase Orders screen displays. . The Items to Order screen displays. 2. Click New 3. Select a supplier from the drop-down. The supplier's information populates the boxes below and a list of available items displays. 4. For any item you want to purchase, enter the amount in the Order Quantity field. 5. Click Purchase Items . The purchase order is created.

Editing a Purchase Order

To edit a purchase order, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchase Orders from the CM Explorer tree. The Purchase Orders screen displays. 2. Select a purchase order to edit. . The Purchase Order Detail Item dialog box 3. Click Properties displays. 4. Make any necessary changes. 5. Click . The changes are saved.

Deleting a Purchase Order

To delete a purchase order, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchase Orders from the CM Explorer tree. The Purchase Orders screen displays. 2. Select a purchase order to delete. 3. Click Delete . A confirmation dialog box displays. Page 281 of 525

Understanding Purchasing 4. Click OK to confirm deletion. The purchase order is removed from the system. NOTE: Purchase orders that have been completed cannot be deleted.

Using the Purchase Order Dialog Box

To access the Purchase Order dialog box, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchase Orders from the CM Explorer tree. The Purchase Orders screen displays. 2. Select a purchase order to edit. 3. Click Properties . The Purchase Order dialog box displays:

PO No. - This is the purchase order number and it prints in the Purchase Order Number block on the PO. This number is not required

Page 282 of 525

Understanding Purchasing to be unique and you can put the same number on 2 POs. The Order Number above will distinguish different POs in this case.. Terms - These are the payment terms to be printed on the PO (i.e. Net 30) Freight - These are the costs to be printed on the PO. Type - This is the type of purchase. Seq. - This is the CribMaster Order number. This is the internal CribMaster purchase order number that makes each PO generated in CribMaster unique.. Requestor - This is the employee who requested the items. Date Ordered - This is the date the items were ordered. Sales Tax % - Enter percentage number as 5.0 for 5 percent. Do not enter .05. This rate is stored with the PO and will be used each time the PO is reprinted. When POs are created, the rate is set to be the Sales Tax rate on the Options page. You may then edit the rate for individual POs as needed. Print # - CribMaster tracks the number of times (Beginning with release 4.2.038) each PO has been printed.(or Faxed, or Emailed, or EDIed). There is an alternate version of the PO report (PO with Reprint) that will print the word "Reprint" on POs where this number is greater than 1. Approved By - This is the employee who approved the PO. Date Required - This is the date by which the order is needed. Status - Displays the current status of the PO. The status can also be changed here. Created By - This is the employee that created the PO. Deliver To - This is the employee to whom the item is to be sent. Ship Insts - These are shipping instructions. Buyer - This is the employee doing the purchasing. Account - This is the account number (if applicable). Propagate date changes to PO Items - Changes to the required date will circulate to all line items on this PO. Mail PO To: - This information is populated from the supplier properties. This information can be changed for this PO by typing over it. Ship To Address: - This information is generated from the Site Profile. This information can be changed for this PO by typing over it. Bill To Address: - This information is generated from the Site Profile. This information can be changed for this PO by typing over it. Supplier - This is the CribMaster Supplier ID. Phone - This information is populated from the supplier properties. Fax - This information is populated from the supplier properties. EMail - This information is populated from the supplier properties. EDI - This information is populated from the supplier properties. Page 283 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Notes - This is space for any additional comments.

Page 284 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Buttons Add Item Edit - Click here to add additional items.

- Click here to edit purchase order details.

- Click here to remove the selected item from the Remove Item purchase order. UnReceive - Click here to reverse the receive process for the selected item. The bin quantities are updated and the item is shown in the open orders again. Change Supplier - Click here to select an alternate supplier for the line item and create a new PO for that supplier or add the item to an existing PO. Column Headers Qty - This is the quantity of the order. Item - This is the Item ID. Description - This is the item description. Received - This is the date the item was received. It will be blank if the item is still outstanding. Returned - This is the date the item was returned. It will be blank if the item is still outstanding. Crib-Bin - This is the crib/bin for which the item was received or purchased. Date - This is the date that the purchase order was generated Supplier Item # - This is the supplier item number from the inventory properties or the Purchase Order Line Item Detail screen. UPC Code - This is the UPC from the inventory properties or the Purchase Order Line Item Detail screen. To Inspection - This is the date that the purchase order was sent to inspection.

Page 285 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Using the Purchase Order Detail Tab

This tab contains information pulled from other locations and can be edited if necessary. To access this dialog box, follow the directions below: 1. Click Purchase Order Details from the CM Explorer tree. The Purchase Order Details screen displays. 2. Select a PO item for which you want to view details. 3. Click Properties displays: . The Purchase Order Detail dialog box

Item - Enter an item to order if the item exists in the database.

Page 286 of 525

Understanding Purchasing TIP: You can use an item number from the inventory system to pull the properties of the item (cost, supplier info, etc.) even if you do not plan to enter a Crib-Bin to track the purchase. Required Date - Enter the date by which the items are needed. Optionally, the required date is populated based on the average lead time. NOTE: Prints on the Purchase Order. This is to advise the supplier when the item is needed. Vendor Number - This is the primary supplier for the item. NOTE: The supplier number is required and must be set up in the CribMaster supplier records and item properties. Vendor Name - This is the common name of the supplier. Promised Date - Enter the date by which the item is promised to arrive. Optionally, the promised date is populated based on the average lead time. Crib/Bin - This is the crib/bin with which the item is associated. Select an alternate crib/bin if needed. Delete Crib/Bin - Click this button to remove the bin association for this purchase. NOTE: This does not delete the bin. Date Ordered - This field is auto populated when a new purchase order is created. Blanket PO - This is the supplier blanket PO that the item will be purchased against. Original Promised Date - This is the date the item was originally promised. Quantity - Enter a quantity to order. Vendor Item Number - This is the item number from the supplier. The information comes from inventory properties. TIP: If unknown, enter unknown or something equivalent. NOTE: This is a required field for one time buys. Promised Date Revision - This is the revision record of the promised date.

Page 287 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Description - This is a description of the item. The information comes from inventory properties. Confirm No - This is the confirmation number of the order. NOTE: This number displays on the receiving screen and allow you to receive using the confirmation number. UPC Code - This is the UPC for the item. The information comes from inventory properties. Comment - This is any additional information. NOTE: This will print on the Purchase Order. Special - The information in this field comes from inventory properties. TIP: You can use this field for anything you like, such as billing account. TIP: On the Purchase Order detail reports, you can select and sort on Special. NOTE: This field will print on the Purchase Order and Purchase Order detail reports. Cost Each - This is the per unit cost of the item. Recalculate Cost - Click this button to calculate the cost based on the Cost Each field. Sales Taxable - This is the CribMaster computed sales tax for this item. The information comes from inventory properties. Requires Inspection - This box denotes whether or not the item needs to be inspected before receiving into the crib/bin. The information comes from inventory properties. Dist Cost - This is the cost of the item from the distributor. The information comes from inventory properties. Send raw material with order - Check this box to have raw material sent with the item. WO No - Enter a work order number (if applicable). WO No - Click this button to located and select a work order. Cost Centers - Enter a funding source for this order (optional). NOTE: This information can be used with PO Detail reports to allocate cost at billing time. Cost Centers - Click this button to locate and select a cost center. Page 288 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Custom Fields - These are custom fields associated with Purchase Order Line Items.

Receiving Orders and Reworks

To receive orders or reworks, follow the directions below: 1. Click Purchasing > Receive Orders and Rework... The Select Items Being Received dialog box displays. 2. Select an item to receive. 3. Enter a quantity in the Recd column. 4. Do one of the following: Click Receive to complete the receipt. Click Scrap to send the item to scrap. Click To Inspection to send the item to inspection. The items are received.

Understanding the Select Items Being Received Screen

To access the Select Items Being Received screen, click Purchasing > Receive Orders and Rework... The Select Items Being Received screen displays:

Page 289 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to receive the selected item. Click here to mark the select order as complete. NOTE: This is done when not all of the order is received but you still want to designate it as complete. Click here to send the selected item to scrap. Click here to send the selected item to inspection. Click here to view receipts for all cribs. Click here to select all receipt records. Click here to clear all receipt records. Click here refresh the data to reflect recent changes.

Column Headers
Orderd - This is the outstanding quantity of the order or rework order. Recd - This is the quantity being received. TIP: Indicate an item is being received by entering the quantity here. Description - This is a description of the item. Item - This is the item ID.

Page 290 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Crib-Bin - This is the bin for which the order was placed. The item will be processed into this bin. TIP: You may click on the Crib/Bin field and the system will allow you to receive the item into a different Bin if other Bins exist for this item. Supplier PO - This is the internally generated Purchase Order number or the blanket purchase order number. Supplier - This is the supplier ID. UPC Code - This is the barcode scan field. NOTE: To use the UPC codes, you must have them entered in the item records on Inventory Properties > Inventory Information tab. Ordered - This is the date that the purchase order was generated. Confirm - This is the confirmation number from the PO line item detail. Supplier Item # - This is the supplier item number from the PO line item detail. PO Seq. - This is the sequence number of the line item on the Purchase Order. To Inspect - This is the date the line item was sent to inspection. Original Seq No - This is the line item sequence number. Cost - This is the per-unit cost. Description2 - This is a description of the item. Crib - This is the crib number. Special - This is the special field from the PO line item detail. No. - This is the database identifier for the selected line item.

Fields
Limit Display To - This section is used to select groups of items to work with. If you pick a Purchase Order number, the supplier is forced to match that Purchase Order. PO Number - If you have the CribMaster Purchase Order number for items being received, select that number from the PO Number combo. NOTE: If you select a Purchase Order number, the supplier is forced to match that Purchase Order.

Page 291 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Supplier - Select a supplier to filter the list of items to your selection. Crib - Select a crib to filter the list of items to your selection. Confirm Number - Enter a number in this field to have it inserted into the Confirm Number field on each PODetail record being processed when you press the Receive or Inspect button. Each Scan Represents - Select an option in this section to help define what each scan represents. One Item - Select this option to have the Recd quantity increase by one each quantity. One Case - Select this option to have the Recd quantity increase by one case quantity. All Ordered Of This Item - Select this option to have the Recd quantity increase by the entire ordered quantity. UPC/Bar Code --> - If you want to scan UPC codes or key a UPC code with the keyboard, put the cursor in this edit box. NOTE: You may scan CribMaster Item IDs from anywhere. These are printed on the CribMaster Purchase Order if you have it available. Serial Item Initialization - The options in this section specify how serial ID's are set. 1st SerialID - Creation of Serial records for serialized items will begin with this number. You can scan this number if you have barcodes coded with /S or /s. Serial Number - This text is placed in the serial number field on each serialized item processed when the Receive or Inspect button is pressed. The same text is placed in each record. Expiration - This date is placed in the expiration date of each serialized item processed when the Receive or Inspect button is pressed.

Inspecting Receipts
To inspect receipts, follow the directions below: 1. Click Purchasing > Inspect Receipts... The Items in Inspection dialog box displays. 2. Select an item to receive. 3. Do one of the following: Double-click the line of the item you want to receive to auto-populate the Recd column.

Page 292 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Enter a quantity in the Recd column. 4. Do one of the following: Click Receive to complete the receipt. Click Scrap to send the item to scrap. Click Fail Inspection to reject the item. Click Cancel Inspection to send the item back to item reception. The items are inspected.

Page 293 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Understanding the Items in Inspection Screen

To access the Items in Inspection screen, follow the directions below, click Purchasing > Inspect Receipts... The Items in Inspection screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon:

Icon Function

Click here to receive the selected item. Click here to send the selected item to scrap. Click here to fail the selected item. Click here to send the selected item back to the receive screen. Click here to view items for all cribs.

Page 294 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Click here to select all records. Click here to clear all records. Click here refresh the data to reflect recent changes.

Column Headers
Orderd - This is the outstanding quantity of the order or rework order. Recd - This is the quantity being received. TIP: Indicate an item is being received by entering the quantity here. Description - This is a description of the item. Item - This is the item ID. Crib-Bin - This is the bin for which the order was placed. The item will be processed into this bin. TIP: You may click on the Crib Bin field and the system will let you received the item to a different bin if other bins exist for this item. Supplier PO - This is the internally generated Purchase Order number or the blanket purchase order number. Supplier - This is the supplier ID. UPC Code - This is the barcode scan field. NOTE: To use the UPC codes, you must have them entered in the item records on Inventory properties > Inventory Information tab. Ordered - This is the date that the purchase order was generated. Confirm - This is the confirmation number from the PO Line item detail. Supplier Item # - This is the supplier item number from the PO Line item detail. PO Seq. - This is the sequence number of the line item on the Purchase Order.

Page 295 of 525

Understanding Purchasing To Inspect - This is the date the line item was sent to inspection. Original Seq No - This is the line item sequence number. Cost - This is the per-unit cost. Description2 - This is a description of the item. Crib - This is the crib number. Special - This is the special field from the PO line item detail. No. - This is the database identifier for the selected line item.

Fields
Limit Display To - This section is used to select groups of items to work with. If you pick a Purchase Order number, the supplier is forced to match that Purchase Order. PO Number - If you have the CribMaster Purchase Order number for items being received, select that number from the PO Number combo. NOTE: If you select a Purchase Order number, the supplier is forced to match that Purchase Order. Supplier - Select a supplier to filter the list of items to your selection. Crib - Select a crib to filter the list of items to your selection. Confirm Number - Enter a number in this field to have it inserted into the Confirm Number field on each PODetail record being processed when you press the receive or inspect button. Each Scan Represents - Select an option in this section help define what each scan represents. One Item - Select this option to have the Recd quantity increase by one each quantity. One Case - Select this option to have the Recd quantity increase by one case quantity. All Ordered Of This Item - Select this option to have the Recd quantity increase by the entire ordered quantity. UPC/Bar Code --> - If you want to scan UPC codes or key a UPC code with the keyboard, put the cursor in this edit box. NOTE: You may scan CribMaster Item IDs from anywhere. These are printed on the CribMaster Purchase Order if you have it available. Serial Item Initialization - The options in this section specify how serial ID's are set. Page 296 of 525

Understanding Purchasing 1st SerialID - Creation of Serial records for serialized items will begin with this number. You can scan this number if you have barcodes coded with /S or /s. Serial Number - This text is placed in the serial number field on each serialized item processed when the receive or inspect button is pressed. The same text is placed in each record. Expiration - This date is placed in the expiration date of each serialized item processed when the receive or inspect button is pressed.

Returning Purchased Items

To return items to the supplier, follow the steps below: 1. Click Purchasing > Return Purchased Items... The Purchased Items To Return To Supplier dialog box displays.

2. Click Add

. The Select Record dialog box displays:

3. Select an item to return. 4. 5. 6. 7. Click Click Click Click Purchase . Print to create a paper copy of the order (Optional). Send to send the order to another destination (Optional). Close. The purchase return is created. Page 297 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Understanding the Purchased Items To Return To Supplier Screen

To access the Purchased Items To Return To Supplier screen, click Purchasing > Return Purchased Items... The Purchased Items To Return To Supplier screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to process the return. Click here to purchase only items in the list. NOTE: If you use filters by searching or pressing Auto-Purchase, All Buyers, etc, then the set of records displayed in the list will change. Click here to display the add item dialog which allows you to add items manually to the list. Click here to input and change some additional information about each item you are ordering. Click here to remove an item from the list.

Page 298 of 525

Understanding Purchasing Click here to print a Pending Order Report based on the selected item. Click here to examine the selected item. Click here to retrieve the latest information from the database. Click here to select (place the suggested quantity in the Ordr column) for all items in the list. NOTE: If the list is restricted to items for one supplier with the Supplier Combo, then only items for that supplier are affected. Click here to clear all entries in the Ordr column for the items currently in the list. NOTE: If the list is restricted to items for one supplier with the Supplier Combo, then only items for that supplier are affected. Click here to show all buyer groups and remove buyer groups restrictions. Click here to have the list include autopurchased items. NOTE: This button maintains its setting each time the screen is invoked. Click here to list items from all sites. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search.

Supplier - Select a supplier from this drop-down. Freight - These are supplier-specific details regarding item shipment.

Page 299 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Freight/Supplier Column Headers

Sup # - This is the ID of the supplier. Min $ - This is the minimum dollar amount for an order for this supplier. Ord $ - This is the current amount authorized to order the quantity in the Ordr column. Tax - This is the sales tax computed only on the items marked "Sales Taxable" on the Inventory-Suppliers tab. Total - This is the total of the Ordered column + Tax. All Items - This is the total if you order everything suggested. PO # - This is the suppliers PO Number. NOTE: This is generated from the Blanket PO number and the release number in the suppliers record. You may modify the number for any PO whenever you want. Dt Reqd - This is the date required for the order. TIP: Anything can be entered here (i.e. ASAP). Shipping Instructs - These are the shipping instructions. NOTE: This comes from the Suppliers record but you may change it for any PO. Terms - These are the payment terms as they are displayed on the PO (i.e. Net 30).

Shipping Details and Additional Information

Mail PO To - Enter or edit the mailing address of the Purchase Order. ShipTo Address - Enter or edit the Ship To address of the Purchase Order. Bill To Address - Enter or edit the Bill To address of the Purchase Order. Notes - Enter any additional notes for a Purchase Order. NOTE: The notes will print on the Purchase Order. NOTE: You can print the Purchase Order and enter notes without printing the information onto a Purchase Order for delivery to a supplier.

Page 300 of 525

Understanding Purchasing

Column Headers
Qty - This is the quantity from the original order. Suggested Qty - This is the quantity that is suggested by the owner of the purchase order. Ordr - This is the quantity to be purchased. $ Each - This is the price of each item. NOTE: This number will change with the Ordr column when the supplier has a price break schedule. Cost - This is the Ordr column * $Each. Min - This is the minimum quantity for the primary supplier and the minimum quantity for the bin. Item - This is the Item ID. Auto - This field denotes auto-purchasing. Description - This is a description of the item. Desc2 - This is a description of the item. Supplier - This is the Supplier ID. Crib-Bin - This is the Crib-Bin ID. Bin Comment - This is the comment field from the Bin Information tab. Inv Comment - This is the inventory comment from the More tab. Comment - This is the comment for the individually purchased item. NOTE: This comment is entered on the Purchase Order Detail Item screen. You can later modify the comment on the Edit Purchase Order screen. Special - This is the special field from the Item Information tab in Inventory Properties. Buyer Group - This is the Buyer Group field from the Item Information tab in Inventory Properties. WO - This is the WO number for the order if using Preventive Maintenance. No. - This is the database identifier for the item. Consign - This field specifies whether or not the item is a consignment item. Type - This is the purchase type. Avg Mthly Usage - This is the average monthly usage for this bin. MTD Usage - This is the month to date usage for this bin, this month. Pl Qty - This is the Plant Quantity for this bin, which includes items that are checked out.

Page 301 of 525

Page 302 of 525

Managing Reports

Chapter 15: Managing Reports

Print Sequencing and Record Selection
Report Sequence refers to the order of the records listed on the report. For the transaction reports, the sequence also determines the subtotals. From / To: Whenever you are offered a place to enter a From and a To value to select the data you want included on the reports you are printing From Only: If you enter selection criteria in the From box only, CribMaster will retrieve only records that match your data exactly for the appropriate field. From = Field From and To: If you enter selection criteria for both the From and To fields, then you retrieve records between them i.e. From <= Field < To To Only: If you enter selection criteria for only the To field, you will retrieve records where the field is less than the value entered in the To section. Field < To Date From/To: Some dialogs also offer a place to enter a date range for the data. You may choose the date range for the records you want included on the report. The From and To rules for dates work just like other fields. Some records contain more than one date that you can use for selection. You may use any of the date fields offered but you may only use one date field range per report.

Page 303 of 525

Managing Reports

Sending Reports to Other Destinations

To send reports to other destinations, follow the steps below: 1. Access the dialog box of the report you want to send. 2. Click Send... The Print Destinations dialog box displays:

Print - This is the same as pressing the Print button unless you process it on the server. Server Print - This uses CmServer to print. This should be used for large print jobs. NOTE: This will print at the printer designated on the computer running CmServer. NOTE: This option is not recommended for large print jobs. Send - This uses the local modem to send via fax. NOTE: An additional fax application is required. Server Send - This uses the modem on the machine running CmServer to fax. NOTE: An additional fax application is required.

Page 304 of 525

Managing Reports EMail - Email uses MAPI or SMTP to send documents. This uses the local Microsoft Exchange or other email application to process these items for you. NOTE: To use this feature, you will need a connection to an email server. Server E-Mail - This uses the e-mail application on the machine running CmServer to process these items for you. Fax Number - To override the supplier's fax number, enter a new one here. NOTE: An additional fax application is required. EMail Address - This is the Email address where you want the report mailed. NOTE: CribMaster distinguishes an Email address from a fax number by the presence of the @ character in the address - as in sales@wwga.com or support@wwga.com or webmaster@wwga.com. NOTE: If the report is a purchase order, CribMaster will show the Email address of the supplier. If Multiple Purchase Orders are involved, the Email address will match the first one selected. TIP: You can fax or email reports to multiple recipients by separating the recipients with a semicolon. TIP: You may specify the Subject by appending colon Subject to the email address - as in support@wwga.com; moresupport@wwga.com :A delightful subject to discuss. TIP: You may email or export reports in several Crystal Report formats by entering the proper format specifier in the e-mail address. For example: "pdf: support@wwga.com"

Page 305 of 525

Managing Reports

Understanding Report Customizations

CribMaster reports are created and produced using a reporting package named "Crystal Reports" published by: Business Objects http://www.businessobjects.com/ US 800-877-2340 CribMaster supports drivers for Crystal Reports 8.5 through 10. Features in Crystal Reports 11 or greater may not be supported. 800-877-2340 WinWare will make changes or create custom reports at additional charge. You may purchase "Crystal Reports" and customize or create reports yourself if you wish. The following information will be helpful if you work on reports yourself. CribMaster reports are built with Crystal version 8.5. Reports compatible with version 7 are stored in the Crystal 7 directory on the CD. Reports compatible with version 5 and 6 are stored in the Crystal 6 directory on the CribMaster CD. The older version reports have not been updated as changes have been made since Crystal was updated. Most reports can be modified with Crystal standard version a few require the professional version. Each report template is a separate file with the extension .RPT. These files are located in the CribMaster data directory that is probably C:\Program Files\CribMast\Data. All the .RPT files in this directory are distributed with CribMaster and CribMaster knows the names of the .RPT files. Each time CribMaster looks for one of these files, it looks first in the Data\Custom directory that is probably C:\Program Files\CribMast\Data\Custom. If the file is found in the custom directory, CribMaster will use the custom file instead of the normal file. This allows you to copy any of these files to the custom directory and modify them without fear of losing your work on a reinstall. CribMaster only installs files to the data directory - not the custom directory. You may also customize a report for a particular crib by placing the report in a sub directory of the Custom directory that has the crib number as in (for crib 3): C:\Program Files\CribMast\Data\Custom\3 Specific Printer: You may direct a custom report to a specific printer by placing the printer name in a formula named "Specific Printer". (Add a new formula in the report named Specific Printer and place the name

Page 306 of 525

Managing Reports of the printer in Quotes for the formula text.) The list of valid printer entries can be seen by going to the computer where the report will execute and choosing the Printer dropdown on any of CribMasters report dialogs. Use the printer name up to the word on where the port is displayed. For Example: If the printer name reads: \\PUBLIC_3\HP LaserJet 4 on LPT1:, then your formula entry would be: "\\PUBLIC_3\HP LaserJet 4" WARNING: If you place a modified .RPT file in the Custom directory, you will not see updates to the report controlled by that file. Actually, you receive the updates and they are placed in the data directory, but CribMaster does not use them because the override file is still in the Custom directory. There is nothing wrong with this - it is just something to keep in mind when you have customized reports. In addition to the .RPT files in the data directory, CribMaster distributes reports in the Data\AddRpts directory that is probably C:\Program Files\CribMast\Data\AddRpts. CribMaster does not know the name of these reports and any .RPT files in this directory are displayed as available for printing on CribMasters Additional Reports Dialog. You may place new reports in this directory and they will be displayed on CribMasters Additional Reports Dialog. Expect future releases of CribMaster to distribute more reports for this directory so make sure to have backups (do this anyway) of all your custom .RPT files just in case CribMaster distributes a new report with the same name as you chose for your report. In addition, you may customize the reports in the AddRpts directory by creating the AddRpts\Custom directory and making a copy of the report there. This directory will probably be C:\Program Files\CribMast\Data\AddRpts\Custom (depending on the directory where you installed CribMaster). CribMaster now allows you more control than ever over the reports it invokes. You can directly maintain the list of reports displayed on each of the CribMaster report dialogs.

Page 307 of 525

Managing Reports

Using Crystal Free Form Selection Criteria

To access the Crystal Free Form Selection Criteria dialog box, follow the steps below: 1. Access the dialog box of the report with which you want to work. 2. Click the More tab. The Crystal Free Form Selection Criteria dialog box displays. This dialog box allows you to specify additional selection criteria for your report. Some of these items may be specified on the main reporting dialog if you choose the corresponding report sequence.

Sorting and Grouping - Each of these drop-downs contains fields which you can use to sort the information on the report. You can select up to four sorting fields. Ascending - Check this box to sort the items in ascending order. Otherwise, they will be sorted in descending order. Additional Selection Criteria Use this box to add more details to filter your results to a more refined list: Free Form Label - The information entered here will print in the report header. Page 308 of 525

Managing Reports

Crystal Free Form Formula for Additional Selection Criteria - allows you to enter free form selection criteria. This selection criteria will be sent to the Crystal Reports engine exactly as you enter it. NOTE: To use this feature, you will need to use Crystal Reports selection formulas. Crystal uses fully qualified field names enclosed in braces {TableName.FileName}, for example: {Inventry.Special} {Inventry.ItemNumber} {Inventry.Price} {Inventry.ItemType} Strings must be placed in double or single quotes: {Inventry.Special} = Jell-O {Inventry.Special} = "Jell-O" Numbers do not use quotes: ({Inventry.ItemType}=1 or {Inventry.ItemType}=3) Locate empty fields using the IsNull() function: IsNull({Inventry.Special}) or NOT IsNull({Inventry.Comment}) Additional Crystal RPT file name to use - This section allows you to produce a report using any report template you have defined. Enter the name of the Rpt file here. NOTE: Not all templates are valid for all parameter screens. Selections are generated expecting particular records to be available in the templates. The easiest way to create a valid report is to look at or copy stock reports that are shipped with CribMaster for given report parameter dialogs.

Page 309 of 525

Managing Reports

Working with Scheduled Reports

Scheduling a Report
To schedule a report, follow the steps below: 1. Access the screen of the report you want to schedule. 2. Set the necessary parameters and filters. 3. Click Schedule... The Schedule Recurring Print Job dialog box displays. 4. Enter a Schedule Name. 5. Set the Job Execution Interval. 6. Set Actions for the created reports. 7. Click Save. The report is scheduled. NOTE: Reports that are scheduled in versions of CribMaster 7.9 and earlier can be read by CribMaster 9. But reports scheduled in CribMaster 9 cannot be read in CribMaster 7.9 or earlier.

Running Schedule Reports

To execute a scheduled report, follow the steps below: 1. Click Reports > Scheduled Reports... The Report Schedules screen displays. 2. Select a report to run. . 3. Click Properties 4. Click Execute. A confirmation dialog box displays. 5. Click Yes. A dialog box displays stating that the report was sent to CM Server. 6. Click OK.

Page 310 of 525

Managing Reports Using the List of Scheduled Print Jobs Dialog Box This is the Report Schedules Screen:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function This button is disabled on this screen. New report schedules are created on their respective report screens when a user enters their parameters and clicks Schedule. Click here to access the properties of the selected report schedule. Click here to remove the selected report schedule. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode. Column Headers Description - This is a description of the report. Created By - This is the user that created the report. Run Interval - This is when the report is set to run. Custom Interval - This is the custom date range type. Run Time - This is the amount of time it takes to run the report. Next Run - This is when the report is scheduled to run next. Last Run - This is when the report last ran. File Name - This is the file name of the report. Server Print? - If the Server Print option is checked, "Yes" displays in this column. Fax - This is the number to which the report will be automatically sent. Email To - This is the e-mail address to which the report will be automatically sent. Date Created - This is the date the report was created. No. - This is the database identifier for this item. Page 311 of 525

Managing Reports

Editing a Scheduled Report

To edit a scheduled report, follow the steps below: 1. Click Reports > Scheduled Reports... The List of Scheduled Print Jobs dialog box displays. 2. Select a report to edit. . The Report Schedule pane displays. 3. Click Properties 4. Make any necessary changes. . The changes are made and will be reflected the next 5. Click time the report is run.

Setting Up an Action for Scheduled Reports

To set up an action for a scheduled report, follow the steps below: 1. Access the screen of the report you want to schedule. 2. Click Schedule... The Schedule Recurring Print Job dialog box displays. 3. Enter a Schedule Name. 4. Select an Execution Interval. 5. Enter a Start Time. TIP: To enter the current time, click < -- Set Current Time. 6. Enter or select a Next Run Date. 7. Enter an EMail Address, FTP Address or filename. 8. Click Save.

Using the Schedule Recurring Print Job Screen

To access the Schedule Recurring Print Job screen, follow the steps below: 1. Access the dialog box of the report you want to schedule. 2. Click Schedule... The Schedule Recurring Print Job screen displays:

Page 312 of 525

Managing Reports

Schedule by: - This is the user who created the schedule. Schedule Name - This is a description of the report and settings. Maintain Compatibility with CribMaster 7.9 and earlier - Ensure this box is checked if the scheduled report was created in CribMaster 7.9 or earlier. Job Execution Interval - Use these fields to designate when the report runs. Execute the Job - Use this drop-down to set the frequency with which this report is meant to run. Start Time - Enter a time of day for the report to run. <-- Set Current Time - Click this button to set the Start Time to the current time. Next Run Date - This field auto-populates based on the above settings. Last Run Date - After the report has been scheduled and run, this field displays the last time the report ran. Page 313 of 525

Managing Reports Server Print - Check this box to have CM Server send the report to its default printer. Email To / File / FTP To - Enter the destination(s) into this area. TIP: In order keep CribMaster from overwriting reports with the same name, you can add codes to the filename to add the data and/or time to help differentiate between them. $T$ - Add this code to add the time the report was created. $D$ - Add this code to add the date the report was created. $DT$ - Add this code to add the date and time the report was created.

Page 314 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Functions

Chapter 16: Using Administration

Using the Configuration Tab
To access the Configuration tab, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Options... The Crib Options dialog box displays. 2. Click the Configuration tab. The Configuration tab displays:

Page 315 of 525

Using Administration Functions The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to save changes made to configuration settings. Click here to undo changes made to configuration settings. Click here to access the audit history dialog box. Use this text box to search for a particular keyword in the options list. Click here to open all headings on the configuration screen. Click here to close all headings on the configuration screen.

Options
General Show warning messages - Certain informational or warning messages will display, if selected. Example...When creating a new bin, if no inventory item has been associated with the new bin, you will be warned before the new bin information is stored. Save database messages in log file - Certain exception messages are logged to a file named databasename.log, when selected. This should be used if troubleshooting a problem. Close report dialogs automatically after Print or Preview (Local) - the report dialog box will close immediately after print or preview, if selected. The report dialogs will remain open until you press the close button, if unselected. This makes it easy to preview a report and then print it. It is also useful when entering parameters for a report to verify the choices without losing them when the dialog closes.

Page 316 of 525

Using Administration Functions Enable separate security privileges for primary and non-primary cribs Each user will have two sets of permissions (primary and nonprimary), if selected. There will be a new crib access tab within the employee properties where the primary crib(s) can be designated. The primary and non-primary access can be granted or denied on the employee properties access tab. Also require transaction privileges for CribMaster ATR (vending equipment) - Separate security permissions will apply to the ATR, if selected. Otherwise, the ATR ignores the security settings and users will have access to all ATRs. Use large critical alert message format - The default critical alert message is constructed with a cell phone in mind so that the message is small. If sending alerts to people with a normal email system, this option will send messages with more information. Applies only to items marked with a critical point within the bin properties. The alert email is set at either the crib or supplier properties. Small Critical Alert Message includes Item Number - Include the Item Number in the message for Small Critical Alert message. This means the message will be longer and could cause the description to be truncated on systems where the space for the message allowed is small (Cell phones). Applies only to items marked with a critical point within the bin properties. Enable Common Numbering System (CNS) - This enables the CNS tab for additional CNS options, if selected. A Common Item Numbers menu will appear, as well as a CNS tab within the inventory properties. Enable Data Warehouse (DW) views and report - Enables the link to the data warehouse. Appropriate data source for the warehouse database must be selected before this will work properly. (Enterprise Only) Enable external sale/auction interface - This enables the Broker/Auction tab for additional Auction configuration options, if selected. Additional icons will appear on the Crib/Bin records screen.

Page 317 of 525

Using Administration Functions Automatic Purchase Option CribMaster will automatically look for items that need to be ordered and generate POs when there is enough need to meet the supplier minimum dollar amounts for an order. Purchase Orders are produced; then printed, faxed or EDI files are produced based on the settings on the Supplier Properties Purchasing Info tab. If not using the automatic purchasing feature, then from time to time Authorize Purchasing dialog must be invoked to generate Purchase Orders. Auto-purchase normally runs as part of the dayend processes; however the start time can be designated below. Manually purchase all items - This disables Automatic Purchasing for all items, if selected. The calculations are still performed and needs are placed in the Order Now quantity. POs are not generated automatically at midnight and must be produced manually via the Authorize Purchasing dialog. Auto-purchase only designated items - If selected, Automatic Purchasing is enabled but only for specific items designated on the Inventory Properties Supplier tab or on the Bin Properties Order Information tab. All other items must be manually approved using the Authorize Purchasing dialog. Auto-purchase all items - If selected, this enables auto purchased for all items without the need to check the Auto Purchase check box on the Inventory Properties Supplier tab or on the Bin Properties Order Information tab. No Autopurchase on Saturday - If selected, CribMaster will skip auto purchase on Saturday. This will also skip the automatic generation of transfers for restocking. No Autopurchase on Sunday - If selected, CribMaster will skip auto purchase on Sunday. This will also skip the automatic generation of transfers for restocking. Autopurchase start hour (0-23 default=0=midnight) (Local) - If selected, start of the daily processing of the CribMaster Server program will be delayed until a specific hour of the day. This is a local option and must be set at the computer where the CribMaster Server program runs. The default for this option is "0."

Page 318 of 525

Using Administration Functions Also Print Faxed/Emailed POs - If selected, a printed copy is created when purchase orders with auto purchased items are produced that are faxed or emailed. Otherwise, only the fax/email is sent and there is no hard copy produced automatically. Auto-purchase reviewed ordering requirements immediately - If selected, items designated as auto purchase will be purchased immediately when the suggested quantity is entered and saved in the Review Ordering Requirements screen. Auto Backup CmServer can automatically make a copy of your database each day. NOTE: This option is not available for ORACLE database. Perform auto-backup - This option has the system automatically back up the database during day-end processing. Keep 7 Rolling Backups - This is the recommended number of backups to keep, but will require more disk space. Optional Backup Path (CmServer) - This allows you to save the backup to another location. The backup is always done by CmServer, so this path must be valid for the computer where CmServer runs. It is always preferable to route backups to a different disk drive when possible. If your computer is on a network, you should route these backups to a different computer (Preferably in another location). Issue/Return Options Enable scheduled price/consignment flag changes - If selected, this option enables the scheduled price change feature of CribMaster. The button next to the Override Issue Price on the Bin Properties is enabled to allow you to schedule price changes. Confirm quantities of issued Items - If selected, before completion of an issue, a count message is displayed for verification of quantity. Allow Bulk Issue - If selected, the feature allows a Bulk quantity to be issued that would bring the bin to Order Point. Used only with CMSCAN. This provides a convenient way to manage items that are ordered by inspecting bin levels. See Understanding Bulk Mode.

Page 319 of 525

Using Administration Functions Allow items to be issued from other cribs/areas - If selected, users will be permitted to issue items from a crib other than the one selected for the computer they are using when they click the All Cribs button. Verify zero bin quantity at issue time - If selected, CribMaster will ask the user to verify that the bin is empty each time the last item is issued from a bin. When verified, CribMaster marks the bin as having been counted. Time Limit for "recently issued items" list (days) - This specifies how far back CribMaster will look when preparing the list of recently issued items. Recently issued items for an employee will be listed by selecting the Recently Issued button in the issue item screen. The default for this option is "30." Warn if repeating recent similar issue - If selected, a list of all similar issued items will be displayed with the specified number of days at issue time. A similar issue is an issue of this item with the same user defined type choices. Warn if duplicate parts checked out by same employee - If selected, a message will be displayed at issue time when duplicate parts are checked out. Require ISSUE permission for CribMaster Remote - If selected, permission is required to issue an item. Otherwise, all employees are allowed to issue items. Require scan of Employee badge to return FOD control item - If selected, the employee badge must be scanned to return a FOD controlled item. By default, the employee number may be typed in order to return a FOD control item. Consignment Item Return Options Allow return of new reworkable items to new bins Always (Consignment or Non-Consignment) New reworkable items are returned to the origination bin. Non-Consignment bins only Never - New reworkable items are returned to the rework bin.

Page 320 of 525

Using Administration Functions Permit consigned durables to be returned to consignment bin - If selected, consigned durables may be returned to consignment bin. Transaction Reason Codes Select events that require Transaction reason codes If selected, a dialog selection message appears and asks for a reason code that will be placed in the comment of the transaction. Some events support a default reason code. Events include: Returning Items Adjusting Bins Counting Bins Scrapping Items Returning Items Unusable or Defective Deleting a Transfer

Overdue Item Options Overdue Item Options - When items are overdue, one of the following will occur. No warning when checked out items are overdue. Warn when checked out items are overdue - A warning message displays. Prevent issues when checked out items are overdue - A stop message displays at issue.

Elapsed time before check out items are considered overdue (days) - A number of days entered here will cause a DUE date to be entered in each CheckOut record that is created for returnable items that are issued. This can be overridden at bin, crib, or item properties. The default for this option is "0." Time offset in hours to Due Date to accommodate shifts (0=use integral days) - This is used to offset due dates by hours to have items due back to the crib at the end of the shift (or less than a 24 hr day). If entered here the DUE date is computed by combining the number of hours with the overdue Page 321 of 525

Using Administration Functions days in the option above: hours + ((Entered Time Limit-1) *24 hours. The default for this option is "0." Item Limits Enable Item Limit Checking - If selected, this will limit the quantity of an item to be issued over a time span (number of days defined below.) Default Item Limit Time Interval (Days) - If entered, this keeps you from having to enter the number of days when specifying issue limits. You can override a different number of days for any limit you enter. The default for this option is "1." Transaction Count Limits Provides a warning when working on a large number of items at one time. This applies to Returning and Sending gauges to calibration. No Limit Display warning - Warning only but allows the user to continue. Block transactions when limit exceeded Forces the user to break the transaction into smaller groups.

Maximum transaction count (0=no limit) - Enter the threshold for triggering the limit feature. The default for this option is "10." Allow Items to be Returned to Alternate Locations Yes - This option allows returns to be rerouted to a different bin or create a new bin for the item Yes, but only within the same crib/area as the original destination - This option allows the user to reroute returns or create a new bin for the item but only if the destination is within the same crib/area as the original transfer. No - Items must be returned to the original location.

Page 322 of 525

Using Administration Functions Print Labels for Issued Items None All Item Types Selected Item Types - Enter the item types for triggering the printing feature

Transaction Cost Global cost ratio - If entered, this ratio will be used to calculate an issue price based on the item cost for any item issued where the price is not specified at the item or overridden at bin level. FIFO Accounting Options NOTE: These options are Enterprise Only. Enable FIFO cost accounting - If selected, cost can be used for cost calculation. NOTE: FIFO history can also be used for cost calculation. NOTE: Enable FIFO tracking can be selected at the bin properties. Purge FIFO records when quantity is depleted Select this option to delete FIFO records when the associated inventory is gone. Retain original date when transferring inventory Select this option to keep the original date in tact when items are transferred. Credit percentage for RETN transactions (0-100) Use this field to determine the credit return transactions. The default for this option is "0." Credit percentage for RTOPN transactions (0-100) Use this field to determine the credit return-topending transactions. The default for this option is "0."

Page 323 of 525

Using Administration Functions Print Options Preview print jobs before printing (Local) - This applies to print jobs that are produced automatically. When this is checked, the reports will appear in a preview window instead of going directly to the printer. Print report automatically when items are issued (Local) If selected, a pick list is automatically generated when items are issued. The pick list may also be printed using printer button on the issue toolbar even when this is turned off. Print report automatically when items are reserved (Local) - If selected, this will print the reservation report when a new reservation is created. Print report automatically when reservation is approved (Local) - If selected, this will print the reservation report when the reservation is approved. Print receipts when items are returned (Local) - If selected, this will print an items returned receipt for items returned. Automatically print a receive report when items are received - If selected, this will print a receiving report when items are received. Automatically produce the transfer report each morning If selected, this will print a transfer report each morning when applicable. Automatically print transfer label when tracking transfers created (Local) - This option creates and sends a label to the label printer for your crib if receiving for a crib other than the crib assigned to the local computer. Automatically print transfer sheet when tracking transfers created (Local) - This option causes a transfer sheet (8 x 11) to print when a transfer is created. NOTE: The Tracking Transfer option must be enabled.

Page 324 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Print Employee Checked Out Item report when items are issued (Local) - This option causes the EmployeeCheckout.rpt to print for the issued to employee when items are issued. Print Report for FOD Employees Only (Local) - This option only produces the report if the Employee is marked FOD on the Employee property page. Print Employee Checked Out Item report when items are returned (Local) - This option causes the EmployeeCheckout.rpt to print for the returning employee when items are returned. Print Report for FOD Employees Only (Local) - Only produces the report if the Employee is marked FOD on the Employee property page. Print report when assembly issued is non-Complete state (Local) - This option causes the kit status report to print when an assembly is issued with a status of verification required or transfers pending. Automatically print report when gauge status change is detected (Local) - If selected, this will print a report when the gauge status is changed. Gauge/Serialized Options Allow gauges to be issued if calibration past due - If selected, a warning message will appear when issuing a gauge past calibration date. Allow gauges to be issued/transferred if inactive - If selected, a gauge with a status of inactive may be issued. The gauge is no longer in inactive status once the gauge has been issued. This option is used with delayed dating. Allow re-issue of checked out Serial ID to another employee - if selected, serialized items can be re-issued to an alternate employee without returning. Default display precision for calibration measurement This is the default precision for gauge measurements. This

Page 325 of 525

Using Administration Functions can be overridden in Inventory Properties. The default for this option is "4." Prevent updates to completed calibration records - If selected, completed calibration records cannot be modified. Local override for next auto-generated SerialID - This value is used for the next Serial ID to be added. A new "incremented" value is generated and stored if the new Serial ID is saved. Normally serial ID's are generated based on the last serial ID for all cribs (global). With this option enabled, each crib (local PC) can have there own serial ID range. Receive new Gauges directly into "In Calibration" status If selected, received gauges are sent to calibration. Show current Checkout user-defined fields in serial ID view - If selected, the UDFs will display on the records list for serialized items in Checked Out status. Enable RFID "Last Seen" tracking - If selected, serialized items are tracked via RFID readers. Auto-select Serial ID Option Enable auto-selection on this computer (Local) - this option automatically selects the serial ID when only one is available in crib/bin. Only when there is not a choice(e.g. only one is available) Most time since last use (stock rotation) Latest projected calibration or expiration date Allow use of Inactive status - This option restricts the change of Inactive status for gauges: No special restrictions If gauge has not been issued since last calibration Only for gauges in status In Calibration

Prompt for Status Reason Code Option - Select the statuses that will prompt the user for a reason code: Page 326 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Unassigned Checked In Checked Out Inactive Out of Service Scrapped In Assembly In Calibration Lost Off-Site In Repair Unusable

Serial ID Return Option - This indicates whether the Serial ID can be returned (or issued) from another crib. This field provides for a per Serial ID override of the global return option. The option Types are: Return allowed only to Home Crib - when a Serialized tool is returned, it is always returned to its current assigned location regardless of where the transaction was performed. Return anywhere with automatic transfer back to home crib When a serialized tool is returned to a crib other than the home crib, it is temporarily assigned to a location in the crib to which it was returned. A transfer request is automatically created to transfer the tool to its home crib. A temporary location will be created in the returned-to crib if necessary. Other use of the tool will be blocked. Return anywhere with Home Crib assignment change to return location - The home crib will be automatically switched (optional) to the returned-to crib provided a permanent location exists for the tool. If a permanent location for the tool already exists, the user will be prompted as to whether the home location for the tool should be assigned to the corresponding tool room. If a permanent location does not exist (or the user does not confirm the reassignment), the behavior described in (2) above will apply: The tool will be transferred back to its home crib.

Page 327 of 525

Using Administration Functions Gauge Item Return Options Return allowed only to Home Crib Return anywhere with automatic transfer back to home crib Return anywhere with Home Crib Assignment change to return location

Automatically Reassign Home Crib When Transferred NOTE: These options only apply to transfers of Serialized Items. Yes Prompt No Gauge Calibration Status Display Options - This option displays a status dialog for specified events. Do not display calibration status Display calibration status after gauge is issued Display calibrations status only when gauge is activated. Gauge Usage Days Calculation Options - The days used to calculate usage can be specified. Allow manual recalculation of usage days Ignore holidays when calculating usage days Days of week to ignore when calculating usage days o Sunday o Monday o Tuesday o Wednesday o Thursday o Friday o Saturday Review/Edit Custom Fields When Item Issued - When a serialized item is issued, a custom field serial ID dialog box will display for review or edit. No All Item Types Selected Item Types: o Durable

Page 328 of 525

Using Administration Functions o Gauges o Kits Kit/Assembly Options Verify kit parts at return time - If selected, the inspect kit / assembly dialog box will display for each kit being returned. Kit quantities can be replenished via this dialog. If unselected, kits are moved directly to the bin for verification later and can be received with RF scanners. Kit "Where Used" display - This option controls the behavior of the "In Kits" tab on the Inventory property pages: Do not show - The "In Kits" tab never displays in the inventory properties. Show if applicable (impacts performance) - Does not show the "In Kits" tab unless the item is in at least one kit. Show always - The "In Kits" tab will always appear but the page will be empty if the item is not used in any kits. Transaction Option for Assembly Components (by component type) - This option specifies which serialized types will get ISSKT and RETKT transactions generated. These transactions are created in addition to the ISSRT and RETN transactions produced for the assembly and are intended to help track history for each component. ISSKT and RETKT are memo transactions that are generated for serialized assemblies within an assembly (SubAssemblies). This gives you an audit trail to show where Sub-Assemblies are used even when they are assembled into a parent kit. Send Overdue Gauges to Calibration Upon Returning Assembly - This option will determine how/when overdue gauges are sent to calibration status: Never Automatically for all overdue gauges Display list for user to select which gauges to send to calibration

Page 329 of 525

Using Administration Functions Copy values of corresponding custom fields from Assembly to component Serial ID when issued - This option will copy the value information from the custom fields of an assembly to the components when the assembly is issued. Batch Transaction Options Process batch transactions automatically Use upload date/time for all batch transactions instead of PDT Date/Time - Select this option to use the system date rather than the date on the scanner. Synchronize batch transactions according to actual time on PDT (Not Recommended) Reject COUNT Transaction if more recent transaction exists Synchronize COUNT Transaction with adjustment as required Record COUNT Transaction with reason code and without adjustment o Reason Code when adjustment required [ ]: o Reason Code when adjustment NOT required [ ]: Process COUNT Transaction with current date and time: This is used when the time on the scanner is not carefully maintained. Number of days a Batch transaction can be preserved without importing. Error Tolerance Low Medium High Create additional ISSUE or RETN transactions for serialized items as necessary - Allows CribMaster to process issue and return transactions for serial items.

Page 330 of 525

Using Administration Functions Receive Options Confirm Over Receives and Under Receives - This option causes a warning message to be displayed when receive differences are encountered. Under receives are only warned when the item is marked COMPLETE. Percent tolerance for receive differences - This option is used in conjunction with the option above this will display the warning message if the difference is less than this percentage. The percentage is calculated as relative to the original order quantity of the line item being received. Unreceive time limit in Days (0=No Limit): [0] - This sets the amount of time before a user is unable to undo a receive function. This will present an error message that prevents unreceive after the set date. Password Options Require passwords for CribMaster users - Check this option to require a password when adding new employee records. Expire password immediately when changed by another user - Check this option to force a user to change their password the first time they log on after a password change by an administrator. Restrict passwords to numeric only - Check this option to only allow numeric passwords. NOTE: Numeric passwords are suggested if you are using CmScan. Default password expiration interval in days (0=none) Use this option to set the number of days before a user's password expires. Minimum password length (0=none) - Use this option to set the number of characters for the password.

Page 331 of 525

Using Administration Functions Login Options Disable user login auditing - Select this option to prevent CribMaster from keeping track of a user's logins. Enable user login auditing - Select this option to have CribMaster from keep track of a user's logins. Maximum failed login before locking account (min 3 times) - Set the number of times a user can fail a login before their account is locked. Duration of account lockout period (minutes) - Set the amount of time (in minutes) that a user's account stays locked. Maximum login idle time before disabling account login (60 day minimum, -1=never disable login) - Set the amount of idle time that must pass before a user's account is disabled. TIP: Enter "-1" for this option to keep CribMaster from disabling an account based on idle time. Date to begin enforcement of login account disabling - Set the date on which you want the system to enforce account disabling. Minimum time period to prevent user from reusing the same password - Set the amount of time that must pass before a user may once again use a previously used password. Show prior login status notification Never Only for unsuccessful login attempts Always o Display login message text - Enter text here to have it display when users log in.

Page 332 of 525

Using Administration Functions CribMaster Server Disable automatic launch of CribMaster Server (Local) This is useful if you have moved CmServer to another location and do not want it to start each time CribMaster starts. Automatically Print Unprinted POs (Local) - This instructs CmServer to print automatically any POs that have not been printed. This is used by distributors who are using CmLink to have customer databases replicated to their offices and then print the POs. CmServer - Use CmPrint for synchronous scheduled report printing - CmPrint is a separate program that can produce reports so you can have multiple reports being generated simultaneously. Max Simultaneous Reports Running Using CmPrint CmServer will wait to launch more reports than this until some of them finish. The default for this option is "5." Copy Options to CribMaster Service (Local) - Duplicates some options in the registry for CmServer when CmServer is running as a Service. Disable Server Fax - This is useful when the Server computer is not set up to send Fax messages. Disable Server Email - This is useful when the Server computer is not set up to send EMail or Fax messages. This will be disabled on the send and schedule report dialog. Enable remote log viewing - Check this option to make the remote log available for view under View > Advanced > CribMaster Server Log... CmServer will need to be restarted before the log will be available. Override ODBC query Timeout (0 = indefinite, -1=no override) - Enter an override for ODBC query timeouts to have the system continue to try to connect to the database. The default for this option is "-1."

Page 333 of 525

Using Administration Functions Monitoring interval for incoming job requests (local) - This option sets the amount of time CribMaster Server "sleeps" before coming back online to check for jobs. The default for this option is "60." Send ATR down Alerts after number seconds (0 = No alerts): [0] - Will send an alert when ATR goes down for a set number of seconds. The alert is sent to the email alert address on the crib properties. Network Paths Update Files - This path is used for temporary "message" files used to communicate between the application and the CribMaster Server process (COSERVER.EXE.). Application users require read, write, and modify privileges on this directory. Shared Report Files - This folder contains the Crystal Reports .RPT files used by the Crystal Reports Engine. NOTE: Application users require read access to this directory. Override path for custom report files (optional) - If necessary, you can enter an alternate path for custom report files. Image Files - This is the location for toolbar bitmaps and pictures. (Optional) Log Files - This is the location for database exception logs and other log files (Optional). NOTE: The CribMaster database logging feature ("Save database messages in log file" option) will not operate unless this directory is specified. Email Attachments Drop Box - This is the path to the folder where you want to save e-mail attachments for reports set as "sensitive" or "restricted."

Page 334 of 525

Using Administration Functions ATR Status Options ATR Status Options - ATR will report the status based on the options below. ATR Status will refresh after this time interval (seconds)(Local) - Enter a time limit before ATR Status is refreshed. The default for this option is "60." ATR Devices are considered in failure if reporting this late (seconds)(Local) - Enter an amount of time that must pass before a non-reporting device is considered in failure. The default for this option is "60." CMProxy Authentication banner part 1 - Use this option to determine what displays on the screen when a session is authenticated. Authentication banner part 2 - Use this option to determine what displays on the screen when a session is authenticated. Handshake frequency (minutes) - This option sets the amount of time to reconnect with the scanner if idle. The default for this option is "1." Terminate connection after idle period (minutes) - This option sets the amount of time CmProxy is idle before disconnect. The default for this option is "5." Maximum connection time limit (hours) - This option sets the amount of time CmProxy is connected. Sweep frequency for termination of idle and long term This option sets how often CmProxy checks to see if the connection has been idle or active for longer than the maximum amount of time. The default for this option is "1."

Page 335 of 525

Using Administration Functions Camera Options Number of Days to Store Images - Enter a number of days before the system removes an image. The default for this option is "14." Take Picture on ISSUE button (Local) - Check this box to have the camera take a picture of someone issuing an item. Take Picture on RETURN button (Local) - Check this box to have the camera take a picture of someone returning an item. Advanced Truncate character strings which exceed field size (Enterprise Only) - Check this box to have CribMaster automatically cut characters off of strings that are too long. Use SQLExecuteDirect instead of SQLPrepare/Execute (Enterprise Only) - SQL ExecuteDirect will slow down performance with the database connected. Maximum length for text fields - Enter a maximum length of characters for text entry fields. The default for this option is "255." Timeout interval for keyboard barcode parser(ms) (Local) Used for wedge scanners. The default for this option is "500." TIP: 500 is a good number if you are using a keyboard wedge. TIP: Enter 0 if you are not using a keyboard wedge to turn this off. Enable virtual list mode (if supported) (Local) - This option uses the virtual list features of comctl32 version 4.71 and higher. This includes grid lines and rearranges column headers.

Page 336 of 525

Using Administration Functions Allow list columns to be rearranged (if supported) (Local) This option allows you to grab column headers with the left mouse button and drag them to a new location in the list. CribMaster will remember the column settings you create for each list. Display list grid lines (if supported) (Local) - This option turns on grid lines. Process batch transactions automatically - If this option is not selected, batch data is stored until released manually. Enable DAO 3.60 support (Access 2000 .MDB file format) Check this box if you convert your database to Access 2000 format. Logon user name for printing (override) - Enter the ODBC logon user name. CE Software Update Path (Location of latest Cabs) - If you are using Windows CE devices, you can place updates for the software running on these devices in a central directory located here so that all the devices can upload it. Disable automatic database upgrade - This option is used to prevent accidental upgrades when test data is upgraded. Most customers do not need this option. You will need to turn this off to get the database upgraded each time you accept a new release of CribMaster. EMail Attachment Maximum size allowed in Bytes (0 no limit) - This option sets a limit on the size of e-mail attachments. Disable floating point exceptions (local) - Some older CPUs get floating point exceptions (crashes) in Crystal Report generation. This will prevent the problem on this computer only. Allow only Administrator to view/change Badge Number This option protects the Badge Number field on the Employee property page. Any users that does not have enough security permissions will not see the badge.

Page 337 of 525

Using Administration Functions Disable search for Employee ID on Sign On screen - This is done for security purposes so other employees cannot select other employee's id's until they get one that will allow them in to the system. The look up button will not display on the screen. Automatically delete partially completed transfers (Fill and Kill) - This option removes transfers when any partial amount is completed for the transfer. The assumption is that you moved as many of the items as you wanted and the transfer will be recreated if you decide to move more later. This does not apply to transfers that have been initiated (left one bin but not received into the destination bin yet). This also does not apply to transfers that are generated automatically for "Stock From Bin" situations. Track Receipts in Other Cribs with Crib Transfers (Enterprise Only) When items are received in another crib, a temporary bin is created (Bin number is $TransferID) and the quantity is stored there until the item reaches its destination. The temporary bin may move from crib to crib (Track transactions) Automatically prompt for tracking location when initiating transfers - Check this option to track transfers. This will cause the Track Transfer dialog box to display when initiating a transfer. Automatically retry database connection at application startup time (Local) Enable automatic self-approval of reservations - Check this option to allow those who create reservations to have them approved immediately. (Transaction-approve reservation permissions required). Use time from database server for transaction times. (Enterprise Only) - Check this option to use the database server clock. Time offset from database server time (Hours). (Enterprise Only) - This is useful if the database server is in a different time zone.

Page 338 of 525

Using Administration Functions Use SMTP mail instead of MAPI (Please Configure SMTP Mail) - This option allows emails to be sent without using Outlook or other MAPI server. When checked, additional SMTP mail tab will display in CribMaster Options. Enable Pick Item Functionality - This option enables the Pick Item Screen for use with Crib Space Tracking. Enable Restock Transfer functionality - Check this option to allow for Restock Transfers. For use with crib space tracking. Use Dialup connection to connect to Internet if not already connected - Use this option if you are still using a dial up connection. Enable PO Detail Reason Code line item editing options Check this option to allow users to edit line items on purchase orders. Set default choice for po line item editing - These options help define the option above. Edit PO Line items for all transactions in this set Edit this PO line item only Do not edit this PO line item Days to retain "drop box" attachment files (0 = indefinitely): [7] - This is the amount of time for maintaining an email attachment in the dropbox, which is defined on the Paths tab. Email domains allowed for "Sensitive\Restricted" reports: [ ] - This option sets which domains are authorized to receive email reports marked as sensitive or restricted. Database Exception Message Display - This sets how database messages are displayed. Maximum length of database message to display (0=All) - This option allows you to shorten the database message in the database exception dialog.

Page 339 of 525

Using Administration Functions Truncate displayed text before specified character sequence - This option allows you to select the way the message is truncated: Carriage Return or Line Feed Custom character sequence Character sequence Number of truncate sequences before truncation - This is the number of times that the sequence character is displayed before truncation.

Using the Inventory Groups Tab

You can create inventory groups that can be used to speed the search for a particular inventory item. You may associate an inventory item with a group by entering a group name on the Inventory Information tab of the Inventory Properties sheet. Rather than typing the group name, you can select it from a list of group names. This helps maintain consistent group names. NOTE: In other places in CribMaster, inventory groups may also be known as "Item Groups" or "Item Classes." To access the Inventory Groups tab, click System > System Options > Inventory Groups...

Page 340 of 525

Using Administration Functions The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click this button to add a new group to the list. Click this button to delete the selected group. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Column Headers
Group - This is the name of the inventory group. Description - This is the description of the selected inventory group. Default Buyer Group - This is the default Buyer Group designated for this inventory group.

Using the Cycle Counting Tab

To access the Cycle Counting tab, follow the directions below: 1. Click Crib in the CribMaster Explorer tree. The Crib Records screen displays. 2. Select the crib you want to edit. 3. If the properties tab is not visible, click Properties . The Crib Properties dialog box displays. 4. Click the Cycle Counting tab. The Cycle Counting tab displays:

Page 341 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Cycle Counting Classification - This is the ID of the inventory cycle count schedule. Multiple schedules can be created. Cycle count classification can be assigned in the item, crib, or bin properties. TIP: Click Add ( ) to add a new Cycle Counting Classification. Schedule Criteria - Use these fields to further define the cycle count. Override settings for this classification in this crib - Check this box to override the start date for the current cycle. Todays date is supplied as the initial value, but you may change this to another desired date. This feature is used to modify the selection of bins for automatic scheduling. For example, you might need to recount the entire bin before the next cycle, even if they have already been counted. Overriding the start date to the current date would make all bins eligible for rescheduling. End date for current cycle - This is the date by which current inventory cycle count will be completed. The start date for the cycle and the end dates for following cycles are calculated from this date. Start date for current cycle: (Calculated) - This is the calculated (unless overridden) start date for the current cycle. Only bins not counted since this date are eligible for automatic scheduling. Page 342 of 525

Using Administration Functions You do not need to override this value unless already counted bins need to be recounted via automatic scheduling during the current cycle. Length of inventory cycle - This is the number of months to complete each cycle count. During this period, the entire inventory will be counted. CribMaster uses this length to calculate the end date for the next cycle when the current cycle is completed. Day of month for end of inventory cycle - This field designates the day of the month for calculated cycle end dates. Length of inventory subcycle - Select a sub-cycle length used to compute the number of sub-cycles in the inventory cycle. Automatic scheduling will evenly distribute the remaining bins to be counted over the sub-cycles left in the current cycle. NOTE: Inventory counts are always initiated by the Crib Attendant by choosing Inventory Reconciliation from the Actions menu. CribMaster will compute how many bins to schedule for counting from the current scheduling criteria. The time remaining before the End Date of the current cycle is divided by sub-cycle length to determine the number of remaining sub-cycles. The number of bins that have not been counted during the current cycle is divided by the number of remaining sub-cycles to determine the number of bins to be scheduled. Automatically schedule bins for inventory - Check this box to have CribMaster automatically schedule bins for counting when you invoke the Inventory Reconciliation dialog from the Actions menu. The scheduled bins will automatically be added to the bin count list when the Inventory Reconciliation window displays. If you do not choose this option, you must press the schedule button on the Inventory Reconciliation dialog to schedule bins for counting. Update serialized item count status on each transaction - Check this box to have the Date Last Count of all serialized items to match the Status Date for any change to the status of the item, except for "Lost", "Scrapped", and "Out Of Service".

Page 343 of 525

Using Administration Functions NOTE: These latter status changes remove the bin assignment from the item, so they would not be on the Cycle Count report for a bin in any case. Compute count date for serialized item bins - Check this box to have the Date Last Count for a bin containing serialized items to be automatically updated to the oldest Date Last Count value of any serialized item assigned to the bin. If all the items in the bin are used regularly, then the net effect of this that the Date Last Count value for the bin will gradually move forward. Bins whose Date Last Count field is older than the beginning date of the current counting cycle (e.g. July 1, 1998 in your case) will be scheduled for counting prior to the end of the cycle. NOTE: If enabled, the cycle count record for a serialized bin item will be automatically removed (e.g. the bin no longer requires counting during the cycle) as the result of a transaction or count operation if the computed Date Last Count for the bin becomes more recent than the beginning of the cycle. Hide "Expected Count" value when recording actual counts Check this box to prevent the expected count column displaying on the cycle counting screen Expected Accuracy (1-100%) - Enter the percentage that the count should be accurate. Enter 100 if the count has the match exactly. If the expected accuracy percentage does not match the count, then the count cannot be reconciled in the Cycle Counting screen. Schedule bins according to - Use this option to further define the bin counting schedule. Most time since last counted - Select this option to have CribMaster select bins with the oldest "date last counted" before bins which were counted more recently. Fewest number of items - Select this option to have CribMaster select bins with the lowest number of items which are easier and more accurate to count. CribMaster will schedule bins with smaller counts first when this is checked. Each bin will still be counted by the end of the cycle. This may cause the last counts to be more tedious Page 344 of 525

Using Administration Functions because the bins that tend to contain more items will be counted last. Proximity (consecutive bin number) - Select this option to have CribMaster select bins in ascending order by bin ID to allow bins which are close together to be counted at the same time (e.g. down the aisles of the crib). This does not work if you have not numbered your bins this way. Cost (most expensive first) - Select this option to have CribMaster select bins by cost. If you select this sequence, you will be counting lesser value items later in the count cycle. Bins are ordered by the cost from the primary supplier for quantity of one. Price breaks are not considered and the quantity of items in the bin is not considered. When you are counting things that are too cheap, you can restart the cycle. All at same time (at beginning of last subcycle) - Select this option to have CribMaster select all bins.

Page 345 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Using the Ordering Tab

To access Ordering Options, click System > System Options > Ordering. The Ordering Options screen displays:

Page 346 of 525

Using Administration Functions

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to save changes made to Ordering. Click here to undo changes made to Ordering. Click here to access the audit history dialog box. Use this text box to search for a particular keyword in the options list. Click here to open all headings on the ordering screen. Click here to close all headings on the ordering screen. Options Cost of Ordering a single item (2.00 = $2) - This is the cost of processing an item on an order. Larger numbers will cause the Economic Order Quantity to be higher for all items computed. This number applies to every bin in the system. This number combined with Carrying Cost controls the size of the orders computed. Cost of Transferring a single item (2.00 = $2) - This is the cost of handling a restocking transfer. This is used in the Economic Order Quantity formula for bins that use transfers for restocking (bin has a Stock From Bin, Crib has Stock From Crib, or Item has Stock From Crib). NOTE: Larger numbers in the Cost of Ordering or Cost of Transferring field will cause the EOQ to be higher for all items computed. This number, combined with Carrying Cost, controls the size of the orders computed.

Page 347 of 525

Using Administration Functions Carrying Cost (Enter .25 for 25 Percent) - This is the carrying cost of your inventory. This applies to all items in the system and affects the Economic Order Quantity computed for every bin. Larger numbers will cause the amounts ordered to be smaller. This number combined with the Cost of Ordering controls the size of the orders computed. NOTE: Larger numbers in the Cost of Carrying field will cause the order quantity to be smaller. Number of Months used to compute average monthly usage - This number determines how far back CribMaster looks to compute the average monthly usage. This is used for all items in the system. A change in this number is applied to bins when they are next checked for an order need (when there is an issue, a receipt, or monthly). NOTE: CribMaster stores 24 months of usage history. Lead Time (Days) to use until the first order for an item is received Lead time is computed as time between order date and receive date. All new items will use this number until the first order is completed. Lead Time (Days) to use for transfers - Lead time for bins using transfers to restock (bin has a Stock From Bin, Crib has Stock From Crib, or Item has Stock From Crib). Transfer lead-time is not calculated and uses the set number. Add Shortfall (OrderPoint - CurrentQuantity - OnOrder) to Economic Order Quantity - This causes the amount a bin is under its order point to be added to the Economic Order Quantity. Maximum Months Supply Allowed On-Hand (Including Orders) CribMaster will not order a quantity that would make the current supply greater than this maximum. In other words, if you set this value to 12, CribMaster will not order greater than a one-year average monthly usage. Enter 0 for Maximum Months Supply to Order to turn this feature off. Months Supply to Excess Floor (Enter 1.5 for 1 1/2 Months) - This is a number of months and is used with the monthly usage to calculate an excess floor for each bin. Quantity in a bin that is greater that the excess floor is considered "Excess". Excess may be used to fill purchasing needs see Transfer Surplus or Excess before purchasing below.

Page 348 of 525

Using Administration Functions NOTE: Crib ordering type can be set to "no excess" to bypass transferring from a specific crib. General Include adjustments to bin counts in usage - This is the default setting for this flag on the adjust bin count dialog box. You may override the setting for each individual adjustment. All adjustments made using CMSCAN will count against usage, if selected. Automatically insert Required Date for new Purchase Order Items Check this option to have the required date added to new PO's. NOTE: Required Date = Order Date + Average Lead Time. Automatically insert Promised Date for new Purchase Order Items - If checked, items added to a PO will have the date set to today + Average Lead Time. This happens at the time the PO is created for new POs. When editing an existing PO, the date is inserted when the item is added to the PO. NOTE: Revisions to the promised date can be tracked. Order Durables based on Bin Quantity rather than Plant Quantity - This option causes CribMaster to replace durable items that are issued. This can be useful if items remain checked out for long periods and you wish to replenish inventory as soon as items are checked out. Transfer Surplus or Excess before purchasing - This option has the system check each of the needs to see if there is an appropriate transfer that can be made instead of making an auto purchase. NOTE: This option is also used for Central stocking and Stock from Crib. Excess Calculations Ignore Orders and Incoming Transfers (Not Recommended) - This option reduces the amount of Excess that would otherwise be calculated for a bin. Orders and Transfers coming into the bin are not counted until they are received in the bin. You will not see changes until the next time each bin is recalculated if this option is changed. Set Auto Transfer Case Size to be Ordering Case Size for Primary Supplier - If checked, CribMaster rounds transfers to the ordering case Page 349 of 525

Using Administration Functions size for the primary supplier. Normally, they are rounded to a package size equal to the Default issue quantity for the bin the stock is coming from. Automatically delete ordering system transfers if no longer needed - If checked, CribMaster will inspect bins with incoming transfers to determine if a transfer is still necessary. If the bin quantity is above the order point, the transfer is deleted. Prevent ordering expired Line Items or ordering from Blanket POs that have expired - This option keeps users from ordering items from expired Blanket PO's and line items. Line items cannot be approved or ordered if they are expired. Recalc all bins each month automatically - Each bin will still be calculated whenever there is activity for the bin. You can also Recalc All Bins manually at any time using the menu choice located under Actions Advanced. This is the default behavior but can be turned off. Limit default bin for manually added orders to current crib/area - If checked, bins for manually added orders are filtered to bins in current crib/area only. The Crib/bin will be blank if bin does not exist in current crib/area. Days in addition to LeadTime + 1 to acquire future needs: [0] - When CribMaster is ordering for Reservations in the future, you can have orders arrive on average this number of days before the Reservation is due. This helps you make sure items will be available for Reservations and Work Orders when needed. (Work Order future ordering is processed through system Reservations). Include these PO Status values in "On Order" calculations - It will keep quantities from appearing on the Authorize Purchase screen while there is a PO for the item in the statuses selected. The quantity on the PO will be included with other quantities on order when checking to see if stock needs to be ordered. You may get additional orders as additional issues take place. You will need to Recalculate All Bins after changing this option to get this applied to your bins. Waiting for Quote Requested Error Allow receiving of purchases and transfers into alternate location - This option allows you to receive new items into an alternate bin. Click in Page 350 of 525

Using Administration Functions the Bin To or Bin From on the Complete Transfer screen to see the alternate.

Yes - purchases and transfers can be received anywhere. Yes, but only within the same crib/area as the original destination No

Allow unassigned (empty) bin locations to be used Order Calculation Parameters Cost of Ordering a single item (2.00 = $2) Cost of Transferring a single item (2.00 = $2) Carrying Cost (Enter .25 for 25 Percent) Number of Months used to compute average monthly usage Lead Time (Days) to use until the first order for an item is received Lead Time (Days) to use for transfers Add Shortfall (OrderPoint - CurrentQuantity - OnOrder) to Economic Order Quantity Maximum Months Supply Allowed On-Hand (Including Orders) Months Supply to Excess Floor (Enter 1.5 for 1 1/2 Months) Safety Stock Safety Stock Ratio - Select a safety stock ratio from the options below. (0.1 to 3 - Default = 0.7) - This is the Safety Stock Ratio which is multiplied times Monthly Usage * Avg Lead Time to compute the Safety Stock. This figure is system wide. A change in this number is applied to bins when they are next checked for an order need (when there is an issue, a receipt, or monthly). Critical Parts (Use for Items marked "Critical Part") - This ratio is used for bins contain inventory items marked "Critical Part" on the Inventory Properties More Tab.

Page 351 of 525

Using Administration Functions Safety Stock Formula - Select a safety stock formula from the options below.

- This is the recommended Safety Stock formula.

- This is Form 2 of the Safety Stock formula. This computation for Safety Stock produces less Safety Stock when the Max Lead Time is close to the Avg Lead Time and more safety stock when Max Lead Time is more than twice as large as Avg Lead Time. - This Safety Stock formula ignores Avg Lead Time and computes Safety Stock strictly as a ratio of Monthly Usage.

NOTE: When you change your safety stock preference, the change applies to all future calculations and will not automatically change amounts to be ordered. If you want an immediate recalculation of all bins, click Actions > Advanced > Recalculate All Bins from the menu. Work Orders Automatically generate reservations for WO items - Select this option to have reservations created for work order items. Items needed for a work order will be reserved for the work order. NOTE: CMServer will evaluate Work Orders each day before AutoPurchase and generate reservations for items that are needed for the work orders. NOTE: Reserved Items can be ordered as needed. Maintenance Crib (Default Crib for WO items): [0] - Select this option to set aside a crib for work order items. NOTE: The maintenance crib is looked at as a crib where the needed parts will be issued.

Page 352 of 525

Using Administration Functions

NOTE: Can be specified on individual Work Orders as well. Default Order Option for WO Items - Select an option for default orders of WO items. Use reservation default (Default) - This is the Order Option on the More tab of Reservation Properties. Always order items (Additional) - This adds the quantity from the work order to the usage needs calculated for the bin. Order only if needed (Minimum) - This option ensures the bin contains at least as many items as needed. Do not order (None) Reservations Display notification for reservation(s) which can be filled when inventory changes (Local) - Check this option to have CribMaster display a notification for fillable reservations. Compute Reservation Needs Considering Lead Time - CribMaster examines all Reservations each morning before AutoPurchase to determine the quantities that need to be included in the ordering calculations allowing for the date required of the reservation. Default number of days before new Reservation is due: [0] - Set for required date. Order for Open Reservations (Not Yet Approved) - Items can be replenished for pending reservations. Default Order Option for Reservation Items - Select an option for default orders of reservation items. Always order items (Additional) Order only if needed (Minimum) Do not order (None) Supplier PO Build Time Build Time to add to Lead Time computations - This is the time required to reach the minimum dollar amount for an order to the primary supplier. Larger lead times cause the order quantities computed to be larger.

Page 353 of 525

Using Administration Functions NOTE: Larger lead times cause the order quantities computed to be larger. NOTE: Build time is computed by comparing the actual dates on the last number of Purchase Orders sent to the supplier.

(none) One Half All

Build Time to use until there are at least two POs for a Supplier CribMaster will use the number of days until there are two Purchase Orders for a supplier as the build time. Maximum orders to use in computation of Build Time - This is the maximum purchase orders to use to calculate the build time. Prophet 21 Process PO, POACK and ASN using Prophet 21 interface - Check this option to enable Prophet 21 functions.

Enable CM Server to move Prophet 21 Files To Prophet21 FTP Location - If this option is checked the PO (850) will be moved by CM Server from the Prophet21 directory. 855 and 856 files will be pulled from the incoming P21 FTP directory. (See integration for incoming and outgoing FTP locations). If the CribMaster user is planning to do a manual pull and push the option in this tab will not need to be checked. Use ASN unit price instead PO detail Item unit price - If this option is checked the unit price will always be taken from the incoming 855 documents. If there is no unit price or zero unit price in the 855, CM will default to PO Detail unit price. If this option is turned on CM requires both 855 and 856 to process requests. If this option is not turned on CM can process 856 files without corresponding 855 files. Automatically enter ASN quantity on Receive Screen - This is recommended only for low traffic PO/ASN (Like two or three PO in a day). This will populate all ASN quantity currently available for an item into Receive screen. User can receive all ASNs in one click. The exception will be multiple ASNs for a single PO detail item. But in case of multiple ASNs received for a PO detail item only, the first received ASN quantity gets populated on the receive screen while loading the item receive quantity. If the Page 354 of 525

Using Administration Functions user wants to receive a particular ASN, that ASN number can be scanned. Only those ASN items and quantities will be displayed on the Receive screen. Send Email on ASN import failure - In the case of automatic imports, CM Server will send an email on an import failure of an 855 and 856 file. Populate the email field to which the alert email will be sent. If there is no email address in the option and a PO Number is readable from the 855 or 856 document, the alert email will be sent to the Vendor Alert Email address from the Vendor properties. No email will be sent otherwise. o EMail Address to send alert messages on P21 import failure: []

Show P21 Integration options Advanced Ignore Zero Usage Months in Bin Usage Calculations when bin quantity is Zero at Month-End rollover time - This causes a NULL (viewed on the ordering information tab as empty entry field) to be placed in the usage bucket for a month if the usage for the entire month was zero and the bin was empty at the end of the month. A "0" will count as a month with 0 usage and a NULL be not be counted at all. Set status of "Approved" PO to "Ordered" when printed - Purchase order status can change from Approved to Ordered when the purchase order is printed. Ignore supplier when computing lead time - This option combines the average lead time for all suppliers of the item.

Page 355 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Using the Safety Stock Tab

To access the Safety Stock tab, click System > Options > Safety Stock. The Safety Stock tab displays: Safety Stock Ratio - Select a safety stock ratio from the options below. (0.1 to 3 - Default = 0.7) - This is the Safety Stock Ratio which is multiplied times Monthly Usage * Avg Lead Time to compute the Safety Stock. This figure is system wide. A change in this number is applied to bins when they are next checked for an order need (when there is an issue, a receipt, or monthly). Critical Parts (Use for Items marked "Critical Part") - This ratio is used for bins contain inventory items marked "Critical Part" on the Inventory Properties More Tab. Safety Stock Formula - Select a safety stock formula from the options below. - This is the recommended Safety Stock formula.

This is Form 2 of the Safety Stock formula. This computation for Safety Stock produces less Safety Stock when the Max Lead Time is close to the Avg Lead Time and more safety stock when Max Lead Time is more than twice as large as Avg Lead Time.
- This Safety Stock formula ignores Avg Lead Time and computes Safety Stock strictly as a ratio of Monthly Usage.

NOTE: When you change your safety stock preference, the change applies to all future calculations and will not automatically change amounts to be ordered. If you want an immediate recalculation of all bins, click Actions > Advanced > Recalculate All Bins from the menu.

Page 356 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Using the User Defined Fields Tab

To access the User Defined Fields tab, click System > System Options > User Defined Fields. The User Defined Fields tab displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to save changes made to the User Defined Fields. Click here to undo changes made to the User Defined Fields.

Column Headers
No. - This is the database identifier for this user-defined field. Screen Label - This field denotes how the field is presented to the user. Menu Text - This is the text that will display when this field is listed as a menu item. Issue Transactions - This field denotes how the field is presented to the user during an issue transaction: No, Optional (Yes), Required (Req). Work Order Transactions - This field denotes how the field is presented to the user during a work order transaction: No, Optional, Required. Table Name - If the user-defined field is maintained by a database table, this is the name of the table. Bar Code - This is the Trigger Character for bar code scanning. Restricted Exclude Unrestricted Dynamic Filter Table - Select the database table that the user defined field is dependant on. Page 357 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Using the Performance Tab

To access Performance Tab, click System > System Options > Performance. The Performance screen displays:

Page 358 of 525

Using Administration Functions The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to save changes made to performance settings. Click here to undo changes made to performance settings. Click here to access the audit history dialog box. Use this text box to search for a particular keyword in the options list. Click here to open all headings on the Performance screen. Click here to close all headings on the Performance screen.

Options
Automatically sort lists using default key - Uncheck this option to speed up the performance of your system. Always load entire result set into displayed list if possible - For large databases or for slow network connections (Phone connections) this can be a problem. Number of list entries to display initially - Indicate the number of items to be loaded before the list is displayed. NOTE: If more records are available, the cursor will display a down arrow. Right-click and select Load more records... to retrieve more records from the database. Maximum number of list entries: (0=all) - (CribMaster Enterprise only) This is the maximum number of items prepared for the list by the database server. CribMaster Enterprise will stop loading items into a list when this number of items is reached, even though there are Page 359 of 525

Using Administration Functions additional items in the database. It is important to keep this number small for phone connections. You typically view other items in the list by using search criteria to make the list contain fewer items. If the maximum number of records are exceeded, the will display a question mark. Force text searches to upper case - Useful for Oracle to prevent searches from being case sensitive. ODBC Query Timeout: (if supported) - This is stored by the local machine but needs to be larger on the machine where CmServer runs. Try 300 for 5 minutes on the CmServer machine (Of course it will be CeServer for SQL Server or CoServer for Oracle). Only applies to Enterprise version. ODBC Login Timeout: (if supported) - This is for Enterprise systems only. General Fast Transfer Screen (Shows all bins) (Local) - Normally the transfer screen tries to display only those bins that have a valid place to transfer to. This can be a slow query and you may prefer to choose from a larger list rather than wait on the filtered list. Check this option to speed up performance. Background Bitmap No background bitmap (Local) Use marble pattern background bitmap (Local) Use custom bitmap background (default = CM logo bitmap if unspecified) Bitmap file to display in background - Enter full path-name of the bitmap file you want to use for your background image. o Bitmap Display Position - Use the below options to set how the bitmap is displayed. Tiled Stretched

Data Retention Intervals NOTE: CmAgent does a monthly purge of old data. Once data is purged, it may not be recovered.

Page 360 of 525

Using Administration Functions Months to retain transaction data At least 12 - You may change the age at which transaction data is are deleted. Choose a number from 12 to 1200 (1 year to 100 years). Months to retain purchasing data At least 12 - If this number is 0, the number entered for transaction data is used. See Editing a Purchase Order. Months to retain high priority event log items At least 3 - Select a number between 3 and 1200. These are log entries for events like record deletes or renames, etc. Months to retain PDT Connection Logs At least 1 - These are log entries of connects and disconnects by PDTs. This info can be useful to determine if attempts are being made to connect to the network by unauthorized users. Months to retain table audit data - At least 3 - You may change the age at which audit information is deleted. This is information about who changed data in the database. Months to retain Closed and Rejected reservation data At least 3 - You may change the age at which Old Reservations are deleted. Months to retain ASN data - at least 3 - You may change the age at which Advance Shipping Notices are deleted. See Understanding the Advanced Shipping Notice. Months to Retain Closed/Rejected Work Orders (At Least 12 or 0=indefinitely) - You may change the age at which Old Work Orders are deleted. See Understanding Work Orders. Months to retain log-in history records- At least 3 - You may change the age at which log-in history is deleted. Login history is retained only if the Login Auditing option on the configuration tab is enabled. Months to retain log-in password changes - You may change the age at which login password auditing is deleted. Login password changes are retained only if the Login Auditing option on the configuration tab is enabled. Global Settings Cache - CribMaster often refers to options you have set. In fact, CribMaster does this so often that it can slow Page 361 of 525

Using Administration Functions down some functions. By saving the last few lookups in a memory cache, CribMaster can avoid many round trips to the database server and greatly speed processing in many situations. However, this means that there will be a delay between changing of Option settings and their implementation at times. This is not usually a problem as Options probably change very rarely. TIP: If performance is slow, the cache option can be set temporarily. Advanced Automatically Synchronize Intersite Transfers before transfer operations - This synchronization picks up activity at other sites so the local database will reflect the latest status and location of the Intersite transfers involving you. This is only used with Data Warehouse. Local PC time value cache duration (seconds) (Local) - How long to consider the last requested time from the database to be valid. If this time is needed during this interval, it will be used from memory instead of requesting a fresh time from the database. A higher setting will slow the system down. Enable delta-based field updates where supported to reduce collisions - This will help with collisions in situations in which there are very few departments and many users and lots of transactions Transaction Isolation Level Permit uncommitted data to be read Allow only committed data to be read Transaction Duration

Use local setting (individually set on each client) o Abort open transactions when maximum duration exceeded - The transaction is aborted after a set amount of time. o Maximum duration for open transactions (in seconds) Use global setting (shared by all clients) o Abort open transactions when maximum duration exceeded - The transaction is aborted after a set amount of time. o Maximum duration for open transactions (in seconds)

Page 362 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Configuring the Data Source

Data Source is based on the ODBC data source configured in Control Panel. CribMaster setup creates two initial databases: CribMaster and CribMaster Sample, between which you can move back and forth using the Select Data Source dialog box. NOTE: Users and passwords are located within the database. If you switch data sources, you will need a password in the new database to access its information. Access this dialog box by clicking System > Data Source...

NOTE: The drop down menu items for each of these fields matches the data types you have set in your ODBC configuration in Control Panel. Database - This is the database to which the settings apply: Primary CribMaster Database Common Number System Database Page 363 of 525

Using Administration Functions Data Ware House Database Database Provider Type - This is the type of data connection: SQL Server Oracle WCF Service Web Service .NET Remoting Access Server Name - This is the name of the machine on which CM Server is running. Database Name This is the name of the database with which you want CribMaster to connect. Database Authorization Use these fields to define how the user logs into the database. Use integrated Security Check this box to have CribMaster user Windows authentication for system logins. User Name If you have Use integrated Security unchecked, enter the database username here. Password - If you have Use integrated Security unchecked, enter the database password here. NOTE: Passwords are limited to 14 characters. Custom Connection Information - This section is for database-specific connection information. TIP: By default, CribMaster and ATR connect to the database using Named Pipes. If your facility does not allow for Named Pipes, you can enter the following in the blank for custom connection information: Network Library =dbmssocn Encrypt Connection Strings - Check this box to hide to connection strings from view.

Page 364 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Using Database Utilities

Understanding Custom Fields
CribMaster allows you to add custom fields to existing tables. WARNING: Ensure your system and all related data is backed up before attempting to alter the CribMaster database schema. Have your system administrator or database administrator assist you with this process. To access the Define Custom Fields screen, click System > Database Utilities > Custom Fields... The Define Custom Fields screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click this button to create a new custom field. Click this button to delete the selected custom field. Click this button to access online help. Click this button to search the table. Click this button to clear the table search. Click here to enable Edit Mode. Table Name - This is the table to which the custom field is added. Field Name Suffix - This is the unique identifier that will be added to UDF by the system. Field Name* - This is the name generated by the sustem by adding the suffix and UDF. Length - This is the length of the custom field.

Page 365 of 525

Using Administration Functions Label - This is the name by which the custom field will be displayed. Display this field in record lists - Check this option to have the field display with the others in record lists. Field Validation - Use these fields to define how the custom field is validated. Use table to validate entries specified for this field - Check this option to have CribMaster only allow values from the specified table to be valid entries for the custom field. User defined tables - You may create a new table to hold the valid values for this custom field. You will need to enter the valid values. Table Name* - This is the name of the table in which you enter the valid values if you select User defined tables above. Predefined Table Columns - Select this option to use an existing table. CribMaster Table - This is a list of the CribMaster tables you can use for validation if you choose Predefined Table Columns. CribMaster Field* - This is a list of columns in the table chosen above. Choose the column you want to use for limiting the values of this field. Enforce Custom field level security - Check this box to have CribMaster create new permissions (2 permissions one to define values and one to edit values) for this field. Creating a Custom Field To create a custom field, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Db Utilities > Custom Fields... The Define Custom Fields screen displays. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Click New . Select a table from the CribMaster Table drop-down. Enter a Field Name Suffix. Enter or accept the Length. Enter a Label for the field.

Page 366 of 525

Using Administration Functions 7. Set the appropriate Validation Type. 8. Press Tab. The field is ready to use. NOTE: If you are using a web service to connect ATR or CribMaster to the database, you will need to stop and restart the web service before the new custom field will be available. Editing a Custom Field To edit a custom field, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Db Utilities > Custom Fields... The Define Custom Fields screen displays. 2. Select the field you want to edit. 3. Make any necessary changes. 4. Press Tab. The changes are saved. NOTE: You can change the field name if you are using the Standard CribMaster (Enterprise does not support this feature for Oracle). Deleting a Custom Field To delete a custom field, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Db Utilities > Custom Fields... The Define Custom Fields screen displays. 2. Select the field you want to delete. 3. Click Delete. A warning displays. 4. Click Yes to continue deletion. The field is deleted.

Page 367 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Using the Report Management Screen

To access the Report Management Screen, follow the steps below: Click System > Db Utilities > Report Management... The Report Management screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Employee Records screen: Icon Function Click here to create a new report. Click here to access the properties of the selected report. Click here to delete the selected report. Click here to access online help.

Page 368 of 525

Using Administration Functions Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode. Column Headers Report Name - This is Displayed Name / Description of the Report. File Name - This is the Crystal Reports file for the selected report. Adding a Custom Report To create a new report, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Db Utilities > Report Management... The Report Management Screen displays. 2. Click New. The Report Properties screen displays. 3. Enter a Report Name. 4. Click the Section drop-down to select a section for the report to be made available in. 5. Click next to Report Filename. 6. Navigate to the report. 7. Select the report file. 8. Click Open. 9. Enter any additional information on the Report Properties screen. 10. Click . The report is created. NOTE: A full path to the report is not needed to the .rpt file. CribMaster 9 will look for the entered report file in the following locations (and in the following order): a. The file name exactly as specified b. CustomDirectory\CribNumber This allows each crib to have its own version of custom reports This was needed when a distributer put a vending machine in a customer location. c. CustomDirectory d. AddRpts Directory e. Reports Directory

Page 369 of 525

Using Administration Functions Editing a Report To edit a report, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Db Utilities > Report Management... The Report Management Screen displays. 2. Select the report you want to edit. 3. Click Properties. The Report Properties dialog box displays. 4. Make any necessary changes. 5. Click . The changes are saved. Deleting a Report To delete a report, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Db Utilities > Report Management... The Report Management Screen displays. 2. Select the report you want to delete. 3. Click Delete. The report is deleted. Understanding Report Properties To edit a report, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Db Utilities > Report Management... The Report Management Screen displays. 2. Select the report you want to edit. 3. Click Properties. The Report Properties dialog box displays:

Page 370 of 525

Using Administration Functions Report Name - This is the name the user sees on the Report Properties dialog box. Report ID - This is the database identifier for this report. Section - This is the area of CribMaster where the selected report can be found and used. Report Filename - This is the file name of the RPT file for the report. CribMaster will still look first in the custom directory for the file. Report Description - This is an explanation of the contents of the report. Report Header - Enter text here to have it display as a header on the report. Report Footer - Enter text here to have it display as a footer on the report. Sensitivity Level - This drop-down contains three possible security settings: None, Sensitive, Restricted. The setting here determines how the report recipient is able to retrieve the report. Auto-select this report (default report on the report screen) - Check this box to have this report be selected by default. No Sort - Check this box to prevent this report from being sorted. Interactive and cannot be scheduled or printed by CM Server - Check this box to prevent CM Server from automatically producing this report.

Configuring Table Auditing Options

Auditing is available only for the tables listed. You may expand the table to reveal the columns for each table and specify any columns you wish to track. NOTE: This option is only available in CribMaster Enterprise. To access the Table Auditing Options dialog box, follow the steps below: Click System > Database Utilities > Table Auditing Options... The Table Auditing Options screen displays:

Page 371 of 525

Using Administration Functions

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click this button to save changes. Click this button to undo changes. Click this button to expand the list of tables. Click this button to collapse the list of tables.

Treat spaces and zeros as null - Check this box to have the system regard both blank spaces and zeros as null.

Selecting None will cause the Date Updated and Updated By fields to not be reset when the associated record is changed. NOTE: There is no extra data space required to save this information as only the last date and user are stored. You can see this information on the Audit tab of the properties for the record. NOTE: If the record was created after Version 6.1 of CribMaster, the create date and user are stored for the record.

Selecting Field Level will cause all changes to that field to be tracked including User, Value, and Previous Value.

Page 372 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Interpreting CribMaster Status

The CribMaster Status dialog box is a summary of CmServer, Cycle Counting, Transfers, Checked Out items, Gauges and more. To access CribMaster Status, click Start Page. The CribMaster Start Page displays. The Status box displays at the top of the screen:

Double-click a line to be taken directly to the appropriate screen for fixing the issue:

TIP: This screen will display the local crib information or all crib information when the All Cribs button is selected. The following table describes the indicators and what they mean:

Page 373 of 525

Using Administration Functions Description Status This icon indicates that there is a problem with the data in the associated field. This icon indicates that there is a pending status in the associated field. This icon indicates that there could be a problem in the associated field.

Understanding CribMaster Security

You have control of which CribMaster functions each user can perform. CribMaster also supports a second set of permissions for non-primary cribs. If you choose to use this feature, each employee will have 2 sets of Classes with tweaked permissions. This feature is turned on by checking the option named: Enable separate security privileges for primary and non-primary cribs. When this option is checked, ALL USERS THAT HAVE THE PERMISSION Misc Security have all their primary crib permissions granted for non-primary cribs also. This allows your system administrators to log into CribMaster since no primary cribs have been specified yet. Once this option is checked, there will be a new tab on the Employee properties to assign Primary Cribs.

Working with Security Access Codes

Security access codes are used to grant or deny employees access to certain CribMaster functions. Security access codes offer a way of grouping job functions together and then assigning that group of functions to an employee. These codes are used in combination with the Crib Privileges section on the access tab of the employee properties.

Adding a Class
To add a security class, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Security Access Codes... The Security dialog box displays. 2. Enter a Code. 3. Enter a Description. 4. Press Tab. Page 374 of 525

Using Administration Functions 5. Select the appropriate permissions in the right pane. 6. Click . The Security Code is created.

Editing a Class
To edit a security class, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Security Access Codes... The Security dialog box displays. 2. Make any changes to the Code or Description. 3. Press Tab. 4. Make any appropriate changes to the permissions in the right pane. 5. Click . The changes are saved.

Deleting a Class
To delete a security class, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Security Access Codes... The Security dialog box displays. 2. Select the class you want to delete. 3. Click Delete . The class is deleted.

Understanding the Security Dialog Box

To access the Security dialog box, follow the steps below: Click System > Security Access Codes. The Security dialog box displays:

Page 375 of 525

Using Administration Functions

TIP: To view this screen with an emphasis on functions, click View By Function.

Page 376 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Functions
The following table displays the functions available for assigning to a class: Group Asset Function Add Delete Edit View Configure Options Delete Attribute Definitions Delete Class Delete Common Number Edit Attribute Definitions Edit Class Edit Common Number Link/Unlink Item with Common Number Lock/Unlock Common Number Update Multiple Numbers View Crib Add Crib Delete Crib Edit Crib Edit Site Profile View Crib Add Crib/Bin Cost Information Delete Crib/Bin Edit Crib/Bin Edit Usage Information Order Information Transaction History Usage Information View Crib/Bin

Common Numbering System

Crib/Bin

Page 377 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Custom Fields

Define Values Edit Values Adjust Bins Count Bins Schedule Bins Crib/Bin Configuration Schedule Options All Database Utilities RFID (View Only) Add Employee Delete Employee Edit Employee Employee Access Employee History Labor Rate Transaction History View Employee Add Gauge Change Item Type Delete Gauge Edit Alt Scan Code Edit Calibration Schedule Edit Gauge Override Certification Status Reassign Item Number Remove From Service Transaction History View Gauge Add Inspected Tool Change Item Type Delete Inspected Tool Edit Alt Scan Code Edit Calibration Schedule Edit Inspected Tool Page 378 of 525

Cycle Counting

Database Utilities

Employee

Gauge

Inspected Tool

Using Administration Functions Override Certification Status Reassign Item Number Remove From Service Transaction History View Inspected Tool Inventory Add Blanket Order Add Item Cost Information Delete Blanket Order Delete Item Edit Blanket Order Edit Check Lists Edit Item Examine Item Item History Supplier Information Transaction History View Item Add Kit Add Kit Item Assemble Kit Edit Kit Lock/Unlock Assemble Delete Kit Delete Kit Item Broadcast Message Custom Field Codes Data Warehouse Access Advanced SQL Search Define Status Reason Codes Distributor Cost Event Log Item Access License/Version Information Local Options Locate Item Options Page 379 of 525

Kit

Misc.

Using Administration Functions Recalculate All Bins Security Send Fax/Email View Audit History View Network Path Information Purchasing Approve Purchase Orders Authorize Requirements Automatic Purchasing Create Purchase Orders Edit Purchase Orders Fax PO's Inspect Purchased Items Override Requires Inspection Print Purchase Orders Receive Inventory Request a Purchase Return Purchased Items Review Requirements Review Requirements (Add Items) Sell/Auction Items View Purchase Orders Additional Reports Analyzer Assets Bar Codes Bin Labels Bin Master Common Numbering System Employee Master Event Log Inventory Master Items Checked Out Items in Rework Kits Lot Numbers Price Expiration Receiving Page 380 of 525

Reports

Using Administration Functions Red Flag Reservation Schedule Reports Serialized Items Supplier Master Transactions User1 User2 User3 User4 User5 User6 View Scheduled Reports Work Order Labor Work Order Schedules Work Order Tasks Work Order Templates Work Order Transactions Work Orders Reports Plus Administrator Clerical Crib Agent Crib Manager Distributor Management Operations Purchasing Agent Purchasing Manager Super User Transportation Change Out Change Change Change Change Change Change to Assembly Checked to to to to to to Checked In Checked Out In Assembly In Calibration In Repair Inactive

Serial ID Status

Page 381 of 525

Using Administration Functions Change Change Change Change Change Change Supplier to to to to to to Lost Off-site Out of Service Scrapped Unassigned Unusable

Add Blanket Order Add Supplier Delete Blanket Order Delete Supplier Edit Blanket Order Edit Supplier Purchasing Info Supplier History View Supplier Add Delete Edit View Return All Items Setup Mode Stock Adjustment Approve Reservations Approve Reservations (self only) Batch Transactions Bulk Issue Certify Gauges Edit Transactions Issue Items Override Limits Override Time Limits Reissue Items Return Items Return Items from Rework Reverse Issue Rework Items Page 382 of 525

Task

Touch Screen

Transaction

Using Administration Functions Scrap FOD Items Scrap Items Stock Adjustments View Transactions Transfers Complete Transfers Create Transfer Inter-Crib Transfers Inter-Site Transfers Print Transfers Stock Satellite Transfer Items Add Assigned Items Delete Edit History View Add Delete Edit View Add Delete Edit View Add Assign Close Defer Delete Edit Labor

User1 Through User 6

WO Schedule

WO Template

Work Order

Page 383 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Working with Reason and Status Codes

Working with Transaction Reason Codes
Transaction Reason Codes are used to help define transaction records. When transaction reports are run, these codes help the reader determine the cause of the transaction. NOTE: Transaction reason codes can be made to be required for returning items, adjusting bins, counting bins, scrapping items, returning unusable items and deleting transfers. To access the Transaction Reason Codes screen, follow the steps below: Click System > Transaction Reason Codes... The Transaction Reason Codes screen displays:

Page 384 of 525

Using Administration Functions The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to create a new reason code. Click here to delete the selected reason code. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode. Column Headers Code - This is the code that signifies the reason. Description - This is the stated reason that the code represents. Right-Click Menu This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the Transaction Reason Codes screen:

New entry... - Select this option to create a new transaction reason code. Edit properties... - Select this option to edit the properties of the selected transaction reason code. Delete... - Select this option to delete the selected transaction reason code. Rename... - Select this option to rename the selected transaction reason code. Merge... - Select this option to merge one record into another.

Page 385 of 525

Using Administration Functions Creating a Transaction Reason Code To create a new transaction reason code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Reason and Status Codes > Transaction Reason Codes... The Transaction Reason Codes screen displays. 2. Enter a Reason Code into the next available line. 3. Enter a Description. 4. Press Tab. The transaction reason code is ready for use. Editing a Transaction Reason Code To edit an existing transaction reason code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Reason and Status Codes > Transaction Reason Codes... The Transaction Reason Codes screen displays. 2. Select the transaction reason code you want to edit. 3. Make any necessary changes. 4. Press Tab. The changes are saved. Deleting a Transaction Reason Code To delete an existing transaction reason code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Reason and Status Codes > Transaction Reason Codes... The Transaction Reason Codes screen displays. 2. Select the transaction reason code you want to delete. . A confirmation dialog box displays. 3. Click Delete 4. Click OK. The transaction reason code is deleted. NOTE: If the transaction reason code has been used, it cannot be deleted.

Page 386 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Working with Item Status Codes

Item Status Codes are used to help define the active condition of an item. To access the Item Status Codes screen, follow the steps below: Click System > Other Codes > Item Status Codes. The Item Status Codes screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to create a new item status code. Click here to delete the selected item status code. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Page 387 of 525

Using Administration Functions Column Headers Code - This is the code that signifies the status. Description - This is the status that the code represents. Right-Click Menu This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the Item Status Codes screen:

New entry... - Select this option to create a new item status code. Edit properties... - Select this option to edit the properties of the selected item status code. Delete... - Select this option to delete the selected item status code. Rename... - Select this option to rename the selected item status code. Merge... - Select this option to merge one record into another. Creating an Item Status Code To create a new item status code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Reason and Status Codes > Item Status Codes... The Item Status Codes screen displays. 2. Enter a Status Code into the next available line. 3. Enter a Description. 4. Press Tab. The status code is ready for use. Editing an Item Status Code To edit an existing item status code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Reason and Status Codes > Item Status Codes... The Item Status Codes screen displays. 2. Select the item status code you want to edit. 3. Make any necessary changes.

Page 388 of 525

Using Administration Functions 4. Press Tab. The changes are saved. Deleting an Item Status Code To delete an existing item status code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Reason and Status Codes > Item Status Codes... The Item Status Codes screen displays. 2. Select the item status code you want to delete. . A confirmation dialog box displays. 3. Click Delete 4. Click OK. The item status code is deleted. NOTE: If the item status code has been used, it cannot be deleted.

Working with Craft Codes

Understanding Issue Limits Issue limits apply primarily to automated issues from vending equipment but can be imposed for other reasons. Limits are based on the number of times an item has been issued over a time interval specified in days. For example, you might specify that an employee with a particular skill or craft (e.g. electrician) can be issued 1 of a particular item each week. Another craft might be permitted 10 of the same item in a single day. For an interval of 1 day, the starting time for the limit is12:00AM of the day on which the issue is being performed. For an interval of 2 days, the starting time is 12:00AM of the previous day, etc. Note that a 365 day calendar is used, so no special consideration is given to weekends or holidays. The limit calculations are based on ISSUE, ISSRT, RETN, and CANCL transactions. This means that the employee gets "credit" for parts that are returned or for cancelled transactions within the applicable time period. The Issue Limits feature must be enabled before craft codes can be assigned to employees and limits are checked when items are being issued. Check the box labeled "Enable Item Limit Checking" in the Issue/Return Options > Item Limits section on the File > Options > Configuration tab.

Page 389 of 525

Using Administration Functions Limits imposed can be overridden at the time of issue by an employee that has been granted the permission of: Transaction Override Limits Issue limits are imposed by Craft Codes and are entered on the Limit tab of Inventory properties. The Employee Craft Code tab and Inventory Limit tab are available to users with the permission of: Employee Employee Access The set of craft codes available in CribMaster is maintained with the command View Craft Codes and is available to users with the permission of: Employee - Edit Employee Once craft codes have been established, you can enter limits for them on the Inventory Limit tab and you can assign employees to the different craft codes on the Employee Craft Codes tab. Each employee can be assigned multiple craft codes.

Page 390 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Understanding Craft Codes

Craft codes are used to define the rate of the specialists required to complete a work order. To access the Craft Codes screen, follow the steps below: Click System > Other Codes > Craft Codes. The Craft Codes screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of the buttons located on the Craft Codes screen: Icon Function Click this button to create a new craft code. Click this button to delete the selected craft code. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Page 391 of 525

Using Administration Functions Column Headers Code - The code that represents the craft code. Description - A description of the craft performed by the specialist. Rate - The rate at which the specialist works. The Right-Click Menu To access this menu, right-click on the Craft Codes screen:

New entry... - Select this option to add a new craft code. Edit properties... - Select this option to access the properties dialog box for the selected craft code. Delete... - Select this option to remove the selected craft code. Rename... - Select this option to rename the selected craft code. Merge... - Select this option to merge the selected craft code into another. Creating a Craft Code To create a craft code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Other Codes > Craft Codes. The Craft Codes screen displays. 2. Enter a Craft Code into the next available line. 3. Enter a Description. 4. Enter a Rate. 5. Press Tab. The status code is ready for use. Editing a Craft Code To edit a craft code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Other Codes > Craft Codes. The Craft Codes screen displays. 2. Select the craft code you want to edit. 3. Make any necessary changes. 4. Press Tab. The changes are saved. Page 392 of 525

Using Administration Functions Deleting a Craft Code To delete a craft code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Other Codes > Craft Codes. The Craft Codes screen displays. 2. Select the craft code you want to delete. 3. Click Delete . The craft code is removed from the list.

Working with Status Reason Codes

Status Reason Codes are used to explain the changes in status for serialized items. They can also be set to be required for specific status changes. To access the Status Reason Codes screen, follow the steps below: Click System > Status Reason Codes. The Status Reason Codes screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to create a new status reason code. Click here to delete the selected status reason code. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode.

Page 393 of 525

Using Administration Functions Column Headers Reason Code - This is the code that signifies the status reason. Description - This is the reason that the code represents. Right-Click Menu This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the Status Reason Codes screen:

New entry... - Select this option to create a new status reason code. Edit properties... - Select this option to edit the properties of the selected item status reason code. Delete... - Select this option to delete the selected item status reason code. Rename... - Select this option to rename the selected item status reason code. Merge... - Select this option to merge one record into another.

Page 394 of 525

Using Administration Functions Creating a Status Reason Code To create a new status reason code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Status Reason Codes. The Status Reason Codes screen displays. 2. Enter a Code into the next available line. 3. Enter a Description. 4. Press Tab. The status reason code is ready for use. Editing a Status Reason Code To edit a status reason code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Status Reason Codes. The Status Reason Codes screen displays. 2. Select the code you want to edit. 3. Make any necessary changes. 4. Press Tab. The changes are saved. Deleting a Status Reason Code To delete a status reason code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Status Reason Codes. The Status Reason Codes screen displays. 2. Select the code you want to delete. 3. Click Delete . A confirmation dialog box displays. 4. Click OK. The status reason code is deleted. NOTE: If the item status code has been used, it cannot be deleted.

Page 395 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Working with PO Detail Reason Codes

PO Detail Reason Codes are used to describe the reason a line item on a PO has failed during the inspect receipts process. To access the PO Detail Reason Codes screen, follow the steps below: Click System > Other Codes > PO Detail Reason Codes. The PO Detail Reason Codes screen displays:

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Click here to create a new PO detail reason code. Click here to delete the selected PO detail reason code. Click here to access online help. Click here to search the table. Click here to clear the active search. Click here to enable Edit Mode. Column Headers Code - This is the code that signifies the PO detail reason. Description - This is the reason that the code represents.

Page 396 of 525

Using Administration Functions Right-Click Menu This is the menu that displays when you right-click on the PO Detail Reason Codes screen:

New entry... - Select this option to create a new PO detail reason code. Edit properties... - Select this option to edit the properties of the selected PO detail reason code. Delete... - Select this option to delete the selected PO detail reason code. Rename... - Select this option to rename the selected PO detail reason code. Merge... - Select this option to merge one record into another. Creating a PO Detail Reason Code To create a new PO Detail Reason Code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Other Codes > PO Detail Reason Codes... The PO Detail Reason Codes screen displays. 2. Enter a Reason Code into the next available line. 3. Enter a Description. 4. Press Tab. The status reason code is ready for use. Editing a PO Detail Reason Code To edit a PO detail reason code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Other Codes > PO Detail Reason Codes... The PO Detail Reason Codes screen displays. 2. Select the code you want to edit. 3. Make any necessary changes. 4. Press Tab. The changes are saved.

Page 397 of 525

Using Administration Functions Deleting a PO Detail Reason Code To delete a PO detail reason code, follow the steps below: 1. Click System > Other Codes > PO Detail Reason Codes... The PO Detail Reason Codes screen displays. 2. Select the code you want to delete. 3. Click Delete . A confirmation dialog box displays. 4. Click OK. The PO detail reason code is deleted. NOTE: If the item status code has been used, it cannot be deleted.

Page 398 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Using the Event Log

CribMaster logs certain events so you can monitor what is going on. Different event notifications are temporarily kept for different periods of time. To access the Event Log, follow the steps below: Click System > Logs & Status > Event Log... The Event Log screen displays:

Event log records include:

Rename of Bin, Item, Employee, Supplier etc Deletions of Item, Bin, Employee, Supplier, PO etc Dayend CMServer processes Autopurchases Weekly CMServer processes Report sent and errors SMTP Email Sent ATR Started or Down CMServer Start Imports RF Scanner Connections

Event log records are saved based on priority: Priority 1 2 3 4 Number of days the entry remains in the log 90 day min (optionally, longer period) 30 7 3

Page 399 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Column Headings
Date - This is the date the action took place. Message - This is the message that was returned because of the action. Computer Name - This is the name of the computer that produced the action. Key - This is the primary key. Program Name - This the program associated with the action. Action - This is the action that caused the log entry. User ID - This is the employee who performed the action. Type - This is the priority.

Using the Exception List

This is a list of database exceptions that is maintained so you can review it when you like. It is common to get record locked messages which CribMaster automatically takes care of by waiting and retrying the operation until the record needed is unlocked by the other user. This process can generate a lot of lock exceptions if the other user keeps the record locked for a long time. (Like while they go to lunch). To access the exception list, click System > Logs & Status > Exception List... The Exception List [CribMaster] dialog box displays:

Page 400 of 525

Using Administration Functions

Using the CribMaster Server Log

This is a copy of CM Agent's activity window. It is used to let you check on this activity from a remote computer.

Click Refresh to display the latest updates from the server.

Page 401 of 525

Page 402 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

CMScan

Chapter 17: Using CmRadio and

Installing CmRadio
CmRadio will only be installed on the Radio Host Computer. The Radio Host must have access to the CribMaster database. The CribMaster database might reside on the Radio Host or in a networked environment; it might reside on another computer. Before installing CmRadio, the CribMaster database should be installed and steps should be taken such that the Radio Host has full read and write access. CmRadio may be installed from your CribMaster CD-ROM. 1. Run Setup and follow the on-screen instructions. 2. If asked to SELECT COMPONENTS, select CribMaster Radio Scanner. NOTE: In most cases, the application will not prompt you to select components to install unless you select Custom. 3. You will be asked to specify the location of the CribMaster database. A Browse button can assist you in locating and specifying the database location. NOTE: The default location of the database is X:\PROGRAM FILES\CRIBMAST\DATA (X represents the drive letter where the database is installed). 4. If you wish to connect to the sample database, select SAMPLE.MDB. NOTE: The empty database is CRIBMSTR.MDB.

Page 403 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Starting CmRadio
NOTE: For SQL Server users this program is named CeRadio.exe. NOTE: For Oracle Users this program is named CORadio.exe. Before starting the program CmRadio it is assumed that you have connected the serial cable to the Radio Hosts serial port and to the Command Bases RS232-HOST connection. The Command Base should be powered up. Run CmRadio. By default CmRadio is configured for COM1. If you have used a different communication port or if CmRadio displays an error message, you should change the setting configuration by selecting File > Options and clicking the correct port. The initial CmRadio window is empty until a conversation begins with the scanner. CmRadio must remain running on the Radio Host at all times. If you shut CmRadio down, the scanners will stop operating properly.

Using the CmRadio Screen

When you start CmRadio, this is the screen that displays:

Select File > Options... to access CmRadio Options. Select File > Data Source... to configure the Data Source. Select File > Start Base Station to enable the base station. Select File > Start Base Station to refresh the base station. Select File > Lock CMRadio... to cause the CMRadio screen to be disabled. Page 404 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan NOTE: This means that you can not close the program down by clicking the X button in the upper right of the main screen. There is a default password that will re-enable the screen and that password can be changed with an entry to the CMRadio.ini file.

Using Custom Employee ID Bar-codes

You can instruct CmRadio to recognize your own Employee ID barcodes if the Employee ID bar-codes are presented in Code 3 of 9 format and all IDs begin with a consistent prefix. For example, consider this set of IDs. L1A123456 123456) L1X555555 555555) L13314159 314159) (where the actual employee ID is (where the actual employee ID is (where the actual employee ID is

In this case the consistent prefix is L1, the first two positions of the code. The third position is not consistent, but is to be ignored. Using Notepad, edit the file C:\WINDOWS\CMRADIO.INI. Add the following lines to the [RF] section of the file. [RF] CustomEmployeePrefix=L1 CustomEmployeeOffset=3 CustomEmployeePrefix specifies the consistent prefix. CustomEmployeeOffset indicates that the first three characters should be discarded. Consider another set of IDs. XB219HAMILTON XB314DENISE XB511ROBERTS In the case the prefix is XB, the meaningful IDs are 219,314, 511 and the remainder of the code is informational but not significant. [RF] CustomEmployeePrefix=XB CustomEmployeeOffset=2 Page 405 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan CustomEmployeeLength=3 CustomEmployeePrefix specifies the consistent prefix. CustomEmployeeOffset indicates that the first two characters should be discarded. CustomEmployeeLength indicates that only the next three characters represent the Employee ID. If your Employee ID bar-codes have no prefix at all then the entry should be: [RF] CustomEmployeePrefix=*****

Understanding CmRadio Options

To access, CmRadio Options, follow the steps below: 1. Click File > Options. A login dialog box displays. 2. Enter your login information. 3. Click OK. The CribMaster Radio Options dialog box displays:

Page 406 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Communication Parameters - Use these options to define how CmRadio communicates with the scanners. Disable Beamers - The CribMaster Radio program will monitor the activity of Beamers via a Command Base connected to a Host Computers serial port. It will also monitor the activity of Dolphins that communicate through a wireless network point. It can monitor both types of mobile units at once, but the typical installation will have either Beamers or Dolphins but not both. If you are using Beamers, then leave Disable Beamers unchecked and select appropriate Comm Port. If you are not using Beamers, check Disable Beamers and the Comm Port option will be disabled. The Comm Port setting is not necessary with Dolphins. Beamer Command Base Comm Port (examples: COM1, COM2,...): (DEBUG) - If using a Beamer, set the comm port for its base here. Login Options - Use these options to define how a user logs in and what functions they are able to use. Always request PIN Even if Employee Barcode Scanned - When a user Signs ON to the CribMaster Radio program through a mobile unit, a password may be required. This will depend on whether the user has been assigned a password, whether the Employee ID was keyed or scanned, and the Always Request PIN option. If an employee has not been assigned a password, then the mobile unit will not ask for one. If a password is assigned and the Always Request PIN option is checked, then the password will always be required. If a password is assigned and the Always Request PIN option is unchecked, the behavior will depend on whether the Employee ID was keyed or scanned. If keyed, a password will be requested. If scanned, the password is not required. This is typical when possession of an Employee ID barcode is considered adequate identification. It is a trusting arrangement that expedites work, since the user need not key a password if an employee-coded badge is available. Prompt for Assigned Crib - Set this option to require the user to state an assigned crib. NOTE: This option is typically enabled if the Scanner is used in multiple Cribs (i.e. the scanner is used in Crib 1 most of the time however Crib 2 which is on the other side of the building uses the scanner sometimes).

Page 407 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Enable Return New (RETNEW) - Check this option to enable RETNEW. Enable One Step Transfer Mode (LOCATE) - Check this option to enable LOCATE. Enable Two Step Transfer Mode (TRANSFER) - Check this option to enable TRANSFER. Enable Bin Quantity Adjustments (ADJUST) - Check this option to enable ADJUST. Enable Inspection Mode (INSPECT) - Check this option to enable INSPECT. Enable Work Order Mode (WOMODE) - Check this option to enable WOMODE. Enable Linked Files Mode (LINK) - Check this option to enable link mode. Enable Scrap Mode (SCRAP) - Check this option to enable scrap mode. Enable Reservation Creation (RESRVE) - Check this option to enable reservation mode. Enable Assign Mode (ASSIGN) - Check this option to enable assign mode. NOTE: This checkbox allows a user to assign an item to a location. This is typically used on Vertical Lifts such as the Remstar Titan. Require quantities to be assigned - Check this box to require that a quantity is entered when an item is assigned to a location. Issuing Options - Use these fields to set how items are issued. Assume ISSUING to Login Employee if only ISSUE is permitted In self-serve environments, users may employ mobile units to ISSUE expendable items to themselves. Under normal work-flow, an ISSUE transaction requires an employee to SIGN ON, select F1=ISSUE from the menu, scan the employee receiving the item, scan the CribBin of the item, enter the quantity, and press ENTER. In self service, the employee barcode is scanned twice, once when signing on and again to indicate receipt of the item. To eliminate the redundancy, if the employee has only Transaction : Issue Items privilege and the Assume ISSUE to Log-in ID is checked, the system will move directly from the SIGN ON request to the SCAN CRIBBIN request. This eliminates a menu choice and a second scan of the employee barcode.

Page 408 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Search Entire Crib Area for ItemNumber to CribBin Conversion Receiving Options - Use these fields to set how items are received. Allow One Step Receipt of an Entire Purchase Order - The mobile unit can be granted the power to receive all items listed on a Purchase Order with just a few scans. This eliminates the need to scan each line item on the PO individually. This, at times, can be a considerable time saver, but it has some drawbacks. It is possible that few purchase orders are filled completely. Sometimes there are shortages and sometimes there are over shipments. It may be best to enter the receipts one item at a time during close inspection. You need to weigh the benefits of rapid processing against the risk of accidentally booking an entire PO received when only part of was actually received. Check Allow Receive All PO to enable the feature. Skip Menu if only RECEIVE is Permitted - In some sites, suppliers may be trained to use a mobile unit to receive their own deliveries into the system. In this case a delivery person might be assigned an Employee ID where the employee only has Purchasing : Receive Inventory privilege. When this is the case and Skip Menu if only RECEIVE is Allowed is checked, the system will skip the menu and go directly into RECEIVE mode. Allow Marking Complete When Receiving Less than Original Quantity - Check this option to enable users to complete a receive when the number of items is less than the original quantity. Edit Custom Fields on Purchase Order When Item Fails Inspection - Check this option to enable custom fields for purchase orders of items that fail inspection. Counting Options - Use these options to define counting features. Don't Display Current Quantity when Counting - In most cases, to perform a thorough inventory count, you may not want the count taker to know the current database Bin Quantity. Such knowledge could influence the counted quantity. If you check this option, the mobile unit will not display the database Bin Quantity. Confirm Which Count Adjustments Are Included in Usage Prompt for Storage Space when Counting - Check this option if you are using crib spaces. Allow Counting of Checked Out Serialized Items - Check this option to enable the user to include checked out serialized items in item counts.

Page 409 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Display Options - Use these options to define what displays on the screen of the scanner. Show the Item Description when Receiving - Check this option to display the descriptions of items as they are being received. Show Bin Quantity When Issuing - Check this option to display the bin quantity when issuing an item. Show Open Order Quantity When Issuing - When in ISSUE more it might be useful to know if any items are on order for a specified CribBin. Display Description 2 Instead of Description 1 - Check this option to display the Description 2 field rather than Description 1. Add Crib and Bin to Description - Check this option to have the system add the crib and bin numbers to the item description. Add Item Number to Description - Check this option to have the system add the item number to the item description. Display Custom Inventory Field instead of Description 1 Kit Options - Use this option to define how kits are handled by the scanner. Allow Kit Building - Mobile units can assist in the process of building kits. Since some sites may not use kits, you may wish to remove BUILD KITS from the menu, just to simplify the choices offered to the user of the mobile unit. Check Allow Kit Building only if you want the choice to appear on the mobile unit menu. CMAX Options - Use these options to define how the scanner handles CMAX. Allow Kit Retrieval Preferred Crib Area Allow Broken Barcodes - Select this option to allow barcodes with spaces. Truncate this Text from Kit Item Barcodes - This option relates to the GET KIT function that works in conjunction with CMAX The GET KIT function allows an operator to scan the barcode of an ItemNumber of a Kit and the CMRadio program will instruct CMAX to retrieve all of the Kit components from an automated storage device (probably a vertical storage machine). In case the barcode you are scanning contains more information than the ItemNumber, this option will allow the system to strip away the extra information and therefore derive the actual ItemNumber. Advanced Options - Use these options to define the more advanced features.

Page 410 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Force Encrypted Communications Port Number for Socket Communications Use Database Lookups to Identify Legacy Barcodes - This allows you to work better with barcodes that dont have the data element identifier at the beginning (for example /E for an employee badge). The system will try to determine if the scanned value is an Employee, CribBin, Serial ID, Item, or User Defined Table value by searching the tables for a match. Enable Additional Symbologies - By default only codes 3 of 9 barcode symbologies on a mobile scanner will be enabled. If this is checked then when the mobile scanner connects with CMRadio, an instruction will be sent to the mobile scanner to enable other symbologies such as Code 128. This was important for a scanner like Beamer or Dophin which are older types of mobile scanners, but with the newer scanners the extra symbologies are enabled by default. Trace Log File Name (Blank Means NO Tracing) - Enter a log file name to keep a trace log.

Page 411 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

CmScan Overview
CmScan is a Windows Mobile program designed to currently run on Motorola (Symbol) Wireless Bar Code scanners. CmScan collects input from the scanner and keyboard and transmits it to CmRadio. CmRadio processes the input and makes all database and printing requests. CmRadio then transmits prompts and other information back to the scanner for display on the screen. CmScan displays 2 rows of push buttons at the top of the screen. The second row of push buttons is used to show functions that CmRadio is making available. Press these buttons on the touch screen. NOTE: This program is not portable from one device to another so that the version for the particular type of scanner used is required.

Starting CribMaster CmScan

To Launch the CribMaster CmScan Program go to Start>CribMaster CmScan on the Scanner.

Page 412 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Signing On to CMScan
After the scanner connects to the CM Radio program, sign on the CribMaster user by doing one of the following: Scan the employee badge. Key in the Employees ID manually using the keypad and pressing the key. If password entry is required, enter the password

Understanding CMScan Functions

mScan displays 2 rows of push buttons at the top of the screen: Logoff This button logs the current user off CmScan. Be Batch This button switches from RF (radio frequency) to batch mode. Batch mode should only be used when the wireless network is unavailable. When in Batch mode this button will display Be Radio. Config This button allows for setting the Host computer (CMRadio) and designate the home crib. About This button displays Winware, Inc info.

Page 413 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan NOTE: The above view in CmScan is often referred to as Neutral Mode. This is when a CribMaster user is logged into CmScan but no Mode is selected. The second row of push buttons is used to show the available functions on CmRadio. The modes or functions available correspond to the login users CribMaster security access privileges. RFID This button displays if your scanner is RFID compatible. Issue Press this button to enter Issue Mode. Return Press this button to enter Return Mode. More1 Press here to view more buttons. See below.

Retnew Press this button to enter Retnew (or Return New) mode. Recv Press this button to enter Receive Mode. Inspect - Press this button to enter Inspect Mode. More2 Press here to view more buttons. See below.

Page 414 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Count Press this button to enter Count Mode. Adjust Press this button to enter Adjust Mode. Locate Press this button to enter Locate Mode. More3 Press here to view more buttons.

Trnsfr Press this button to enter Transfer Mode. Bulk Press this button to enter Bulk Issue Mode.

NOTE: These functions are enabled in CM Radio under File > Options

Page 415 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Using Issue Mode

To enter Issue mode: 1. Do one of the following: Press the Press F1. button.

Once the ISSUE button selection has been recognized, the ENTER EMPLOYEE ID prompt will display on the screen.

2. Do one of the following: Scan the employee badge. Enter the EMPLOYEE ID number and press to continue.

Once the issue to employee has been recognized, the SCAN BIN/SERIAL prompt will be displayed on the screen.

Page 416 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 3. Do one of the following: Scan the bin or serial ID bar code. Enter the data and press to continue.

TIP: Press F1 to review default values set at the employee level for CribMaster User Defined Fields. The User Defined Fields are typically Department, Organization, Job, Machine, Cell, and Station etc Once the
BIN

CONTAINS X

or SERIAL ID is recognized, the QUANTITY IS X and will the displayed on the screen.

BIN

4. Do one of the following: Accept the default issue quantity and press the button. Enter a different quantity in the quantity field and then press the button to continue.

NOTE: The CribMaster default issue quantity for that item will show as QUANTITY IS X. Serialized items will always have a default issue quantity of 1. The current bin quantity for that item will show as BIN CONTAINS X. TIP: The green instead of the button on the scanner may also be pressed

ENTER

button to issue the item and continue.

Page 417 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Once the issue transaction is accepted, the issue to employee name and SCAN NEXT ITEM prompt will be displayed on the screen again. 5. Scan another BIN or SERIAL ID barcode to issue to the same employee.

NOTE: When scanning the BIN barcode that contains serialized items, the scan serial ID prompt will be displayed on the screen. Scan the SERIAL ID instead of the bin bar code for serialized bin locations.

Page 418 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 6. To confirm the issue press to continue.

NOTE: While in ISSUE MODE, issue to another employee by simply scanning that employees badge. Do not press the cancel button to issue to the next employee. CmScan will log in the next employee to issue to. button will then 7. The return to the NEUTRAL MODE screen and be logged out of ISSUE MODE.

Page 419 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Understanding Mark Outs

If the bin you are attempting to scan is empty, CM Scan will display an error message: Press Mark out to add a record to the Stock Out report. Each time the bin is scanned, a record is added to denote how many times a user attempted to issue the item.

Using Return Mode

The RETURN MODE feature allows non-expendable items to be returned to a bin. To return expendable items see the Retnew section of this guide. To enter return mode, follow the steps below: 1. Press . Once the return selection has been recognized, the screen displays checked out items for the crib.

Page 420 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

TIP: Press Choose item to cycle through the list of employees with checked out items.

NOTE: Scanning a serial id barcode, or item barcode, or employee badge barcode, or crib/bin barcode will speed up the process. This will filter the selection list. Scan Serial ID Barcode filtered by ID. Scan Employee Barcode filtered by items checked out to employee. Scan Crib/Bin Barcode filtered by Employee with items checked out for the crib/bin. Scan Item Barcode filtered by employee. 2. Scan the employee badge or input the EMPLOYEE ID number and press to continue.

Once the employee id is recognized, the CHOOSING FROM X prompt will be displayed on the screen.

Page 421 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

3. Scan the crib/bin barcode or input the crib/bin number and press to continue. 4. Once the cribbin has been recognized, the QUANTITY IS X prompt will be displayed on the to confirm screen. Press quantity or input the correct qty to be returned and press .

5. Once the quantity be returned is recognized, the screen will display different options. Select RETURN, SCRAP, or UNUSABLE buttons to continue. RETURN back to inventory. SCRAP to remove from inventory. CANCEL to cancel transaction and return to previous screen.

Page 422 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Once the item disposition has been recognized, the screen displays the return crib/bin. 6. Press to confirm.

Once return transaction is complete the displayed on screen again. 7. Scan another employee ID to Continue returning items. CHOOSE ITEM and remain in return mode. CANCEL and return to the neutral mode.

CHOOSE ITEM

prompt will be

Page 423 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

8. The

button returns to the NEUTRAL MODE screen and logs out of RETURN MODE.

Using Retnew Mode

The RETNEW MODE feature allows the return of expendable items to a bin without having to associate the items with any particular checkout transaction. Specified employees buckets for Weekly, Monthly, and Yearly budgets will be credited for the return. This feature can be enabled/disabled based on the CribMaster Radio Options. button to 1. Select the enter RETNEW MODE. Once the RETNEW selection has been recognized, the SCAN EMPLOYEE OR ITEM OR CRIBBIN prompt displays on the screen.

Page 424 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

2. Scan the employee badge or input the employee ID number and press . Once the employee id has been recognized, the SCAN ITEM OR CRIBBIN prompt will appear on the screen.

3. Scan the crib/bin barcode or input the crib/bin number and press to continue.

Page 425 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

4. Once the cribbin has been recognized, the ENTER QUANTITY prompt will be displayed on the screen. Input the quantity to be returned and press continue. to

5. Once the transaction is complete the NEXT ITEM OR CRIBBIN prompt will be displayed on the screen again. Scan next item to continue with retnew.

Page 426 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

6. The button will then return to the NEUTRAL MODE screen and be logged out of RETNEW MODE.

Using Receive Mode

The RECEIVE feature is used to process receipt of items ordered from suppliers. Once the item on the PO is received, the line item is marked received and the line is closed on the purchase order. 1. Select the button to enter RECEIVE MODE. Once the receive selection has been recognized, the SCAN PO NUMBER or DETAIL SEQUENCE NO prompt displays on the screen. button does not

NOTE: If the

appear on the screen, press the button to locate the button.

Page 427 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

2. Scan the supplier PO NUMBER or the original SEQUENCE NUMBER from the PO. NOTE: The DETAIL SEQUENCE NO identifies the item and the PO for that item. If the DETAIL SEQUENCE NO is not available scan the PO and choose the item from the list. NOTE: Unlike some of the other PDT functions, the receive functions requires that the PO NUMBER or DETAIL SEQUENCE NO are scanned. This information my not be input using the keypad.

3. Once the DETAIL SEQUENCE NUMBER has been recognized, the QUANTITY IS X and item description will be displayed on the screen. Press to confirm quantity or input to the correct qty and press continue. Once the quantity received has been recognized, the ENTER = RECEIVE prompt displays on the screen.

Page 428 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

4. Press

to confirm receive.

TIP: Some items may require inspection. If that is the case, press inspection. to send to

NOTE: Inspection is an additional feature of receiving. Items sent to inspection are set aside and inspected before they are received.

5. Once the receive selection has been recognized, a confirmation message will appear. Press to confirm and continue. Once the transaction is complete the SCAN PO NUMBER or DETAIL SEQUENCE NO prompt will be displayed on the screen again.

Page 429 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 6. Scan another PO NUMBER or receive mode.

DETAIL SEQUENCE NO

to continue with screen

7. The button will then return to the and be logged out of RETNEW MODE.

NEUTRAL MODE

Using Inspect Mode

Inspect Receipts is an additional feature of receiving. Items sent to inspection are set aside and inspected before they are received. Only item sent to inspection from receiving can be processed through the INSPCT mode. This feature can be enabled/disabled based on the CribMaster Radio Options. 1. Select the button to Enter INSPCT MODE. Once the INSPECT selection has been recognized, the SCAN TRANSFER ID
OR PO DETAILS SEQ NO PROMPT

displays on the screen.

2. Scan the transfer ID or PO number. Once the ID/Number is recognized, the description and the and

buttons display on the screen.

Page 430 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

3. When the inspect process has been completed, press the button to continue. Once the receive selection has been recognized, the ENTER QTY X prompt displays on the screen. NOTE: Skip to step 7 if failing inspect process.

4. Press

to confirm quantity or input the correct qty and press

to continue. If the item is a serialized item, a NEXT SERIAL ID IS XXXXX SCAN TO CHANGE prompt displays on the screen. 5. Press to confirm the next serial ID or input the correct

serial id and press to continue. Once quantity and/or serial number assignment has been recognized, a RECEIVE COMPLETE PRESS ENTER KEY prompt displays on the screen. NOTE: The serial numbers are automatically generated sequentially. If receiving a quantity of more than one on the same transaction, only the first serial number will be entered. All other serial numbers received within this group will be assigned sequentially after the first serial number.

Page 431 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 6. Press to confirm and continue. Once the transaction is complete the SCAN TRANSFER ID OR PO DETAIL SEQ NO prompt displays on the screen again. Scan another TRANSFER ID OR PO DETAIL SEQ NO to continue with the INSPECT mode. The following steps are for items that fail the inspect process. 7. When the inspect process has been completed and the item did not pass inspection, press the button to continue. Once the fail selection has been recognized, the ENTER QTY X prompt displays on the screen.

8. Press to confirm quantity or input the correct qty and press to continue. Once quantity has been recognized, a FAIL COMPLETE PRESS ENTER KEY prompt displays on the screen.

Page 432 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 9. Press to confirm and continue. Once the transaction is complete the SCAN TRANSFER ID OR PO DETAIL SEQ NO prompt will display on the screen again. 10. Scan another TRANSFER ID OR PO DETAIL SEQ NO to continue with INSPECT mode.

Using Count Mode

The COUNT feature is used to count a bin for cycle counting purposes. Bins that are counted using this feature are populated with a count date and will not need to be counted again until the next cycle. 1. Select the button to enter COUNT MODE. Once the COUNT selection is recognized, the SCAN CRIBBIN/ITEM prompt will display on the screen. button does not

NOTE: If the

appear on the screen, press the button to locate the button.

Page 433 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 2. Scan the crib/bin or input the cribbin and press to confirm and continue. Once the CribBin is recognized, the QUANTITY IS X prompt displays on the screen.

3. Press to confirm quantity or input the correct qty and press to continue. Once the entered quantity has been recognized, a COUNT ACCEPTED SCAN NEXT BIN/ITEM prompt will display on the screen again.

4. Scan another bin to continue with

COUNT

mode.

Page 434 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Counting Serialized Items

1. Once the serialized item number is recognized, a scan serial id prompt will be displayed on the screen. Scan or input the serial id and press to continue. Once all SERIAL IDS have been recognized, a VERIFIED SCAN NEXT BIN/ITEM prompt displays on the screen.

2. Scan another bin to continue with

COUNT

mode.

Using Adjust Mode

Adjust mode is a feature used to add or subtract a quantity from a cribbin. Unlike the count mode, this feature does not update the last counted date. This feature can be enabled/disabled based on the CribMaster Radio Options. 1. Select the button to enter Once the ADJUST selection is recognized, the SCAN CRIBBIN/ITEM prompt displays on the screen.
ADJUST MODE.

NOTE: If the

button does not

appear on the screen, press the button to locate the button.

Page 435 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 2. Scan the crib/bin or input the cribbin and press to confirm and continue. Once the cribbin has been recognized, three options will be displayed on the screen.

3. Press F1 to add to the existing quantity or F4 to cancel the transaction. Once the add selection has been recognized, the ADD XX-XX-X-X ENTER QUANTITY prompt will display on the screen. NOTE: Skip to step 6 if subtracting.

Page 436 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

4. Input the additional quantity and press to continue. Once the additional quantity has been recognized, the
ADJUSTMENT ACCEPTED SCAN NEXT BIN

prompt will display on the screen.

5. Scan another bin to continue with

ADJUST

mode.

6. Press F2 to subtract from the existing quantity. Once the subtract selection has been recognized, the SUB XX-XX-X-X ENTER QUANTITY PROMPT will display on the screen.

Page 437 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

7. Input the quantity to be subtracted and press to continue. Once the additional quantity has been recognized, the ADJUSTMENT ACCEPTED SCAN NEXT BIN prompt will be displayed on the screen.

8. Scan another bin to continue with ADJUST mode.

NOTE: If quantity subtracted is more than the bin count, a EXCEEDS BIN QUANTITY PRESS ENTER KEY prompt will display on the screen. Press Enter to continue.

Page 438 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

NOTE: Serialized items cannot be adjusted using the Adjust feature. The CAN NOT ADJUST SERIALIZED ITEM prompt will display on the screen.

Using Locate Mode

The locate feature is used to re-locate an item from bin to another within a crib. This is also known as a one-step transfer. This feature can be enabled/disabled based on the CribMaster Radio Options. 1. Select the button to enter Once the locate selection is recognized, the SCAN SOURCE BIN OR SERIAL ID prompt will display on the screen.
LOCATE MODE.

NOTE: If the

button does not

appear on the screen, press the button to find the button.

Page 439 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

2. Scan the SOURCE BIN (originating bin) or input the data and press to continue. Once the SOURCE BIN is recognized, a QUANTITY IS X prompt will be displayed on the screen. NOTE: Skip to step 7 if relocating using a serial ID.

3. Press

to confirm quantity or input

the correct qty and press to continue. Once the quantity is recognized, a SCAN DESTINATION BIN prompt displays on the screen. NOTE: If destination bin does not exist, press new bin to add a new destination bin.

Page 440 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

4. Scan or input the DESTINATION bin and press enter to continue. Once the destination bin is recognized, a FROM XX-XXXXX TO XX-XXXXX prompt displays on the screen.

5. Press Enter to confirm and continue. Once the transaction is recognized, a transfer completed prompt displays on the screen.

Page 441 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

6. Press locate more to continue with The locate function. Once the LOCATE MORE selection is recognized, the SCAN SOURCE BIN OR SERIAL ID prompt displays on the screen.

7. Scan the

SERIAL ID

or input the

data and press to continue. Once the serial id is recognized, a SCAN DESTINATION BIN prompt displays on the screen.

8. Scan the destination bin on input the data and press enter to continue.

Page 442 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Using Transfer Mode

The transfer mode feature is used to complete a transfer transaction for an item from one crib to another crib. This function is also known as a scheduled transfer. This feature can be enabled/disabled based on the CribMaster Radio Options. 1. Select the button to enter TRANSFER MODE. Once the transfer selection is recognized, a SCAN CHECK POINT prompt displays on the screen. NOTE: If the button does not display on the screen, press the button to locate the button.

2. Scan the destination crib/bin barcode or input the data and press enter. Once the destination cribbin is recognized, a SCAN TRANSFER ID prompt displays on the screen.

Page 443 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan NOTE: To see the transfer details, press the review transfers button. When the SCAN TRANSFER ID prompt displays on the screen, scan the transfer id or input the data and press Enter to continue.

NOTE: Once the transfer id is recognized, the item description and quantity displays on the screen. Press F1 to return from review.

Page 444 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 3. Scan the TRANSFER ID or input the data and press enter to continue. Once the transfer id is recognized, a FROM XX-XXXXX AVAIL QTY XXXX QTY (XX) prompt displays on the screen.

4. Press Enter to process the transfer. A TO XX-XX TRANSFER ID XX QTY = X prompt displays.

Page 445 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 5. Press Confirm to complete the transfer. TO CRIB X SCAN NEXT TRANSFER displays.

6. Scan the next transfer id to continue with transfer or Cancel to exit Transfer Mode.

Using RFID Functions on Symbol Scanners

NOTE: CribMaster Version 7.60 or later and CMScan 4.07 or later are required, as well as the RFID add-on for the Symbol Scanner. Understanding RFID Functions 1. Assign This is used to assign the RFID Tag to an item. 2. Find This is used to find Serialized Items within the facility. NOTE: This is only available for Serialized items. 3. Test This is used to test a tag to see if it can be read. TIP: This is used in cases where customers are evaluating different tags or if a customer wants to see if a tag is being read. 4. Count This is used to count a complete RFID Crib. NOTE: This works in conjunction to the Cycle Counting Screen in CribMaster.

Page 446 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Logging onto the Scanner and Accessing RFID Mode 1. From the log in screen, scan a barcoded badge or enter in a login. The RFID button displays:

2. Touch RFID. The RFID screen displays:

Page 447 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Assigning a Tag 1. From the RFID screen, touch Assign. 2. Do one of the following: Scan the barcode of the item. Enter the item number. 3. Wave the tagged item in front of scanner. The number of tags read displays:

4. Touch Done. 5. Press Enter. Using Find NOTE: The Find function only works for serialized items. 1. Do one of the following: Scan the barcode of the serial number. Enter the serial number. 2. Aiming the scanner at the items, move it back and forth until the scanner beeps. The item is located.

Page 448 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Using Count NOTE: This function works in conjunction with the Cycle Counting section in CribMaster. 1. From the RFID screen, press More 2. Press Count. 3. Do one of the following: Scan the barcode of the crib. Enter the crib number and press Enter. NOTE: The system expects that you have no more than one CribBin for a given item. If the system detects that an item has more than one CribBin in the specified Crib, the counting process will not continue. 4. If you have a previous unfinished count, the system will prompt for you to either complete the previous count or begin a new one:

Do one of the following: Press New to start a new list and begin reading. Press Append to add to the previous list and begin reading. 5. Touch Start reading.

Page 449 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 6. Wave the scanner in the direction of the items while pressing in the trigger. The scanner detects all valid tags. 7. Let go of the trigger. The screen shows the number of tags found:

8. Touch Done. 9. Touch Store to keep the data. The unit stores the data. 10. Press Enter. The count data is transmitted to CM Radio and is registered. NOTE: This function is normally used with RFID Portals to do fast counting of item in the crib. NOTE: The user will need to go into the Cycle Counting section in CribMaster (Actions > Cycle Counting) to complete the counts and do any needed adjustments to items that have been found in the crib.

Page 450 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Using Bulk Issue Mode

The Bulk Issue feature allows the issue of a bulk quantity for an expendable item. If a CribBin ID is scanned, it is assumed that the issue quantity will be large enough to bring the Bin Quantity down to the Order Point so that a purchase order will be recommended.

1. Select the button to enter BULK MODE. Once the Bulk selection is recognized, the ENTER EMPLOYEE ID prompt displays on the screen. NOTE: If the button does not

appear on the screen, press the button to locate the button.

2. Scan the employee id or input the data and press enter. Once the employee ID is recognized, the SCAN WATERMARK BIN prompt displays on the screen.

Page 451 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 3. Scan the cribbin or input the data and press Enter. Once the watermark cribbin is recognized, the item description and quantity is xx prompt displays on the screen.

4. Press Enter to confirm quantity or input the correct qty and press Enter. Once the bulk issue transaction is recognized, the scan next item prompt displays. NOTE: The QUANTITY IS XX will display the available quantity minus the minimum bin quantity. The BIN CONTAINS XX is the quantity in the bin including the minimum bin quantity.

5. Scan the next cribbin to continue with bulk issue.

Page 452 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Issuing Reservations
Issuing Reservations is similar to issuing items. To enter Issue mode: 1. Do one of the following: Press the Press F1. button.

Once the ISSUE button selection has been recognized, the ENTER EMPLOYEE ID prompt will display on the screen.

2. Do one of the following: Scan the employee badge. Enter the EMPLOYEE ID number and press to continue.

Once the issue to employee has been recognized, the SCAN BIN/SERIAL prompt displays on the screen.

Page 453 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 3. Scan the reservation you want to Issue. CM Scan enters Reservation Mode.

4. Scan the bin, item or serial ID.

Page 454 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 5. Do one of the following: Press Enter to accept the default issue quantity. Enter a new quantity and press Enter.

6. Scan next item or Cribbin on the reservation. TIP: You can scan an item that is not in the reservation. In this case, CM Scan displays a warning. Press F4 to cancel or F1 to confirm and issue.

Page 455 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan TIP: If you scan a CribBin twice, CMScan displays a warning. Press F4 to cancel or F1 to confirm and issue.

NOTE: If you attempt to scan a reservation that has already been closed, CMScan displays an error and will not allow you to issue associated items.

Page 456 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

Using Preventive Maintenance

CM Scan includes functions for working with tasks and work orders. The installation of CribMaster against which CM Scan is run must include a Preventive Maintenance license. Issuing Items Against a Work Order 1. Do one of the following: Press the Press F1. button.

Once the ISSUE button Selection has been recognized, the ENTER EMPLOYEE ID prompt will display on the screen.

2. Do one of the following: Scan the employee badge. Enter the EMPLOYEE ID number and press to continue.

Once the issue to employee has been recognized, the SCAN BIN/SERIAL prompt will be displayed on the screen.

Page 457 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

3. Using the printed work order, scan the barcode of the item you want to issue. Once the BIN or SERIAL ID is recognized, the QUANTITY IS X and BIN CONTAINS X displays on the screen.

4. Do one of the following: Accept the default issue quantity and press the button. Enter a different quantity in the quantity field and then press the button to continue.

Once the issue transaction is accepted, the issue to employee name and SCAN NEXT ITEM prompt will be displayed on the screen again.

Page 458 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

5. Do one of the following: Scan another BIN or SERIAL ID barcode to issue to the same employee. Press Mode. to return to Neutral

Completing Tasks 1. Scan the barcode of the work order for which you want to mark tasks as Complete. SCAN TASK displays on the screen.

Page 459 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

2. Scan the task you want to mark as Complete. Several options display.

3. Press to mark the task as Complete. A confirmation prompt displays. 4. Press the completion. button to confirm

Page 460 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Adding Tasks to a Work Order You can print a master list of all tasks in CribMaster by clicking Maintenance > Print Tasks 1. Scan the barcode of the work order to which you want to add tasks. SCAN TASK displays on the screen.

2. Scan the task you want to add. The task is added.

NOTE: The barcodes on the master list are different than the barcodes for the same tasks on the print out for the work order. If you scan a tasks barcode on the master list and that task is already associated with the work order, a second instance of the task will be added.

Page 461 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan Removing Tasks From a Work Order 1. Scan the barcode of the work order for which you want to remove tasks. SCAN TASK displays on the screen.

2. Scan the task you want to remove From the work order. Several options display.

Page 462 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

3. Press . The task is removed from the work order. A confirmation prompt displays. 4. Press the button to confirm the task removal.

Logging Labor against a Work Order 1. Scan the barcode of the work order for which you want to log labor. SCAN TASK displays on the screen.

Page 463 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

2. Press display.

. Several options

3. Press . CM Scan prompts for a work order.

Page 464 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 4. Scan the work order against which you want to log labor. The system prompts for a task. NOTE: To log general labor, skip to step 13.

5. Scan the task off the work order you want to log. The task displays.

TIP: Press to change the employee to which you want to log labor.

Page 465 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

6. Press displays.

. A confirmation prompt

5. Press the

button to confirm.

6. When the task is complete, scan the barcode of its work order. SCAN TASK displays on the screen.

Page 466 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

7. Press display.

. Several options

8. Press . CM Scan prompts for a work order.

Page 467 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 9. Scan the work order against which you want to log labor. The system prompts for a task.

10. Scan the work order task you want to log. The task displays.

Page 468 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

11. Press displays.

. A confirmation prompt

12. Press the

button to confirm.

13. To log general labor, press Several options display.

Page 469 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

14. Press displays.

. A confirmation prompt

15. Press the button to confirm. 16. When the task is complete, scan the barcode of its work order. SCAN TASK displays on the screen.

Page 470 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

17. Press display.

. Several options

18. Press . CM Scan prompts for a work order.

Page 471 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

19. Scan the work order against which you want to log labor. The system prompts for a task.

20. To log general labor, press Several options display.

Page 472 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

21. Press . A confirmation prompt displays.

22. Press the

button to confirm.

Entering a set amount of time 1. Scan the barcode of the work order for which you want to log labor. SCAN TASK displays on the screen.

Page 473 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

2. Press display.

. Several options

3. Press . CM Scan prompts for a work order.

Page 474 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

4. Scan the work order against which you want to log labor. The system prompts for a task.

5. Scan the task off the work order you want to log. The task displays.

TIP: Press to change the employee to which you want to log labor.

Page 475 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

6. Press . A prompt displays for the number of hours of labor completed. 7. Using the keypad on the scanner, enter the number of hours completed.

8. Press . A prompt displays for the number of minutes of labor completed. 9. Using the keypad on the scanner, enter the number of hours completed.

Page 476 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

10. Press displays. 11. Press

. A confirmation prompt .

Tracking Work Order Locations CM Scan can track work orders from location to location. This helps users determine where the work orders are being performed. 1. Scan the barcode of the work order you want to track. SCAN TASK displays on the screen.

Page 477 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

2. Press display.

. Several options

3. Press . A prompt for a work order location displays.

Page 478 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan 4. Scan the work order location barcode. A prompt displays for additional scans.

5. Do one of the following: Scan another work order for location tracking. Press to exit work order location tracking mode.

Closing Work Orders Work orders can be closed from within CM Scan. 1. Scan the barcode of the work order you want to close. SCAN TASK displays on the screen.

Page 479 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

2. Press display.

. Several options

3. Press . A prompt for a work order location displays.

Page 480 of 525

Using CmRadio and CMScan

4. Press . A prompt for another work order to close displays.

5. Do one of the following: Scan another work order for closing. Press to exit work order closing mode.

Page 481 of 525

Page 482 of 525

Using ATR

Chapter 18: Using ATR

CribMaster ATR allows users to control the distribution of tools and tooling components through a variety of automated storage and retrieval devices all activated by a single touch-screen interface.

Assigning a Crib to ATR 9

When you start ATR 9 for the first time, it displays the Crib Assignment Wizard:

1. Select a type of vending machine. ) to add the unit. 2. Click the right arrow ( 3. Click the space in the Crib column. A keypad displays in the center of the screen:

Page 483 of 525

Using ATR

4. Use the keypad to tap in the Crib number. 5. Touch Enter. NOTE: Once you have assigned a machine to a crib, no other machine may use the same crib number. 6. Touch Default Options. The Default Options tab displays. 7. Touch the blank next to Default Employee. An onscreen keyboard displays. 8. Enter a valid Employee ID of the user that you want to be the default employee. 9. Touch Enter. NOTE: The Default Employee is the user to whom a transaction will be charged if the system, for some reason, is unable to determine the correct user. This user must exist in the CribMaster database and have proper access to the crib.

Page 484 of 525

Using ATR

Setting the Database Connection for ATR 9

There are four connection options for ATR 9: Local These options are used to connect to a local database. In this method, no data portal connection is required. Access Oracle SQL Server .NET Remoting In this method, the connection is made through a series of channeled proxies managed by the .NET Remoting runtime, which resides on the application server. You can host a .NET remoting application in a custom windows service, forms application or console application; however, WinWare only supports hosting the remoting data portal via IIS. WCF Service Windows Communication Foundation, or WCF, is way to run a server application as a service on any PC. WCF brings the best of .NET remoting and Web Services together. This means that you can host a WCF server in a windows service, a console application, a forms application or in IIS. WinWare supports hosting within a windows service and IIS. Web Service With this method, CribMaster connects to the CribMaster database through a web service. The web service is installed on a web server. The connection between the web service and the CribMaster database is established when the web service is installed. IMPORTANT: Note these rules for connecting to the data portal to download ATR updates: The user that first copies the ATR files from the data portal must have read rights to the computer running the data portal as well as read and write rights to the computer running ATR. The computer and Windows user of the ATR machine must have read rights to the computer running the data portal. The firewall and network settings for the computer running ATR must allow for the download of files with a .exe extension.

Page 485 of 525

Using ATR Connecting ATR To a Local Database 1. Touch Admin. The Admin screen displays. 2. Touch Options. The Options screen displays. 3. Touch Configure Connections. The Select Data Source dialog box displays:

4. For Database Provider Type, select one of the following: Oracle SQL Once you have selected the provider type, the Select Data Source dialog box alters:

5. Enter a Server Name. Page 486 of 525

Using ATR 6. Enter a Database Name. 7. To have the database log in information use Windows authentication, check Use integrated Security. 8. Enter any additional information. 9. Click OK. 10. Touch Save. ATR restarts. Connecting ATR to the Database Using .NET Remoting 1. Touch Admin. The Admin screen displays. 2. Touch Options. The Options screen displays. 3. Touch Configure Connections. The Select Data Source dialog box displays:

4. For Database Provider Type, select .NET Remoting. The Select Data Source dialog box alters:

Page 487 of 525

Using ATR 5. 6. 7. 8. Enter the .NET Remoting URL. Enter any additional information. Click OK. Touch Save. ATR restarts.

Connecting ATR to the Database Using A WCF Service 1. Touch Admin. The Admin screen displays. 2. Touch Options. The Options screen displays. 3. Touch Configure Connections. The Select Data Source dialog box displays:

4. For Database Provider Type, select WCF Service. The Select Data Source dialog box alters:

5. Enter the WCF Service URL. Page 488 of 525

Using ATR 6. Enter any additional information. 7. Click OK. 8. Touch Save. ATR restarts. Connecting ATR to the Database Using a Web Service 1. Touch Admin. The Admin screen displays. 2. Touch Options. The Options screen displays. 3. Touch Data Source. The Select Data Source dialog box displays:

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Ensure Web Service is selected as the Database Provider Type. Enter the Web Service URL. Enter any additional information. Click OK. Touch Save. ATR restarts.

Adding Secondary Cribs in ATR 9

To add a secondary crib in ATR, follow the steps below: 1. From the main screen, touch Admin. The admin screen displays. 2. Touch Options. The Options screen displays. 3. Select a vending machine. 4. Touch the right arrow ( ) to add the machine. The machine is listed after the master machine:

Page 489 of 525

Using ATR

5. Enter the Crib Number. NOTE: The primary machine is always listed first. In the above screenshot, Crib 12 is the master and Crib 10 is a secondary. TIP: You can move a secondary into the primary position by selecting it and touching Move Up until it is first in the list. Likewise, you can move a master into a secondary position by selecting it and touching Move Down until it is no longer the first in the list. 6. Touch Save.

Adjusting Item Counts in ATR

NOTE: You must have stock adjustment permissions to use Adjust Mode. To adjust bin quantities in ATR, follow the steps below: 1. Approach the monitor. 2. Do one of the following: Scan your employee badge. Double-Touch your name. Page 490 of 525

Using ATR

3. Touch Admin

. The Admin screen displays.

4. Touch Adjust . The Adjust screen displays. 5. Select an item to adjust its quantity. 6. Touch Adjust . A keypad displays with the current quantity in the blank. 7. Select a Reason Code if necessary. 8. Use the keypad to enter a new quantity. 9. Touch Adjust. The quantity is changed. Once the count is entered, the Date Counted field populates on the Bin Information tab of that bins properties.

Setting Up the Web Catalog

ATR features the ability to allow users to order product from a web catalog.

Setting the Web Catalog Address

To set up the Web Catalog address, follow the steps below: 1. Approach the monitor. 2. Do one of the following: Scan your employee badge. Double-Touch your name. 3. Touch Admin . The Admin screen displays.

4. Touch Options . The Options screen displays. 5. Touch Default Options. The Default Options tab displays. 6. Touch the blank next to CatalogURL. An onscreen keyboard displays. 7. Enter the web address for the web catalog. 8. Touch Enter. Page 491 of 525

Using ATR 9. Touch Save. The system displays the following prompt:

10.

Click OK. The application restarts.

Using the Web Catalog

A catalog button now displays at the top of the ATR 9 screen:

Click the web catalog button to access the online page of the venders catalog. The catalog page displays:

Page 492 of 525

Using ATR

The following table illustrates the function of each icon: Icon Function Press this button to return to the Issue Screen. Press this button to return to the first catalog page. Press this button to return to the previous catalog page. Press this button to move to the next catalog page. TIP: The links of the catalog page are active and can be used just like in any other web browser. NOTE: You are limited to only one catalog.

Linking Files for ATR in CM Client

Files can be linked to bins and items in CribMaster to be visible to users of ATR.

Page 493 of 525

Using ATR

Linking Guidelines
The following file types are supported: JPG, PDF (Requires Adobe Acrobat Reader to view), XLS (Requires Microsoft Excel to view), DOC (Requires Microsoft Word to view), BMP, PNG, GIF, RTF (Requires Microsoft Word to view) You can also link web sites to items and bins. Supported sites include but are not limited to: HTML and ASPX extensions. NOTE: ATR will only display linked web sites when in Connected Mode. ATR 9 downloads the image files once a week and places them under the ATR directory in the Local Links folder. Links are supported with HTTP, FTP or shared network folders. The Web Service or client machine will require access to these locations to download and display the links. Files larger than 125 KB will not display or be downloaded to ATR, although they will still be viewable in CribMaster.

Linking Files in CM Client

Linking Files to Items To link a file to a item in CribMaster, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Inventory Items... The Item Records screen displays. 2. Select the item you want to edit. 3. Click Properties. The Item Properties dialog box displays. The Item Information tab is in focus by default. 4. Click the Links tab. 5. Click New . A new line is added to the list. 6. Enter a Description that explains the type of file to which you are linking. 7. Under Filename, click the Browse button ( ). 8. Locate the file you want to link. 9. Click Open. 10. Enter any needed Print Codes. . 11. Click

Page 494 of 525

Using ATR Linking Files to Bins To link a file to a bin in CribMaster, follow the steps below: 1. Click Home > Bin... The Crib/Bin Records screen displays. 2. Select the bin you want to edit. 3. Click Properties. The Bin Properties dialog box displays. The Bin Information tab is in focus by default. 4. Click the Links tab. 5. Click New . A new line is added to the list. 6. Enter a Description that explains the type of file to which you are linking. ). 7. Under Filename, click the Browse button ( 8. Locate the file you want to link. 9. Click Open. 10. Enter any needed Print Codes. 11. Click . NOTE: When files are linked to both the bin and the item in the bin, the linked file for the bin takes precedence in ATR. NOTE: The first time some items are displayed, Windows shows a file open box with a checkbox that needs to be unchecked to allow the file to automatically open.

Viewing Linked Files in ATR 9

Enabling Images in ATR 9 To enable image viewing in ATR 9, follow the steps below: 1. From the main screen, touch Admin. The admin screen displays. 2. Touch Options. The Options screen displays. NOTE: In order to access the Default Options screen, you must be assigned to the DEFAULT site profile or have the Misc > ATR Options permission set in CribMaster Client. 3. Click Default Options. The Default Options screen displays. 4. Scroll down to the Formatting section:

Page 495 of 525

Using ATR

AllowCardView - If FALSE, Card View is not available to display. If TRUE, Card View is accessible and will display the first available image link on each card. (Default = FALSE) AllowCarouselView - If FALSE, Carousel View is not available to display. If TRUE, Carousel View is accessible and will display the first available image link on each card. (Default = FALSE) AllowGridView - If TRUE, Grid View is available to display. If FALSE, Grid View is not available to display. If the AllowCardView, AllowCarouseView and AllowGridView options are all FALSE, AllowGridView will display as if TRUE. (Default = TRUE) AllowItemInfo - If TRUE, the Item Info Button will display any valid links. Valid links are 125KB or smaller and one of the following file types: BMP, DOC, GIF, HTML, JPG, PDF, PNG, RTF or XLS. If FALSE, the Item Info Button will not display. (Default = TRUE) CardViewDefault - If FALSE, Grid View is the default view for the Issue Screen. If TRUE, Carousel View is the default view for the Issue Screen. If the AllowCarouselView option is FALSE or the CardViewDefault option is TRUE, this option is inapplicable. (Default = FALSE) CarouselViewDefault - If FALSE, Grid View is the default view for the Issue Screen. If TRUE, Carousel View is the default view for the Issue Screen. If the AllowCarouselView option is FALSE or the CardViewDefault option is TRUE, this option is inapplicable. (Default = FALSE) Card View To view images, click Card View from the Issue Screen.

Page 496 of 525

Using ATR

Carousel View To view images, click Carousel View from the Issue Screen.

Using the Cost Centers Screen in ATR

The Cost Centers screen is used in ATR to help enforce crib and item security for users issuing tools out of the crib. Page 497 of 525

Using ATR

Using the Cost Centers Screen

Depending on the options set for ATR, the Cost Centers screen may display as soon as a user logs in or the user may have to access it manually by pressing the Cost Centers button:

Features of the new Cost Centers screen: Color codes signify whether or not the data is acceptable: Red Blank or data is invalid Yellow This is the cost center in focus. Green Data is valid and acceptable An OPEN button has been added to the Cost Center screen for all Passive Devices (for situations where the user purposely goes to the Cost Center Screen). The grid configuration means less clicks are required to fill out the screen. The Select button has been removed.

Page 498 of 525

Using ATR

The CostCentersFirst Option

The CostCentersFirst option is available on the Default Options tab in ATR. If the option is FALSE, the Cost Centers Screen displays first if UDFs are required, otherwise only by pressing the Cost Centers Button. If TRUE, the Cost Centers Screen always displays prior to the Issue Mode Screen. (Default = FALSE). If cost centers are valid (green) and the option CostCentersFirst is set to FALSE, the user will go directly to the Issue Mode screen. In addition, if the option OpenOnAuthentication is set to TRUE, the machine will unlock automatically. NOTE: If the user presses the Cost Center Button, ATR will not automatically move to Issue Mode (or open on authentication). If the option CostCentersFirst is set to TRUE, the user will always be brought to the Cost Center Screen first regardless of whether or not their data is valid. If the users data is invalid then they will not be allowed to access Issue Mode regardless of whether or not the option CostCentersFirst is set to TRUE.

Using the Find Item Button in ATR

ATR features a Find Item function that allows users to locate items without having to log in. Users can search within one crib or every crib at the site.

Using Find Item on the Login Screen

1. At the login screen, select the Find Item button ( onscreen keyboard displays. 2. Enter your search criteria.

). An

NOTE: The Find Item function can search on any of the following fields: Item Number Description1 Description2

Page 499 of 525

Using ATR 3. Select Enter. ATR displays matching records. Results on the Find Items screen are sorted by Crib, Item, then CribBin. Any locations without quantity greater than the default issue quantity will be ghosted:

TIP: By default, Find Item locates the items within the crib from which you are searching. However, you can select All Cribs which will expand your search to all cribs in the site. Select any of the cribs to expand them:

Page 500 of 525

Using ATR

Using Find Item on the Transaction History Screen

At the Transaction History screen, do one of the following: Select Find Item to search on the first item in the list. Select an item from the list and then select Find Item to search for the selected item. The Find Items screen displays results for either the selected item or the first item in the list. NOTE: By default, using Find Item from the Transaction History Screen will display locations and quantity for that item at all cribs within the site. Select the All Cribs button to toggle to locations for just the current crib.

Using Find Item on the Issue Mode Screen

At the Issue Mode screen, do one of the following: Select Find Item to search on the first item in the list. Select an item from the list and then select Find Item to search for the selected item. The Find Items screen displays results for either the selected item or the first item in the list. NOTE: By default, using Find Item from the Issue Mode Screen will display locations and quantity for that item at all cribs within the site. Select the All Cribs button to toggle to locations for just the current crib.

Using ATR Diagnostics

NOTE: In order to use ATR Diagnostics you must be assigned to the DEFAULT site profile or have the Misc > ATR Options permission set in CribMaster Client. ATR diagnostics are used to monitor database connection and data integrity.

Using the Live Log Viewer

The Live Log Viewer allows the user to view an active log of ATR 9 processes. Page 501 of 525

Using ATR To access the Live Log Viewer, touch Admin > Diagnostics. The Live Log Viewer displays by default:

The following buttons are available on the Live Log Viewer tab: Touch this button to begin viewing logs. Touch this button to stop viewing logs.

Touch this button to clear the screen.

Page 502 of 525

Using ATR

Using the Local DB Utility

The Local DB Utility allows you to view transactions before they are uploaded to the CribMaster Database. To access the Local DB Utility, touch Admin > Diagnostics > Local DB Utility tab. The Local DB Utility displays:

The following buttons are available on the Local DB Utility tab: Touch this button to open a local database.

Touch this button to delete the records of uploaded transactions. Touch this button to delete the records of failed transactions.

Page 503 of 525

Using ATR Touch this button to delete the records of pending transactions. Touch this button to delete the records of all transactions.

Using the DB Ping Viewer

The DB Ping Viewer allows you to view a record of the consistency of connection between ATR and the CribMaster database. To access the DB Ping Viewer, touch Admin > Diagnostics > DB Ping Viewer tab. The DB Ping Viewer displays:

Page 504 of 525

Using ATR The following buttons are available on the DB Ping Viewer tab: Touch this button to begin pinging the database. Touch this button to stop pinging the database.

Touch this button to remove the record of previous pings. Touch this button to save a screen print of the current window. Touch this button to have the application query the database at every ping.

ATR Options
The options on this screen set how the main application works. These options apply to all machines. Accessing the Default Options Screen To access the Default Options: 5. From the main screen, touch Admin. The admin screen displays. 6. Touch Options. The Options screen displays. 7. Click Default Options. The Default Options screen displays.

Understanding the Default Options Screen

Administrative Functions
AllowChangePin If TRUE, users can change their passwords. If FALSE, users cannot change their passwords. (Default = TRUE) AllowCount If TRUE, Count Mode is accessible for permitted users to cycle count. If FALSE, Count Mode is not accessible. (Default = TRUE)

Page 505 of 525

Using ATR AllowReceive If TRUE, Receive Mode is accessible for permitted users to receive product from purchase orders. If FALSE, Receive Mode is not accessible. (Default = TRUE) AllowReturns If TRUE, Return Mode is accessible for permitted users to return issued items back to the vending machine. If FALSE, Return Mode is not accessible. (Default = TRUE) AllowSetupMode If TRUE, Setup Mode is accessible for permitted users to do basic setup functions. If FALSE, Setup Mode is not accessible. (Default = TRUE) AllowTransHistory - If TRUE, the Transaction History Screen is accessible for users to view their transaction history. If FALSE, the Transaction History Screen is not accessible. (Default = TRUE) DefaultEmployee Enter a valid Employee ID, which is used If ATR is unable to identify the user for a transaction. If the Employee ID is invalid, these transactions will fail to upload to the main database. DownloadInterval The amount of time, in seconds, between data downloads. (Default = 3600) NotifyOnLicenseExpiry - If TRUE, license notifications will display on ATR after each unsuccessful license check. If FALSE, no notification will display regarding licenses, however, ATR will remain silently disconnected from the database. In either case, no transactions will be uploaded until the license is corrected. (Default = TRUE) ReceiveByPO If TRUE, the Select PO and Reset PO Buttons on the Receive Screen are visible. If FALSE, the Select PO and Reset PO Buttons on the Receive Screen are hidden. (Default = TRUE) RestrictColumnLayout - Set this to True to keep users from altering the way columns display onscreen. (Default = FALSE) UploadInterval The amount of time, in seconds, between transaction data uploads. (Default = 60) WebServiceUrl Enter a Web Service URL that will distribute software upgrades to this machine

Cost Centers Screen

Page 506 of 525

Using ATR CostCentersFirst - If FALSE, the Cost Centers Screen displays first if UDFs are required, otherwise only by pressing the Cost Centers Button. If TRUE, the Cost Centers Screen always displays prior to the Issue Mode Screen. (Default = FALSE) HideUser1 If FALSE, User 1 displays on the Cost Centers Screen. If TRUE, User 1 is hidden on the Cost Centers Screen. (Default = FALSE) HideUser2 If FALSE, User 2 displays on the Cost Centers Screen. If TRUE, User 2 is hidden on the Cost Centers Screen. (Default = FALSE) HideUser3 If FALSE, User 3 displays on the Cost Centers Screen. If TRUE, User 3 is hidden on the Cost Centers Screen. (Default = FALSE) HideUser4 If FALSE, User 4 displays on the Cost Centers Screen. If TRUE, User 4 is hidden on the Cost Centers Screen. (Default = FALSE) HideUser5 If FALSE, User 5 displays on the Cost Centers Screen. If TRUE, User 5 is hidden on the Cost Centers Screen. (Default = FALSE) HideUser6 If FALSE, User 2 displays on the Cost Centers Screen. If TRUE, User 6 is hidden on the Cost Centers Screen. (Default = FALSE) TIP: Ensure that if a UDF is Required, you do not hide that particular UDF. LockDefaultUDFs If FALSE, users are able to modify their default UDFs on the Cost Centers Screen. If TRUE, users are unable to change their default UDFs to other values. (Default = FALSE)

Formatting
AllowCardView If FALSE, Card View is not available to display. If TRUE, Card View is accessible and will display the first available image link on each card. (Default = FALSE) AllowCarouselView - If FALSE, Carousel View is not available to display. If TRUE, Carousel View is accessible and will display the first available image link on each card. (Default = FALSE) AllowFavorites If FALSE, the Issue Mode Screen will display. If TRUE, the Issue Mode Favorites Screen will display with the users filtered list. If the AllowFavorites option is FALSE, this option is inapplicable. (Default = FALSE) Page 507 of 525

Using ATR

AllowGridView - If TRUE, Grid View is available to display. If FALSE, Grid View is not available to display. If the AllowCardView, AllowCarouseView and AllowGridView options are all FALSE, AllowGridView will display as if TRUE. (Defaut = TRUE) AllowItemInfo - If TRUE, the Item Info Button will display any valid links. Valid links are 125KB or smaller and one of the following file types: BMP, DOC, GIF, HTML, JPG, PDF, PNG, RTF or XLS. If FALSE, the Item Info Button will not display. (Default = TRUE) AltDescField If blank, no Alternate Description Column will display. If a valid INVENTRY (Item) Custom Field Name is entered, it will display on the Issue Mode, Return Mode, Transaction Summary and Transaction History Screens. (Default = Blank) ApplicationFont The font name and size for text throughout the application, but not within the grids. (Default = Microsoft Sans Serif, 14.25pt) BadgeGoodAsPIN If FALSE, and the UsePassword Option is TRUE, a badge scan alone is not sufficient for Employee authentication with passwords. Otherwise, a badge scan alone is sufficient for Employee authentication. (Default = TRUE) CardViewDefault If FALSE, Grid View is the default view for the Issue Screen. If TRUE, Card View is the default view for the Issue Screen. If the AllowCardView option is FALSE, this option is inapplicable. (Default = FALSE) CarouselViewDefault - If FALSE, Grid View is the default view for the Issue Screen. If TRUE, Carousel View is the default view for the Issue Screen. If the AllowCarouselView option is FALSE or the CardViewDefault option is TRUE, this option is inapplicable. (Default = FALSE) DragScroll If FALSE, movement within a grid is done with the scroll bar or Page Up and Page Down Buttons. If TRUE, movement can also be done by scrolling through the grid with a finger, using a gentle swiping motion. (Default = FALSE) FavoritesFirst If FALSE, the Issue Mode Screen will display. If TRUE, the Issue Mode- Favorites First screen will display with the user's

Page 508 of 525

Using ATR filtered list. If the AllowFavorites option is FALSE, this option is inapplicable. (Default=FALSE) HogScreen If TRUE, the ATR window is always hogging the screen from other applications on that computer. If FALSE, the user can navigate between ATR and other applications. (Default = TRUE) IssueButtonSaysOpen If FALSE, the Issue Button text displays "Issue". If TRUE, the Issue Button text displays "Open". (Default = FALSE) ListByItem If FALSE, the Issue Mode Screen displays a bin list. If TRUE, the Issue Mode Screen displays an item list, which incorporates quantity from all bins with that item in this crib. (Default = FALSE) ListFont - The font name and size for text within all grids and lists. (Default = Microsoft Sans Serif, 15.75pt, style=Italic) LogoutOnIssue If FALSE, the user is logged out after pressing the Logout Button, or the Timeout Option expires, whichever is first. If TRUE, the user is logged out upon issuing an item(s). (Default = FALSE) ShowLoginList - If TRUE, the Employee List will display on the Login Screen. If FALSE, the Login Screen displays "Please Scan Your Badge" and users must authenticate using a barcode scan, proximity scan, or magnetic swipe. (Default = TRUE) ShowLoginTextInput If FALSE, and the ShowLoginList Option is FALSE, the Login Screen will display "Please Scan Your Badge". If TRUE, and the ShowLoginList Option is FALSE, the user can login by entering their Employee ID and Password. If ShowLoginList is TRUE, this option is inapplicable. (Default = FALSE) SiteFiltering - If FALSE, all relevant data will be downloaded. If TRUE, only Employee and User1-6 data associated with this Crib's SiteID will be displayed. Setting to TRUE is required for the Advantage Program. (Default = FALSE) StopLoginOnDisconnect - If FALSE, users can login and perform functions in Disconnected Mode. If TRUE, users cannot login when in Disconnected Mode. (Default = FALSE)

Page 509 of 525

Using ATR TimeOut The amount of time, in seconds, of inactivity that passes before ATR returns to the Login Screen. (Default = 20) UsePassword - If TRUE, any password in the database is required for login. If FALSE, passwords are not required to login. (Default = TRUE)

Interactive Vending Machines

StoreStockoutsInEventLog If blank, no event log message will be written. If text is entered, that text is written to the event log with the action "Stockout" anytime a user single-clicks a line on the Issue Mode Screen of an interactive device that has less than the default issue quantity available. (Default = Blank) RapidScanNoConfirm If FALSE, scanning a bin or item barcode will highlight the bin or item in the grid, then the user must explicitly press the Issue Button. If TRUE, scanning a bin or item barcode will immediately issue the item without confirmation. (Default = FALSE) RecordStockouts If FALSE, no record will be posted to the Events Table on stockouts. If TRUE, ATR will write to the Events Table when the Employee single clicks on a line item on the Issue Mode Screen that has less quantity than the default issue quantity. Default = FALSE. TakeScreenBookOnTimeout - If FALSE, the Enter Quantities Screen will not book transactions when this screen times out. If TRUE, the Enter Quantities Screen will book transactions when this screen times out. If the TakeScreenTimeout option is 0, this option is inapplicable. (Default = FALSE) TakeScreenSeedQuantity If TRUE, the Enter Item Quantities Screen will populate the quantity for the bin or item selected from the Issue Mode Screen. If FALSE, the Enter Item Quantities Screen will have 0 quantities for all bins or items in the list, regardless of the bin or item selected to arrive at that screen. (Default = TRUE) TakeScreenTimeout - If 0, the Enter Quantities Screen will not timeout. If a value is entered, in seconds, the Enter Quantities Screen will timeout in this many seconds. (Default = 0)

Page 510 of 525

Using ATR VendReworkedFirst - If FALSE, items are issued from the selected bin or item. If TRUE, items are issued from rework bins before new bins. (Default = FALSE)

Misc
BatchUpload - The maximum number of transactions per batch that will be uploaded to the main database at Logout or on the Upload Interval. (Default = 50) CatalogUrl Enter a URL to enable the Web Catalog Button. When the Web Catalog button is pressed, the URL will be accessible within ATR. NOTE: The Web Catalog button does not activate a web browser. EnforceDoorRestrictions:If FALSE, item restrictions are only honored for specific bins on Interactive Machines. If TRUE, and the Employee lacks access to at least one item in an RFID Device or behind one MultiStore door, then the employee is denied access to the entire RFID Crib or MultiStore door, respectively. (Default = FALSE) LogShutDown - If FALSE, no event log message will be written when ATR is closed. If TRUE, an event log message (ATR Closed, Crib [Crib], Escape Key Pressed) is written when ATR is closed (when the Escape Key is pressed or after an automatic or forced restart). (Default = FALSE) LogStartup If TRUE, an event log message (ATR Started, Crib [Crib], Last Reports [DateTime] Elapsed Down Time [TimeSpan]) will be written when ATR initializes in Connected Mode. If FALSE, no event log message will be written when ATR initializes in Connected Mode. (Default = TRUE) SkipIssue If FALSE, both Issue and Return Transactions are allowed at this Crib. If TRUE, this Crib is a "Return To Crib" where only returns are permitted. (Default = FALSE) StationAddress This is the hardware address for a crib within a group. (Default = 1) Ping The amount of time, in milliseconds, at which ATR pings the web service. (Default = 30)

Page 511 of 525

Using ATR PingReachesDb - If TRUE, the application will query the database on pings. If FALSE, the application will only query the data portal on pings. (Default = TRUE) PingTimeout - The amount of time, in milliseconds, before the application's pings will time out. If the ping does not return in this amount of time, the application will go into disconnected mode. (Default = 2000)

Passive Vending Machines

DisableOpenAfterIssue - If FALSE, the open button will display on the Transaction Summary Screen and the Issue Mode Screen after the initial unlock. If TRUE, the open button will not display on the Transaction Summary Screen and the Issue Mode Screen after the initial unlock. (Default=FALSE) ItemsOutHideZPQName - If FALSE, items on the Items Out Screen with a zero plant quantity will display the Last Employee for that RFID tag. If TRUE, items on the Items Out Screen with a zero plant quantity will not display an Employee for that item. Default = FALSE OpenOnAuthentication If FALSE, the user must press the Open Button to enter the crib. If TRUE, the crib is unlocked immediately after authentication. (Default = FALSE) RFIDLogEmployee If FALSE, no event log messages will be written when an Employee logs into ATR on a passive device. If TRUE, event log messages (Crib [Crib] enter employee [Employee Name] - No Transaction; Crib [Crib] Employee Enter [Employee Name]) will be written for passive devices when Employees enter the crib, or exit the crib with no transaction. (Default = FALSE) RFIDLogUnlock If FALSE, no event log message is written when an Employee unlocks a passive device. If TRUE, an event log message (Crib [Crib] Employee Unlock [Employee Name]) is written when an Employee unlocks a passive device. (Default = FALSE) RFIDReportMyTagsOnly - If TRUE, this cabinet will disregard RFID tags that are not assigned to either a CribBin within this Crib, a Serial ID that is assigned to a CribBin within this Crib, or to a Serial ID with this Home Crib. If FALSE, all visible RFID tags will be considered in this cabinet. (Default = TRUE) Page 512 of 525

Using ATR

RfidReturnEmployeeTrumpsTag If FALSE, RFID return transactions are booked to the user who originally checked out the item. If TRUE, the user that returns the item has the original issue transaction reassigned to them. (Default = FALSE) RFIDUnassignExpendableOnISSUE If FALSE, issuing expendable items from RFID cabinets maintains the RFID association. If TRUE, issuing expendable items from RFID cabinets unassigns the RFID tag seen. (Default = FALSE) ShowRFIDDetails If TRUE, the RFID Details Button is enabled on RFID Cabinets when no one is authenticated. Pressing this button will display a listing of RFID tags in this cabinet and details on each. If FALSE, the RFID Details Button is hidden. (Default = TRUE) ShowRFIDItemsOut If TRUE, the RFID Items Out Button is enabled on RFID Cabinets. Pressing this button will display the Items Out Screen, which is a listing of items issued from this cabinet that have not been returned. If FALSE, the RFID Items Out Button is hidden. (Default = TRUE) SilentMode If FALSE, Passive Vending Machines will display the RFID tag count down on the Scanning Screen and then display the Transaction Summary Screen. If TRUE, Passive Vending Machines will not display the RFID tag count down on the Scanning Screen or the Transaction Summary Screen. (Default = FALSE) SilentModeShowSummary If FALSE, this option is inapplicable and follows the SilentMode Option designation. If TRUE, and the SilentMode Option is TRUE, the Transaction Summary Screen will display in Silent Mode without pressing the Show Details Button. (Default = FALSE)

Transaction History Screen

GroupTransbyItemClass If FALSE, the Transaction History Screen displays transactions by date. If TRUE, the Transaction History Screen groups transactions by Item Group. (Default = FALSE) TransactionMessage Enter a message to display every time a user leaves the Transaction History Screen. At the end of the message, the user will be prompted with Yes and No Buttons. Yes will display the next screen; No will log the user out. Page 513 of 525

Using ATR

TransHistoryFirst If FALSE, the Transaction History Screen will display after pressing the Transaction History Button (if the AllowTransHistory Option is TRUE). If TRUE, the Transaction History Screen will display first after logging in. (Default = FALSE)

Options for RFID Devices

When an RFID machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for RFID options. Choose RFID Reader Use this drop-down to designate the reader that the Accu device is using.

Alarm
NOTE: These settings can be used to have the machine issue an alarm when the door/drawer is opened or closed. DoorClosedAlarm The length of time, in milliseconds, that the alarm sounds when a door or drawer is closed. If 0, the alarm is off. (Default = 0) DoorOpenAlarmDelay The amount of time, in milliseconds, before the alarm sounds when a door or drawer is open. If 0, the alarm is off. (Default = 0) DoorOpenAlarmDuration The amount of time, in milliseconds, the alarm will sound when the door or drawer is open. If 0, the alarm is off. (Default = 0) DoorOpenAlarmInterval The amount of time, in milliseconds, between the alarm sounds when a door or drawer is open. If 0, the alarm is off. (Default = 0)

Com Ports
ATRDoorLockPort Com port value for the door lock. (Default = COM1) DoorSwitchPort Com port value for the door switch. (Default = COM2)

Page 514 of 525

Using ATR

Connections
AR400IPAddress Enter the IP address for the RFID Reader. (Default = 10.2.2.101) ATRIpAddress - The IP address of the computer where ATR is running. This option is only relevant in ATR Classic. AR400PortTalking The socket port to communicate to the computer where ATR is running. This option is only relevant in ATR Classic. (Default = 0) HandshakeInterval The interval of time, in seconds, at which the ACAB application sends a message to ATR to confirm communication. This option is only relevant in ATR Classic. (Default = 30)

Formatting
EnableSpeech If FALSE, speech is disabled. If TRUE, speech is enabled. Speakers are required when this option is TRUE. (Default = FALSE) Threshold The amount of time, in seconds, that the cabinet will scan once the door(s) or drawers are closed. This amount is tripled to designate the initial scan on startup. (Default = 10) WhoopsInterval The frequency, in seconds, that the application displays RFID tag corrections to the Transaction Summary Screen. (Default = 1) WhoopsReplyThreshold The number of times a RFID tag must be read after the scanning cycle before it is considered inside the cabinet. If 0, any RFID tag seen after the scanning cycle is considered inside the cabinet. (Default = 0)

Lock Control
DoorSwitchNormallyOpen - If FALSE, the application considers the door closed when the physical switch is depressed. If TRUE, the application considers the door closed when the switch is physically open. (Default = FALSE)

Page 515 of 525

Using ATR DoorTime The amount of time, in milliseconds, after all doors or drawers are closed before the cabnet locks and begins its scanning cycle. (Default = 4000) SlowLock - The amount of time, in milliseconds, for a lock to close after the lock command is sent. 500 milliseconds is recommended for Electronic Locks ("ELOCKS") only. 0 milliseconds is recommended for all other lock types. (Default = 500) UseLockBarSwitch If FALSE, the application ignores any lock bar communication. FALSE is recommended for most AccuDrawer lock configurations, which do not include the lock bar switch. If TRUE, the cabinet is not considered locked until all 8 drawer switches and the lock bar switch is closed. TRUE is recommended for an AccuDrawer with the switch bar ("SBAR") lock configuration including the lock bar switch ("ninth switch"). (Default = FALSE)

Misc
BeConcernedTimeout The amount of time, in seconds, after which the application begins to be concerned if it has not received communication from the RFID Reader when expecting to. (Default = 10) LogNewTags - If TRUE, the ATR log will log new tags that are identified. If FALSE, new tags are not logged. (Default = TRUE) ReaderPollingInterval - The amount of time, in milliseconds, that the application polls the RFID Reader. (Default = 750) RefreshDomesticOnUnlock If TRUE, the application's domestic tag list is refreshed each time a door or drawer is unlocked. If FALSE, the application's domestic tag list is refreshed according to the DownloadInterval Option. (Default=TRUE) RFIDCABox - If TRUE, the cabinet does not use a magnetic lock. If FALSE, the lock is magnetic. (Default = TRUE) TagReaderPassword Enter the RFID Reader's login password. (Default = admin) TagReaderUserName - Enter the RFID Reader's login user name. (Default = admin)

Page 516 of 525

Using ATR

RFID Signal Control

NOTE: These options dictate how ACAB and ATR handle cases where the reader identifies a tag for an item that does not belong in that particular crib. These items are labeled as Foreign while items that do belong in the crib are known as Domestic. In cases where a foreign item is discovered, ACAB will determine if the item should be added (switched from foreign to domestic). It makes this determination by consistently reading it. If the tag can no longer be read after a set amount of time, it is discarded. While this is going on, the tag is kept in a kind of virtual Ellis Island. ForeignReads The amount of reads that a foreign tag must be read before being considered inside the cabinet. The ForeignReads and ForeignSeconds Options are directly related, and therefore, both must be greater than 0 for either to be activated. (Default = 3) ForeignSeconds The amount of time, in seconds, that a tag must be read at least once while meeting the ForeignRead threshold. If the tag is not read during this amount of time, the ForeignRead count starts over at 0. The ForeignReads and ForeignSeconds Options are directly related, and therefore, both must be greater than 0 for either to be activated. (Default = 1) LightControl If FALSE, the machine lights stay on at all times. If TRUE, the machine lights are off during the application's initial start up and during scanning cycles. (Default = FALSE) LogDomesticTags If TRUE, the ATR log will log domestic tag lists. If FALSE, domestic tag information will not be included in the log. (Default = TRUE) PowerSavingMode The amount of time, in seconds, that the RFID Reader is active after a user closes the cabinet. After this time, the RFID Reader remains idle until the next user closes the cabinet. If 0, the RFID Reader is active whenever the cabinet is closed. (Default = 0) RefrigeratorSwitch If FALSE, and the LightControl Option is TRUE, the machine lights are off during scanning cycles. If TRUE, and the LightControl Option is TRUE, the machine lights are off when the door is closed, and are on when the door is open. If the LightControl Option is FALSE, this option is inapplicable and the lights are on at all times. (Default = FALSE) Page 517 of 525

Using ATR NOTE: This option works with the LightControl option above: If the LightControl option is set to TRUE, and the RefrigeratorSwitch option set to FALSE, then the light control will turn off during scanning and remain on otherwise. If the LightControl option is set to TRUE, and the RefrigeratorSwitch option set to TRUE, then the light will come on when the door is open and off when the door is closed. If the LightControl option is set to FALSE (regardless of the RefrigeratorSwitch option), then the light will always be on.

ScanningReplyThreshold The number of times a RFID tag must be read during the scanning cycle before it is considered inside the cabinet. If 0, any RFID tag seen during the scanning cycle is considered inside the cabinet. (Default = 0)

Reader Settings
LLRP Transmit Power Select the transmit power for the RFID Reader. (Default = 71) Search Type Enter the Impinj RFID Reader polling setting. When Single_Target, the reader attempts to read tags that have not been seen within the last few seconds, giving a 'deeper' read. When Dual_Target, the reader will attempt to read all tags in its field of vision, regardless of how recently it has seen them, giving a 'broader' read. Single_Target is recommended for larger tag lists (>120) and Dual_Target for smaller tag lists (<120). (Default = Single_Target) Single-Target With this setting, the reader will only look for tags in their unread state. Recommended with 80+ tags. Dual-Target With this setting, the reader will look for tags in any state. Recommended with less than 80 tags. Reader Enter the RFID Reader type for this cabinet. (Default = ImpinjRFIDReader.ImpinjReader, ImpinjRFIDReader, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=null)

Options for Specific Machines

Accu-Port Options
Page 518 of 525

Using ATR

When an AccuPort machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for AccuPort options. ComPorts DualPort If FALSE, only one AccuPort is used for both entry and exit to the crib. If TRUE, multiple AccuPorts use the same crib number to act as multiple entry and exit points for the same crib. (Default = FALSE) InsideMatComPort Com port value for the larger pressure mat inside the crib. (Default = COM4) LockComPort Com port value for the door lock. (Default = COM1) OutsideMatComPort Com port value for the smaller pressure mat inside the AccuPort itself. (Default = COM3) Antenna Sensitivity Sensitivity1 The sensitivity threshold for antenna 1 to consider tags active. A typical sensitivity range is between 25 and 80, with 80 being the maximum. The antenna sensitivity can also be modified in AccuPort Admin Mode. (Default = 50) Sensitivity2 The sensitivity threshold for antenna 2 to consider tags active. A typical sensitivity range is between 25 and 80, with 80 being the maximum. The antenna sensitivity can also be modified in AccuPort Admin Mode. (Default = 50) Sensitivity3 The sensitivity threshold for antenna 3 to consider tags active. A typical sensitivity range is between 25 and 80, with 80 being the maximum. The antenna sensitivity can also be modified in AccuPort Admin Mode. (Default = 50) Sensitivity4 This option is obsolete for AccuPorts, as they have only 3 antennas. Misc AnnounceTagMovement If TRUE, the AccuPort announces the number of tags going in or out of the crib. If FALSE, no announcements are made in reference to tag movement. (Default = TRUE) Page 519 of 525

Using ATR

AutoLogout The amount of time, in seconds, that the AccuPort retains an employee name while the employee is inside the crib. If 0, the employees are kept indefinitely until the they log out of the machine. (Default = 0) DualPort If FALSE, only one AccuPort is used for both entry and exit to the crib. If TRUE, multiple AccuPorts use the same crib number to act as multiple entry and exit points for the same crib. (Default = FALSE) LogEmployeesonExit If FALSE, no event log message will be written when an Employee exits an AccuPort device. If TRUE, an event log message (Crib [Crib] Employee Exit [Employee Name]) will be written for AccuPort devices when Employees exit the crib. (Default = FALSE) ReportForeignFugitives - If FALSE, no event log message will be recorded if a serial ID assigned to a different crib with a status of Checked In is seen by the current crib. If TRUE, an event log message(Fugitive Tagged Serial ID[Serial ID]Detected in Accuport[Crib] accompanied by an Employee[Employee Name])will be written if a Serial ID assigned to a different crib with a status of Checked In is seen by the current crib. RequireOutboundCredentials If FALSE, the AccuPort door opens automatically on exit. If TRUE, employees must scan a proximity badge or scan a barcode with their credentials upon exit. (Default = FALSE) SayGoodbye - If FALSE, the AccuPort device will not say goodbye when pressure is removed from the pad inside the AccuPort. If TRUE, and the EnableSpeech option is TRUE, the AccuPort will say goodbye when pressure is removed from the pad inside the AccuPort. If the EnableSpeech option is FALSE, this option is inapplicable. Default = FALSE. SayPleaseIdentify - If FALSE, the AccuPort device will not say please identify yourself when pressure is added to the pad inside the AccuPort. If TRUE, and the EnableSpeech option in TRUE, the AccuPort will say please identify yourself when pressure is added to the pad inside the AccuPort device. If the EnableSpeech option is FALSE, this option is inapplicable. Default = FALSE.

Page 520 of 525

Using ATR

AMS ToolBox Options

When an AMS ToolBox machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for AMS ToolBox options. BookOnNoDrop If TRUE, a transaction is booked whether or not a drop is detected by the drop sensor. If FALSE, the drop sensor determines if a transaction is booked. (Default = TRUE) CribComPort Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM1)

CabLock Options
When a CabLock machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for CabLock options. COMPort Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM1) DoorTimeout The maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, that the drawer will stay unlocked. (Default = 10000) MultiStoreIssueDoorPopup If FALSE, no notification will display when a door is opened on a MultiStore. If TRUE, a notification will display when a door is opened on a MultiStore. The user will press OK before going to the Enter Item Quantities Screen. (Default = FALSE)

Hybrid Accucab/Weigh Station Options

When a Hybrid AccuCab or Weigh Station machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for Hybrid AccuCab/Weigh Station Options. ComPort Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM4) DoorLockPort Com port value for the door lock. (Default = COM1) DoorSwitchPort Com port value for the door switch. (Default = COM2) RecordWeightGainsIf FALSE, no event log message will be recorded if weight is added to the scale(s). If TRUE, an event log message Page 521 of 525

Using ATR (Employee [Employee Name] added [Weight] to Scale [CribBin]) will be recorded if weight is added to the scale(s) by an unauthorized Employee. (Default = FALSE) RestockEmployeeIdIf blank, an event log message (Employee [Employee Name] added [Weight] to Scale [CribBin]) will record if the RecordWeightGains option is TRUE. If a valid Employee ID is specified no event log message will we be written if that employee adds weight to the scale(s). (Default = Blank) Threshold The amount of time, in seconds, that the cabinet will scan once the door(s) are closed. This amount is tripled to designate the initial scan on startup. (Default = 10)

MagLock
When a MagLock machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for MagLock options. COMPort Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM1) DoorTimeout The maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, that the drawer will stay unlocked. (Default = 10000) MultiStoreIssueDoorPopup If FALSE, no notification will display when a door is opened on a MultiStore. If TRUE, a notification will display when a door is opened on a MultiStore. The user will press OK before going to the Enter Item Quantities Screen. (Default = FALSE)

MagLockOne
When a ModuLock machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for ModuLock Options. ComPort - Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM1) SleepTry - The amount of time, in milliseconds, between the application sending a command to the control board and attempting to read it. (Default = 300)

Page 522 of 525

Using ATR StatusReplyLength - The length of text, in characters, of the machine status reply. The original machine protocol calls for 27 bytes. (Default = 41) Timeout - The amount of time, in seconds, before communication to the machine control board will time out. (Default = 20)

ModuLock Options
When a ModuLock machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for ModuLock Options. ComPort Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM1) LockBurst The amount of time, in milliseconds, during which the solenoid fires to open a locker. (Default = 300) SmartLockers If FALSE, the user cannot issue more than the Default Issue Quantity. If TRUE, the user is allowed to issue more than the Default Issue Quantity by opening additional lockers which contain the same item. (Default = FALSE)

MultiStore Options
When a MultiStore machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for MultiStore Options. COMPort Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM1) DoorTimeout The maximum amount of time, in milliseconds, that the drawer will stay unlocked. (Default = 10000) MultiStoreIssueDoorPopup If FALSE, no notification will display when a door is opened on a MultiStore. If TRUE, a notification will display when a door is opened on a MultiStore. The user will press OK before going to the Enter Item Quantities Screen. (Default = FALSE)

Pro-Stock Options
When a ProStock machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for ProStock options. Page 523 of 525

Using ATR

CommandTimeout The amount of time, in milliseconds, before the communication times out between sending a command and receiving its acknowledgement. (Default = 5000) ComPort Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM1) LockerLightsOn If TRUE, the ProStock locker lights will be on at all times. If FALSE, the ProStock locker lights will be off at all times. (Default = TRUE) MaxDoorTries This is the maximum amount of tries the machine will attempt to open a door. (Default = 3) RecordTransactionOnJam If TRUE, a transaction will be booked after failing to open the door its maximum tries. If FALSE, a transaction will not be booked after failing to open the door its maximum tries. (Default = TRUE) SpinTimeout - The amount of time, in seconds, that the application will wait for a carousel to stop spinning before timing out. (Default = 120)

ToolBox Options
When a ToolBox machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for ToolBox options. ComPort Com port value for the machine control board (also referred to as a "black box"). (Default = COM1) SleepTry - The amount of time, in milliseconds, that the application waits before retrying commands to the machine. (Default = 300)

ToolCube Option
When a ToolCube machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for ToolCube options. LockDrawer - The amount of time, in seconds, after pressing the Issue Button that the user has to open a drawer before it relocks. (Default = 10)

Page 524 of 525

Using ATR SpeedBump - The range, between 1 and 31, to determine if a drawer is being opened too quickly. Each unit acts as 13.3 milliseconds. If the drawer is being opened faster than this amount of time the drawers will relock immediately. (Default = 4, or 53.2 milliseconds) ExtendedCube - If FALSE, the drawer will open to the next available slot with bin quantity default issue quantity. If TRUE, the application will prompt the user for their requested quantity, then the drawer will open to the position exposing that quantity. This option is not functional when drawers are grouped. (Default = FALSE) ResetAfterAllOpens - If FALSE, the controller board will reset only as needed. If TRUE, the controller board will reset every time a drawer is opened. (Default = FALSE) ComPort - Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM1)

Weigh Station Options

When a WeighStation machine is selected, an additional tab is enabled for WeighStation Options. ComPort Com port value for the machine control board. (Default = COM4) DoorLockPort Com port value for the door lock. (Default = COM1) DoorSwitchPort Com port value for the door switch. (Default = COM2) RecordWeightGainsIf FALSE, no event log message will be recorded if weight is added to the scale(s). If TRUE, an event log message (Employee [Employee Name] added [Weight] to Scale [CribBin]) will be recorded if weight is added to the scale(s) by an unauthorized Employee. (Default = FALSE) RestockEmployeeIdIf blank, an event log message (Employee [Employee Name] added [Weight] to Scale [CribBin]) will record if the RecordWeightGains option is TRUE. If a valid Employee ID is specified no event log message will we be written if that employee adds weight to the scale(s). (Default = Blank) Threshold The amount of time, in seconds, that the cabinet will scan once the door(s) are closed. This amount is tripled to designate the initial scan on startup. (Default = 10) Page 525 of 525